SAMSUNG MEDISON

DIAGNOSTIC ULTRASOUND SYSTEM

Version 2.01

HS50/HS60
XH50/XH60
User Manual
English

Copyright © 2018 By SAMSUNG MEDISON CO., LTD. All rights reserved.

 WARRANTY

Samsung Medison provides the following warranty to the purchaser of this unit. This warranty is valid for a
period of one year from the date of installation and covers all problems caused by faulty workmanship or faulty
material. Samsung Medison will, as sole and exclusive remedy and at no charge, replace any such defective unit
returned to Samsung Medison within the designated warranty period.
The warranty does not cover damages and loss caused by outside factors including, but not limited to, fire, flood,
storm, tidal wave, lightning, earthquake, theft, abnormal conditions of operation, and intentional destruction of
the equipment. Damage caused by equipment relocation is not covered.
The warranty is void in cases where the equipment has been damaged as a result of an accident, misuse, abuse,
dropping, or when attempts to modify or alter any part or assembly of the equipment have taken place.
Parts with cosmetic defects or deterioration will not be replaced. Replacement of batteries, training materials,
and supplies are not covered.
Samsung Medison will not be responsible for incidental or consequential damages of any kind arising from or
connected with the use of the equipment.
Samsung Medison will not be responsible for any loss, damage, or injury resulting from a delay in services
rendered under the warranty
This limited warranty is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied, including warranties of merchant
ability or fitness for any particular use. No representative or other person is authorized to represent or assume
for Samsung Medison any warranty liability beyond that set forth herein.
Defective equipment shipped from you to Samsung Medison must be packed in the replacement cartons.
Shipping and insurance costs are the responsibility of the customer. To return defective material to Samsung
Medison contact the Samsung Medison Customer Service Department.
Samsung Medison or a local distributor will make available, upon request, circuit diagrams, a component parts
list, descriptions, calibration instructions and other information which will assist your appropriately qualified
technical personnel to repair those parts of the equipment which are designed by Samsung Medison as
repairable.
Subject to the applicable laws of the relevant territory, Samsung Medison reserves the right to accommodate
service requests by
(1) replacing the product presented for repair with a refurbished product of the same model or
(2) repairing the product with refurbished parts.
The refurbished products and parts shall be subject to the same inspection, quality control procedures as for
new products and parts.
CAUTION: United State federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of physicians.

MANUFACTURER : SAMSUNG MEDISON CO., LTD.

3366, Hanseo-ro, Nam-myeon, Hongcheon-gun, Gangwon-do 25108, REPUBLIC OF KOREA
Customer Service Department : SAMSUNG MEDISON CO., LTD.
Website: www.samsungmedison.com
EC Representative : SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UNITED KINGDOM
United States Agent : NEUROLOGICA CORPORATION
14 Electronics Avenue, Danvers, MA 01923 USA
PROPRIETARY INFORMATION AND SOFTWARE LICENSE
The Customer shall keep confidential all proprietary information furnished or disclosed to the
Customer by Samsung Medison unless such information has become part of the public domain
through no fault of the Customer. The Customer shall not use such proprietary information,
without the prior written consent of Samsung Medison, for any purpose other than the
maintenance, repair or operation of the goods.
Samsung Medison systems contain Samsung Medison proprietary software in machine-readable
form. Samsung Medison retains all its rights, title and interest in the software except that
purchase of this product includes a license to use the machine-readable software contained
in it. The Customer shall not copy, trace, disassemble or modify the software. Transfer of this
product by the Customer shall constitute a transfer of this license that shall not be otherwise
transferable. Upon cancellation or termination of this contract or return of the goods for reasons
other than repair or modification, the Customer shall return to Samsung Medison all such
proprietary information.
 Safety Standards
„„Classifications
XXType of protection against electrical shock: Class I
XXDegree of protection against electrical shock (when the patient is in physical contact):
Type BF or Defibrillation-proof type CF applied part
XXDegree of protection against the ingress of harmful liquids: General equipment
XXDegree of safety of use in the presence of flammable anesthetic agent mixed with air,
oxygen, or nitrous oxide: Not suitable for use near flammable anesthetic agent mixed
with air, oxygen, or nitrous oxide
XXMode of operation: Continuous operation

„„Electromechanical Safety Standards Met

XXMedical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Basic Safety and
Essential Performance [IEC 60601-1]
XXMedical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Basic Safety and
Essential Performance [ANSI/AAMI ES60601-1]
XXMedical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Basic Safety and
Essential Performance [CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 60601-1]
XXMedical Electrical Equipment, Part 1-2: General Requirements for Basic Safety and
Essential Performance – Collateral Standard: Electromagnetic Compatibility –
Requirements and Tests [IEC 60601-1-2]
XXMedical Electrical Equipment, Part 1-6: General Requirements for Basic Safety and
Essential Performance – Collateral Standard: Usability [IEC 60601-1-6]
XXMedical Electrical Equipment, Part 2-37: Particular Requirements for the Basic Safety
and Essential Performance of Ultrasonic Medical Diagnostic and Monitoring Equipment
[IEC 60601-2-37]
XXMedical Devices – Application of Risk Management to Medical Devices [ISO 14971]
XXBiological Evaluation of Medical Devices, Part 1: Evaluation and Testing within a Risk
Management Process [ISO 10993-1]
„„Statements

The Nemko-CCL mark with “C” and “US” identifiers indicates that
the product is compliant with and certified to the applicable U.S.
and Canadian standards.

This mark certifies that the product conforms to applicable EEC

standards and has been certified by the European certification
agency.

This mark certifies that the product conforms to applicable EEC

standards.

The GMP symbol indicates the Good Manufacturing Practice in

accordance with the Korean quality management regulations.
 Precautions for Use
You should be familiar with all of these areas before attempting to use this manual or your
ultrasound system.
XXPlease keep this user guide close to the product as a reference when using the system.
XXFor safe use of this product, you should read ‘Chapter 1. Safety’ and ‘Chapter 4. Maintenance’ in
this manual, prior to starting to use this system.
XXThis manual does not include diagnosis results or opinions. Also, check the measurement
reference for each application’s result measurement before making the final diagnosis.
XXThis product is an ultrasound scanner and cannot be used from a user’s PC. We are not
responsible for errors that occur when the system software is run on a user’s PC.
XXOnly medical doctors or persons supervised by medical doctors should use this system.
Persons who are not qualified must not operate this product.
XXThe manufacturer is not responsible for any damage to this product caused by carelessness
and/or neglect by the user.
XXPlease note that orders are based on the individually agreed specifications and may not
contain all features listed in the user manual.
XXIt might be possible that some features, options or probes are NOT available in some
countries.
XXAll references to standards/regulations and their revisions are valid for the time of
publication of the user manual.
XXThe figures in the user manual for illustrational purposes only and may be different from what
you see on the screen or device.
XXInformation contained in this user manual is subject to change without prior notice.
XXProducts that are not manufactured by Samsung Medison are marked with the trademark of
their respective copyright holders.
XXThe headings below describe vitally important precautions necessary to prevent hazards.
DANGER: Disregarding this instruction may result in death, serious injury, or other dangerous
situations.

WARNING: Follow these instructions to prevent a serious accident or damage to property.

CAUTION: Follow these instructions to prevent a minor accident or damage to property.

NOTE: The accompanying information covers installation, operation, and maintenance

procedures that require careful attention from the user but have little chance of directly
leading to a dangerous situation.
 Revision History
The revision history of this manual is as follows.

VERSION DATE NOTE

v2.01.00-00 2018.10.16 Initial Release

Product Upgrade and Manual Update

Samsung Medison Ultrasound is committed to innovation and continued improvement. Upgrades
may be announced that consist of hardware or software improvements. Updated manuals will
accompany those system upgrades.
Check if this version of the manual is correct for the system version. If not, please contact the
Customer Service Department.

If You Need Assistance

If you need any assistance with the equipment, like the service manual, please contact the
Samsung Medison Customer Service Department or one of their worldwide customer service
representatives, immediately.
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Safety
Indications for Use....................................................................................................1-3
Contraindications....................................................................................................................................1-3

Safety Information.................................................................................................. 1-4

Safety Symbols........................................................................................................................................1-4
Symbols....................................................................................................................................................1-6
Labels........................................................................................................................................................1-6

Electrical Safety........................................................................................................1-7
Prevention of Electric Shocks............................................................................................................... 1-7
ECG-Related Information......................................................................................................................1-9
ESD............................................................................................................................................................1-9
EMI...........................................................................................................................................................1-10
EMC..........................................................................................................................................................1-10

Mechanical Safety.................................................................................................. 1-17

Moving the Equipment......................................................................................................................... 1-17
Precautions on Ramps......................................................................................................................... 1-18
Precautions for Use............................................................................................................................... 1-18

Biological Safety.................................................................................................... 1-20

ALARA Principle................................................................................................................................... 1-20

Protecting the Environment................................................................................. 1-36

13
 User Manual

Chapter 2 Introduction
Product Specifications............................................................................................ 2-3
Product Configuration.............................................................................................2-7
Monitor..................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
Control Panel......................................................................................................................................... 2-11
Console...................................................................................................................................................2-18
Peripheral Devices................................................................................................................................2-21
Probes.................................................................................................................................................... 2-24
Accessories........................................................................................................................................... 2-25
Optional Functions.............................................................................................................................. 2-26

Chapter 3 Utilities
Setup........................................................................................................................ 3-3
System..................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
Imaging...................................................................................................................................................3-18
Application............................................................................................................................................ 3-25
Measurement........................................................................................................................................ 3-27
Report.................................................................................................................................................... 3-46
Annotation............................................................................................................................................3-50
BodyMarker........................................................................................................................................... 3-54
Customize.............................................................................................................................................. 3-58
Peripherals............................................................................................................................................ 3-63
Connectivity.......................................................................................................................................... 3-66
Service...................................................................................................................................................3-88
Help........................................................................................................................................................3-88

ECG (Option)...........................................................................................................3-89
EzCompare (Option).............................................................................................. 3-91

14
 Table of Contents

Stress Echo (Option).............................................................................................. 3-92

Setting up a Protocol........................................................................................................................... 3-92
Starting a Protocol and Acquiring Images....................................................................................... 3-97
Reviewing an Image...........................................................................................................................3-101

Strain+ Image (Option)........................................................................................ 3-106

Strain+.................................................................................................................................................. 3-107
Auto EF..................................................................................................................................................3-114
TMAD..................................................................................................................................................... 3-121

Chapter 4 Maintenance
Operational Environment....................................................................................... 4-3
Product Maintenance..............................................................................................4-4
Cleaning and Disinfection.................................................................................................................... 4-4
Electrical Safety Check......................................................................................................................... 4-9
Accuracy Check....................................................................................................................................... 4-9

Battery Pack Management................................................................................... 4-10

Replacing the Battery Pack................................................................................................................ 4-10
Recharging the Battery Pack.............................................................................................................. 4-11
Disposing of the Battery Pack............................................................................................................ 4-11

Information Maintenance......................................................................................4-12
User Setting Backup.............................................................................................................................4-12
Patient Information Backup................................................................................................................4-12
Software.................................................................................................................................................4-12
Cybersecurity.........................................................................................................................................4-13

15
 User Manual

Chapter 5 Probes
Probes....................................................................................................................... 5-3
Using Ultrasound Gel.......................................................................................................................... 5-25
Using Sheaths....................................................................................................................................... 5-27
Probe Safety Precautions................................................................................................................... 5-28
Using and Infection Control of the Probe........................................................................................ 5-29
Risk of Electric Shock..........................................................................................................................5-30
Cleaning and Disinfecting Probes......................................................................................................5-31
MPTEE Probe.........................................................................................................................................5-40

Biopsy..................................................................................................................... 5-47
Biopsy Kit Components.......................................................................................................................5-48
Using Biopsy Kit................................................................................................................................... 5-49
Assembling the Biopsy Kit................................................................................................................. 5-52
Cleaning and Disinfecting Biopsy Kits.............................................................................................. 5-57

Chapter 6 Starting Modes of Operation

System Power.......................................................................................................... 6-3
Turning the Power On............................................................................................................................ 6-3
Shutting Down the System.................................................................................................................. 6-4

Probes and Applications......................................................................................... 6-5

Selecting Probes and Applications..................................................................................................... 6-6
Creating UserPreset.............................................................................................................................. 6-6
Modifying UserPreset........................................................................................................................... 6-6
Deleting UserPreset.............................................................................................................................. 6-6

Patient Information................................................................................................. 6-7

Patient Information for Each Application......................................................................................... 6-11
Searching Patient Information...........................................................................................................6-18

16
 Table of Contents

Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Information...............................................................................................................7-3
Types of Modes........................................................................................................................................7-3
Basic Use..................................................................................................................................................7-5

Basic Mode............................................................................................................... 7-8

2D Mode....................................................................................................................................................7-8
S-Detect..................................................................................................................................................7-24
M Mode...................................................................................................................................................7-34
Color Doppler Mode..............................................................................................................................7-37
Power Doppler Mode............................................................................................................................7-42
PW Spectral Doppler Mode................................................................................................................. 7-44
CW Spectral Doppler Mode................................................................................................................. 7-50
TDI Mode.................................................................................................................................................7-52
TDW Mode..............................................................................................................................................7-53
ElastoScan Mode.................................................................................................................................. 7-54

Combined Mode......................................................................................................7-62
2D/C/PW Mode......................................................................................................................................7-62
2D/PD/PW Mode...................................................................................................................................7-62
2D/C/CW Mode......................................................................................................................................7-62
2D/C/M Mode.........................................................................................................................................7-62
2D/TDI/TDW Mode............................................................................................................................... 7-63
Dual Live Mode..................................................................................................................................... 7-63

Multi-Image Mode................................................................................................. 7-64

Dual Mode............................................................................................................................................. 7-64
Quad Mode.............................................................................................................................................7-65

3D/4D Mode........................................................................................................... 7-66

3D Stand By............................................................................................................................................ 7-74
3D View – MPR.......................................................................................................................................7-78
Orientation Dot.................................................................................................................................... 7-88
Render Setup........................................................................................................................................ 7-88
VOCAL.....................................................................................................................................................7-92
3D XI....................................................................................................................................................... 7-99
XI VOCAL...............................................................................................................................................7-109

17
 User Manual

XI STIC................................................................................................................................................... 7-116
3D MXI...................................................................................................................................................7-120
Realistic Vue........................................................................................................................................ 7-131
Crystal Vue........................................................................................................................................... 7-132
Chroma.................................................................................................................................................7-134
Preset....................................................................................................................................................7-135
5D NT.....................................................................................................................................................7-136
5D Follicle.............................................................................................................................................7-139
5D Heart Color.....................................................................................................................................7-142

Chapter 8 Measurements
Measurement Accuracy........................................................................................... 8-3
Causes of Measurement Errors........................................................................................................... 8-3
Optimization of Measurement Accuracy........................................................................................... 8-5
Measurement Accuracy Table...............................................................................................................8-7

Basic Measurements............................................................................................... 8-9

Distance Measurement........................................................................................................................8-13
Circumference and Area Measurement........................................................................................... 8-23
Volume Measurement......................................................................................................................... 8-26

Measurements by Application.............................................................................. 8-29

Things to Note...................................................................................................................................... 8-29
Common Measurement Methods...................................................................................................... 8-33
OB Measurements .............................................................................................................................. 8-37
Fetal Heart Measurements................................................................................................................8-46
Gynecology Measurements................................................................................................................ 8-49
Cardiac Measurements....................................................................................................................... 8-52
Abdomen Measurements...................................................................................................................8-66
Pediatric Hips Measurements............................................................................................................8-68
Urology Measurements....................................................................................................................... 8-70
Small Parts Measurements.................................................................................................................8-71
Musculoskeletal Measurements....................................................................................................... 8-75
Vascular Measurements......................................................................................................................8-76

18
 Table of Contents

Reports...................................................................................................................8-85
Viewing Reports ..................................................................................................................................8-85
Report Preview.....................................................................................................................................8-86
Editing Report (Worksheet)...............................................................................................................8-89
Adding Comments............................................................................................................................... 8-92
Print Reports......................................................................................................................................... 8-94
Saving Reports..................................................................................................................................... 8-94
Store SR................................................................................................................................................. 8-95
Images.................................................................................................................................................... 8-95
OB Graph............................................................................................................................................... 8-97
Description.......................................................................................................................................... 8-102
Closing Reports.................................................................................................................................. 8-104

Chapter 9 Image Managements

Cine/Loop................................................................................................................. 9-3
Annotating Images.................................................................................................. 9-5
Annotation ............................................................................................................................................. 9-5
BodyMarker .......................................................................................................................................... 9-10

Saving, Playing and Transferring Images.............................................................9-12

Saving Images.......................................................................................................................................9-12
Playing Images......................................................................................................................................9-13
Transferring Images.............................................................................................................................9-14

Printing Images..................................................................................................... 9-15

Printing Images.....................................................................................................................................9-15

SonoView Mode..................................................................................................... 9-16

Exam List................................................................................................................................................9-17
Review – Exam Mode............................................................................................................................9-19
Review – Compare Mode.................................................................................................................... 9-23
DICOM Q/R............................................................................................................................................ 9-29

Reference Manual
A Reference Manual (English) is supplied with this product.

19
Chapter 1
Safety

‹‹Indications for Use....................................1-3

Contraindications.....................................................1-3

‹‹Safety Information...................................1-4
Safety Symbols........................................................ 1-4
Symbols.....................................................................1-6
Labels.........................................................................1-6

‹‹Electrical Safety....................................... 1-7

Prevention of Electric Shocks................................ 1-7
ECG-Related Information........................................1-9
ESD..............................................................................1-9
EMI............................................................................1-10
EMC...........................................................................1-10

‹‹Mechanical Safety.................................. 1-17

Moving the Equipment.......................................... 1-17
Precautions on Ramps...........................................1-18
Precautions for Use................................................1-18

‹‹Biological Safety.................................... 1-20

ALARA Principle.................................................... 1-20

‹‹Protecting the Environment................ 1-36

 Chapter 1 Safety

Indications for Use

The ultrasound diagnostic system and probes are designed to obtain ultrasound images and
analyze body fluids.
The clinical applications include: Fetal/Obstetrics, Abdominal, Gynecology, Pediatric, Small
Organ, Neonatal Cephalic, Adult Cephalic, Trans-rectal, Trans-vaginal, Muscular-Skeletal
(Conventional, Superficial), Urology, Cardiac Adult, Cardiac Pediatric and Peripheral vessel.

NOTE: For detailed information on applications and presets, please refer to

‘Chapter 2. Introduction’ and ‘Chapter 5. Probes’ in this user manual.

Contraindications
This product must not be used for ophthalmological applications, or any other use that involves
the ultrasound beam passing through the eye.

CAUTION:
XXFederal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.
XXThe method of application or use of the device is described in the manual
‘Chapter 6. Starting Modes of Operation’ and ‘Chapter 7. Modes of Operation’.

1-3
 User Manual

Safety Information
Please read the following safety information before using this product. It is relevant to the
ultrasound system, the probes, the recording devices, and any of the optional equipment.
This product is intended for use by, or by the order of, and under the supervision of, a licensed
physician who is qualified for direct use of medical devices.
Prolonged use of three-dimensional ultrasound (3D, 4D) by an unqualified individual, such as to
produce a commemorative photograph or video of the fetus, may have an adverse effect on the
fetus.
Please use the 3D ultrasound diagnostic imaging system for appropriate purposes only, since
using it for non-diagnostic purposes such as recording videos of the fetus may adversely affect
the fetus.

Safety Symbols
The International Electro Technical Commission (IEC) has established a set of symbols for
medical electronic equipment, which classify a connection or warn of potential hazards. The
classifications and symbols are shown below.

Symbols Description Symbols Description

WARNING: Warnings to prevent

a serious accident, or damage to Data Input/Output port
property

CAUTION: Precautions to prevent

a minor accident or damage to Input port
property

Refer to the user manual. Output port

Follow the user manual. Print remote output

CAUTION: Risk of Electric Shock Foot Switch Port

Type BF applied part (category

of protection against electrical ECG port
danger)

1-4
 Chapter 1 Safety

Symbols Description Symbols Description

Defibrillation-proof type CF
applied part (category of
USB port
protection against electrical
danger)

Power On/Off Network port

Protected against vertically falling

Power On
water drops

Protected against the effects of

Power Off
temporary immersion in water

Protected against the effects of

Power On for part of the product
continuous immersion in water

CAUTION: Electrostatic sensitive

Power Off for part of the product
devices (ESD)

Alternating current voltage source Do not sit on the product.

Direct current voltage source Do not push the product.

Dangerous voltage (Indicates

dangerous voltages over 1000V AC Do not lean against the product.
or 1500V DC)

Be mindful of the space. Do not

Protective earth (ground) place a finger, and or any part of
your body in the space.

No access for people with active

Equipotentiality
implanted cardiac devices.

DANGER: Do not place your

Data output port fingers, hands, or any parts of your
body in the space.

1-5
 User Manual

Symbols Description Symbols Description

Do not place objects heavier than

Data input port the weight specified next to the
symbol.

Do not place heavy objects on the

Microphone Port monitor while the monitor mount
is folded.

Do not push down on the monitor

Probe port
while the monitor mount is folded.

Symbols
Symbols Description Symbols Description

Authorized Representative In The

Manufacturer
European Community

Labels
Phrases containing the words ‘WARNING’ and/or ‘CAUTION’ are displayed on the product’s
surface in order to protect it.

1-6
 Chapter 1 Safety

Electrical Safety
This product is categorized as a Class I device.

CAUTION:
XXAs for US requirement, the LEAKAGE CURRENT might be measured from a center-tapped
circuit when the equipment connects in the United States to 240V supply system.
XXTo help assure grounding reliability, connect to a “hospital grade” or “hospital only”
grounded power outlet.

Prevention of Electric Shocks

In a hospital environment, hazardous current can form due to potential differences between
exposed conductive parts and connected devices. The solution to the problem is consistent
equipotential bonding. Medical equipment is connected with connecting leads made up of
sockets which are angled to the equipotential bonding network in medical rooms.

[Figure 1.1 Equipotential Bonding]

Additional equipment connected to medical electrical equipment must comply with the
respective IEC standards (e.g. IEC 60950/EN 60950 for data processing equipment, IEC 60601-1/
EN 60601-1 for medical devices). Furthermore, all configurations shall comply with the
requirements for medical electrical systems (see IEC 60601-1/EN 60601-1). Anybody connecting
additional equipment to signal input and output ports of medical electrical equipment should
make sure that the equipment complies with IEC 60601-1/EN 60601-1.

1-7
 User Manual

WARNING:
XXElectric shock may result if this system, including all of its externally mounted recording
and monitoring devices, is not properly grounded.
XXNever open the cover of the product. Hazardous voltages are present inside. All internal
adjustments and replacements must be made by qualified Samsung Medison Customer
Support Department personnel.
XXAlways check the product’s housing, cables, cords, and plugs before using the product.
Disconnect the power source and do not use the equipment if the housing is damaged
such as cracked, and chipped, or if the cable is worn.
XXAlways disconnect the system from the wall outlet prior to cleaning the system.
XXAll patient contact devices, such as probes and ECG leads, must be removed from the
patient prior to application of a high voltage defibrillation pulse.
XXThe use of flammable anesthetic gas or oxidizing gases (N2O) should be avoided. There is a
risk of explosion.
XXAvoid installing the system in such a way that it is difficult for the operator to disconnect it
from the power source.
XXDo not use together with HF surgical equipment. HF surgical equipment may be damaged,
which may result in fire.
XXThe system must only be connected to a supply mains with protective earth to avoid risk
of electric shock.

CAUTION:
XXThe system has been designed for 100-240VAC; you should select the input voltage of any
connected printer and VCR. Prior to connecting a peripheral power cord, verify that the
voltage indicated on the power cord matches the voltage rating of the peripheral device.
XXAn isolation transformer protects the system from power surges. The isolation transformer
continues to operate when the system is in standby.
XXDo not immerse the cable in liquids. Cables are not waterproof.
XXMake sure that the inside of the system is not exposed to or flooded with liquids. In such
cases, fire, electric shock, injury, or damage to the product may occur.
XXThe auxiliary socket outlets installed on this system are rated 100-240VAC with maximum
total load of 150VA. Use these outlets only for supplying power to equipment that is
intended to be part of the ultrasound system. Do not connect additional multiple-socket
outlets or extension cords to the system.
XXDo not connect any peripheral devices that are not listed in this manual to the auxiliary
socket outlet of the system. It may cause an electrical hazard.
XXDo not touch SIP/SOP and the patient simultaneously. There is a risk of electric shock
from leakage current.

1-8
 Chapter 1 Safety

ECG-Related Information
WARNING:
XXThis device is not intended to provide a primary ECG monitoring function, and therefore
does not have means of indicating an inoperative electrocardiograph.
XXDo not use ECG electrodes with HF surgical equipment. HF surgical equipment may be
damaged, which may result in fire.
XXDo not use ECG electrodes during cardiac pacemaker procedures or any procedures that
involve other types of electrical stimulators.
XXDo not use ECG leads and electrodes in an operating room.

ESD
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), commonly referred to as a static shock, is a naturally occurring
phenomenon. ESD is most prevalent during conditions of low humidity, which can be caused by
heating or air conditioning. The static shock or ESD is a discharge of the electrical energy build-
up from a charged individual to a less or non-charged individual or object. An ESD occurs when
an individual with an electrical energy build-up comes into contact with conductive objects such
as metal doorknobs, file cabinets, computer equipment, and even other individuals.

CAUTION:
XXThe level of electrical energy discharged from a system user or patient to an ultrasound
system can be significant enough to cause damage to the system or probes.
XXAlways perform the pre-ESD preventive procedures before using connectors marked with
the ESD warning label.
–– Apply anti-static spray to carpets or linoleum.
–– Use anti-static mats.
–– Ground the product to the patient table or bed.
XXIt is highly recommended that the user be given training on ESD-related warning symbols
and preventive procedures.

1-9
 User Manual

EMI
Although this system has been manufactured in compliance with existing EMI (ElectroMagnetic
Interface) requirements, use of this system in the presence of an electromagnetic field can cause
degradation of the ultrasound image or product damage.
If this occurs often, Samsung Medison suggests a review of the environment in which the system
is being used, to identify possible sources of radiated emissions. These emissions could be from
other electrical devices used within the same room or an adjacent room. Communication devices
such as cellular phones and pagers can cause these emissions. The existence of radios, TVs, or
microwave transmission equipment nearby can also cause interference.

CAUTION: In cases where EMI is causing disturbances, it may be necessary to relocate this
system.

EMC
Testing of the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) of this system has been performed according
to the international standard for EMC with medical devices (IEC 60601-1-2). This IEC standard
was adopted in Europe as the European norm (EN 60601-1-2).

Guidance and Manufacturer’s Declaration – Electromagnetic Emission

This product is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of this product should ensure that it is used in such an environment.

Emission Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment – Guidance

The Ultrasound System uses RF energy only for its internal

RF Emission functions. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are
Group 1
CISPR 11 not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic
equipment.

RF Emission
Class A
CISPR 11
The Ultrasound System is suitable for use in all
Harmonic Emission establishments other than domestic and those directly
Class A
IEC 61000-3-2 connected to the public low-voltage power supply network
that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Flicker Emission
Complies
IEC 61000-3-3

1-10
 Chapter 1 Safety

Approved Cables, Probes and Peripherals for EMC

„„Cables
Cables connected to this product may affect its emissions; use only the cable types and
lengths listed in the table below.

Cable Type Length

VGA Shielded Normal

USB Shielded Normal

LAN (RJ45) Twisted pair Any

S-Video Shielded Normal

Foot Switch Shielded 2.99m

Audio R.L Shielded Normal

Parallel Shielded Normal

HDMI Shielded Normal

MIC Unshielded Any

ECG 3-lead Shielded Normal

„„Probes
The image probe used with this product may affect its emission. The probe listed in
‘Chapter 5. Probes’ when used with this product, have been tested to comply with the
group1 Class A emission as required by International Standard CISPR 11.

„„Peripherals
Peripherals used with this product may affect its emissions.

CAUTION: When connecting other customer-supplied accessories to the system, it is the

user’s responsibility to ensure the electromagnetic compatibility of the system.

WARNING: The use of cables, probes, and peripherals other than those specified may result in
increased emission or decreased Immunity of the Ultrasound System.

1-11
 User Manual

Electromagnetic
Immunity Test IEC 60601 Test Level Compliance Level
Environment – Guidance

Floors should be wood,

concrete or ceramic tile.
Electrostatic
±6kV Contact ±6kV Contact If floors are covered with
discharge (ESD)
±8kV Air ±8kV Air synthetic material, the
IEC 61000-4-2
relative humidity should
be at least 30%.

±2kV for power supply ±2kV for power supply Mains power quality
Electrical fast
lines lines should be that of a
transient/burst
±1kV for input/ ±1kV for input/ typical commercial or
IEC 61000-4-4
output lines output lines hospital environment.

Mains power quality

Surge ±1kV differential mode ±1kV differential mode should be that of a
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2kV common mode ±2kV common mode typical commercial or
hospital environment.

Mains power quality

should be that of a
Voltage <5% Uт for 0.5 cycles <5% Uт for 0.5 cycles typical commercial or
dips, short (>95% dip in Uт) (>95% dip in Uт) hospital environment. If
interruptions 40% Uт for 5 cycles 40% Uт for 5 cycles the user of this product
and voltage (60% dip in Uт) (60% dip in Uт) requires continued
variations on 70% Uт for 25 cycles 70% Uт for 25 cycles operation during power
power supply (30% dip in Uт) (30% dip in Uт) mains interruptions, it is
input lines recommended that this
<5% Uт for 5 s <5% Uт for 5 s
IEC 61000-4-11 (<95% dip in Uт) (<95% dip in Uт) product be powered from
an uninterruptible power
supply or a battery.

Power frequency
Power frequency magnetic fields should
(50/60Hz) be at levels characteristic
3 A/m 3 A/m
magnetic field of a typical location in
IEC 61000-4-8 a typical commercial or
hospital environment.

NOTE: Uт is the AC mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

1-12
 Chapter 1 Safety

Immunity IEC 60601 Compliance

Electromagnetic Environment – Guidance
Test Test Level Level

Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3V Portable and mobile RF communications

IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz – equipment should be used no closer to any part of
80 MHz the Ultrasound System, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated from
the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter.
Recommended Separation Distance

1.2

1.2 80MHz – 800MHz

2.3 800MHz – 2.5GHz

Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m Where P is the maximum output power rating

IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz – of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
2.5 GHz the transmitter manufacturer and d is the
recommended separation distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters a, as
determined by an electromagnetic site survey,
should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency range b.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment
marked with the following symbol:

NOTE 1: At 80MHz and 800MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless)
telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast
cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due
to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured
field strength in the location in which the Ultrasound System is used exceeds the applicable RF
compliance level above, the Ultrasound System should be observed to verify normal operation.
If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-
orienting or relocating the Ultrasound System, or using a shielded location with a higher RF
shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation.
b
Over the frequency range 150kHz to 80MHz, field strengths should be less than 3V/m.

1-13
 User Manual

Recommended Distance Between Wireless Communication Device and

this Product
This product is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF
disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of this product can help to prevent
electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and
mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and this product as recommended
below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.

Separation Distance According to Frequency of Transmitter [m]

Rated Maximum Output
Power of Transmitter 150kHz – 80MHz 80MHz – 800MHz 800MHz – 2.5GHz
[W] 1.2 1.2

0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23

0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73

1 1.2 1.2 2.3

10 3.8 3.8 7.3

100 12 12 23

For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where p is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80MHz and 800MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.

Electromagnetic Environment – Guidance

It is recommended to use ultrasound systems in shielded locations offering RF shielding
effectiveness, with shielded cables. Field strengths outside the shielded location from fixed
RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site survey, should be less than 3V/m.
It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded
location be verified to ensure that they meet the minimum specification.

CAUTION: If the system is connected to other customer-supplied equipment, such as a local

area network (LAN), Samsung Medison cannot guarantee that the remote equipment will
work correctly in the presence of electromagnetic emission phenomena.

1-14
 Chapter 1 Safety

Avoiding Electromagnetic Interference

Typical interference on Ultrasound Imaging Systems varies depending on Electromagnetic
phenomena. Please refer to the following table:

Imaging Mode ESD1 RF2 Power Line3

For sector imaging probes,

white radial bands or
flashes in the centerlines of
White dots, dashes,
the image.
diagonal lines, or diagonal
2D For linear imaging
lines near the center of the
probes, white vertical
image.
bands, sometimes more
pronounced on the sides of
Change of operating the image.
mode, system
settings, or system Increase in the image White dots, dashes,
M reset. Brief flashes background noise or white diagonal lines, or increase
in the displayed or M mode lines. in image background noise
recorded image.
Color flashes, radial or
Color flashes, dots, dashes,
vertical bands, increase
Color or changes in the color
in background noise, or
noise level.
changes in color image.

Horizontal lines in the Vertical lines in the

spectral display or tones, spectral display, popping
Doppler
abnormal noise in the type noise in the audio, or
audio, or both. both.

1. ESD caused by discharging of electric charge build-up on insulated surfaces or persons.

2. RF energy from RF transmitting equipment such as portable phones, hand-held radios, wireless
devices, commercial radio and TV, and so on.
3. Conducted interference on powerlines or connected cables caused by other equipment, such as
switching power supplies, electrical controls, and natural phenomena such as lightning.

1-15
 User Manual

A medical device can either generate or receive electromagnetic interference. The EMC
standards describe tests for both emitted and received interference.
Samsung Medison’s ultrasound products do not generate electromagnetic interference in
excess of standard levels established for such devices.
An Ultrasound System is designed to receive signals at radio frequency and is therefore
susceptible to interference generated by RF energy sources. Examples of other sources of
interference are medical devices, information technology products, and radio and television
transmission towers. Tracing the source of radiated interference can be a difficult task.
Customers should consider the following in an attempt to locate the source:
XXIs the interference intermittent or constant?
XXDoes the interference show up only with one transducer operating at the same frequency
or with several transducers?
XXDo two different transducers operating at the same frequency have the same problem?
XXIs the interference present if the system is moved to a different location in the facility?
The answers to these questions will help determine if the problem resides with the system
or the scanning environment. After you answer the questions, contact the Samsung Medison
Customer Support Department.

1-16
 Chapter 1 Safety

Mechanical Safety

Moving the Equipment

WARNING: Special caution should be taken during movement. Careless transportation of the
product may result in product damage or personal injury.

XXBefore transporting the product, check that the brakes on the wheels are unlocked. Also,
make sure to retract the monitor arm completely so that it is secured in a stationary position.
XXAlways use the handles at the back of the console and move the product slowly.
This product is designed to resist shocks. However, excessive shock, for example, if the product
falls over, may cause serious damage.
If the system operates abnormally after repositioning, please contact the Samsung Medison
Customer Support Department.

Foot Lock
You can use the brakes to control the movement of the product. The brake pedal is located
at the center of the console pedal and when pressed brakes all the wheels simultaneously.
To lock the brakes, press the front part of the brake pedal with your foot. To unlock the brakes,
press the back of the pedal. We recommend that you lock the brakes when using the product.

1-17
 User Manual

Precautions on Ramps
Always make sure that the control panel is facing the direction of movement.

WARNING: Be aware of the castors, especially when moving the system. Samsung Medison
recommends that you exercise caution when moving the product up or down ramps.

If you leave the product on an inclined surface, the product may fall over even if the brakes are
engaged. Do not rest the product on a ramp.

Precautions for Use

CAUTION:
XXDo not press the control panel excessively.
XXNever attempt to modify the product in any way.
XXCheck the operational safety when using the product after a prolonged break in service.
XXMake sure that other objects, such as metal pieces, do not enter the system.
XXDo not block the ventilation slots.
XXDo not pull on the power cord to unplug the product. Doing so might damage the cord and
cause the product to short-circuit, or the cord itself to break. Unplug the cord by pulling
on the plug itself.
XXExcessive bending or twisting of cables on patient-applied parts may cause failure or
intermittent operation of the system.
XXImproper cleaning or sterilization of a patient-applied part may cause permanent damage.
XXServicing the product, including repairs and replacement of parts, must be done by
qualified Samsung Medison service personnel. Assuming that the product is used in
accordance with the guidelines contained in this manual and maintained by qualified
service personnel, the expected service life of the product is approximately 7 years.

Please refer to ‘Chapter 4. Maintenance’ for detailed information on protection, cleaning, and
disinfecting the equipment.

1-18
 Chapter 1 Safety

Caution for Using Monitor

When adjusting the height or position of the monitor, be careful of the space in the middle of
the monitor arm. Catching your fingers or other body parts in it may result in injury.

[Figure 1.2 Safety Note for Monitor]

Caution for Using Control Panel

CAUTION:
XXDo not push the control panel with excessive force or lean on it.
XXDo not sit on the control panel or exert excessive force on it.
XXDo not lift the product using the handles on the control panel.

When adjusting the height or position of the control panel, pay attention to the space
between the control panel and the lift. Catching your fingers or other body parts in it may
result in injury.

[Figure 1.3 Safety Note for Control Panel]

1-19
 User Manual

Biological Safety
For safety instructions concerning probes and biopsies, refer to “Chapter 5. Probes“.

WARNING:
XXUltrasound waves may have damaging effects on cells and, therefore, may be harmful to
the patient. If there is no medical benefit, minimize the exposure time and maintain the
ultrasound wave output level at low. Please refer to the ALARA principle.
XXDo not use the system if an error message appears on the video display indicating that a
hazardous condition exists. Note the error code, turn off the power to the system, and call
Samsung Medison customer service department.
XXDo not use a system that exhibits erratic or inconsistent functioning. Discontinuities in the
scanning sequence are indicative of a hardware failure that should be corrected before
use.
XXThe system limits the maximum contact temperature to 43 degrees Celsius, and the
ultrasonic wave output observes American FDA regulations.

ALARA Principle
Guidance for the use of diagnostic ultrasound is defined by the “As Low As Reasonably
Achievable“ (ALARA) principle. The decision as to what is reasonable has been left to the
judgment and insight of qualified personnel. No set of rules can be formulated that would
be sufficiently complete to dictate the correct response to every circumstance. By keeping
ultrasound exposure as low as possible, while obtaining diagnostic images, users can minimize
ultrasonic bioeffects.
Since the threshold for diagnostic ultrasound bioeffects is undetermined, it is the sonographer’s
responsibility to control the total energy transmitted into the patient. The sonographer must
reconcile exposure time with diagnostic image quality. To ensure diagnostic image quality and
limit exposure time, the Ultrasound System provides controls that can be manipulated during
the exam to optimize the results.
The ability of the user to abide by the ALARA principle is important. Advances in diagnostic
ultrasound, not only in the technology but also in its applications, have resulted in the need
for increased and improved information to guide the user. The output indices are designed to
provide that important information.
There are a number of variables, which affect the way in which the output display indices can be
used to implement the ALARA principle. These variables include mass, body size, location of the
bone relative to the focal point, attenuation in the body, and ultrasound exposure time. Exposure
time is an especially useful variable, because the user controls it. The ability to limit the index
values over time supports the ALARA principle.

1-20
 Chapter 1 Safety

Applying ALARA
The system imaging mode used depends upon the information needed. 2D mode and M mode
imaging provide anatomical information, while Doppler, Power, and Color imaging provide
information about blood flow. Scanned modes, like 2D mode, Power, or Color, disperse or
scatter the ultrasonic energy over an area, while an unscanned mode, like M mode or Doppler,
concentrate the ultrasonic energy. Understanding the nature of the imaging mode being
used allows the sonographer to apply the ALARA principle with informed judgment. The
probe frequency, system set-up values, scanning techniques, and operator experience aid
the sonographer in meeting the ALARA principle. The decision as to the amount of acoustic
output is, in the final analysis, up to the system operator. This decision must be based on the
following factors: type of patient, type of exam, patient history, ease or difficulty of obtaining
diagnostically useful information, and the potential localized heating of the patient due to
probe surface temperatures. Prudent use of the system occurs when patient exposure is
limited to the lowest index reading for the shortest amount of time necessary to achieve
acceptable diagnostic results.
Although a high index reading does not mean that a biological effect is actually occurring,
it should be taken seriously. Every effort should be made to reduce the possible effects of a
high index reading. Limiting exposure time is an effective way to accomplish this goal.
There are several system controls that the operator can use to adjust the image quality and
limit the acoustic intensity. These controls are related to the techniques that an operator
might use to implement ALARA and can be divided into three categories: direct, indirect, and
receiver control.

Direct Controls
Application selection and the output intensity control directly affect acoustic intensity. There
are different ranges of allowable intensity or output depending on your selection. Selecting
the correct range of acoustic intensity for the application is one of the first things required
during any exam. For example, peripheral vascular intensity levels are not recommended for
fetal exams. Some systems automatically select the proper range for a particular procedure,
while others require manual selection. Ultimately, the user bears the responsibility for proper
clinical use. Samsung Medison systems provide both automatic and user-definable settings.
Output has direct impact on acoustic intensity. Once the application has been established,
the output control can be used to increase or decrease the output intensity. The output
control allows you to select intensity levels less than the defined maximum. Prudent use
dictates that you select the lowest output intensity consistent with good image quality.

1-21
 User Manual

Indirect Controls
The indirect controls are those that have an indirect effect on the acoustic intensity. These
controls affect the imaging mode, pulse repetition frequency, focus depth, pulse length, and
probe selection.
The choice of imaging mode determines the nature of the ultrasound beam. 2D mode is a
scanning mode, Doppler is a stationary or unscanned mode. A stationary ultrasound beam
concentrates energy on a single location. A moving or scanned ultrasound beam disperses the
energy over a wide area and the beam is only concentrated on a given area for a fraction of
the time necessary in unscanned mode.
The pulse repetition frequency or rate refers to the number of ultrasound bursts of energy
over a specific period of time. The higher the pulse repetition frequency, the more pulses
of energy in a given period of time. Several controls affect pulse repetition frequency: focal
depth, display depth, sample volume depth, color sensitivity, number of focal zones, and
sector width controls.
The focus of the ultrasound beam affects the image resolution. To maintain or increase
resolution at a different focus requires a variation of output over the focal zone. This variation
of output is a function of system optimization. Different exams require different focal depths.
Setting the focus to the proper depth improves the resolution of the structure of interest.
Pulse length is the time during which the ultrasonic burst is turned on. The longer the pulse,
the greater the time-average intensity value. The greater the time-average intensity, the
greater the likelihood of temperature increase and cavitations. Pulse length, burst length or
pulse duration is the output pulse duration in Pulsed Doppler. Increasing the Doppler sample
volume, increases the pulse length.
Probe selection affects intensity indirectly. Tissue attenuation changes with frequency. The
higher the probe operating frequency, the greater the attenuation of the ultrasonic energy.
Higher probe operating frequencies require higher output intensity to scan at an increased
depth. To scan deeper at the same output intensity, a lower probe frequency is required. Using
more gain and output beyond a point, without corresponding increases in image quality, can
mean that a lower frequency probe is needed.

„„Receiver Controls
Receiver controls are used by the operator to improve image quality. These controls have
no effect on output. Receiver controls only affect how the ultrasound echo is received.
These controls include gain, TGC, dynamic range, and image processing. The important
thing to remember, relative to output, is that receiver controls should be optimized before
increasing output. For example; before increasing output, optimize gain to improve image
quality.

1-22
 Chapter 1 Safety

Additional Considerations
Ensure that scanning time is kept to a minimum, and ensure that only medically required
scanning is performed. Never compromise quality by rushing through an exam. A poor exam
will require a follow-up, which ultimately increases the scanning time. Diagnostic ultrasound
is an important tool in medicine, and, like any tool, should be used efficiently and effectively.

Output Display Features

The system output display comprises two basic indices: a mechanical index and a thermal
index. The thermal index consists of the following indices: soft tissue (TIs), bone (TIb) and
cranial bone (TIc). One of these three thermal indices will be displayed at all times. The
thermal index to be displayed is determined by the system preset or user choice, depending
upon the application.
The mechanical index is continuously displayed over the range of 0.0 to 1.9, in increments of
0.1. The thermal index consists of the three indices, and only one of these is displayed all the
time. Each diagnostic probe application has a default selection. The TIb or TIs is continuously
displayed over its range of 0.0 to maximum output, based on the probe and application, in
increments of 0.1.
The default setting of the application-specific nature is also an important factor of index
selection. A default setting is a system control state which is preset by the manufacturer or
the operator. The system has default index settings for the probe application. The default
settings are applied automatically by the ultrasound system when the power is turned on,
new patient data is entered into the system database, or a change of application takes place.
The decision as to which of the three thermal indices to display should be based on the
following criteria:
Appropriate index for the application: TIs is used for imaging soft tissue, and TIb for a focus at
or near a bone. Some factors might create artificially high or low thermal index readings (e.g.
presence of fluid or bone, or the flow of blood). A highly attenuating tissue path, for example,
may cause the potential for local zone heating to be lower than the thermal index indicates.
The selection of scanned modes or unscanned modes of operation also affect the thermal
index. For scanned modes, heating tends to be near the surface; for unscanned modes, the
potential for heating tends to be deeper in the focal zone.
Always limit ultrasound exposure time. Do not rush the scanning. Ensure that the indices
are kept to a minimum, and that exposure time is limited without compromising diagnostic
sensitivity.

1-23
 User Manual

„„Mechanical Index (MI) Display

Mechanical bioeffects are threshold phenomena that occur when a certain level of output
is exceeded. The threshold level varies, however, with the type of tissue. The potential
for mechanical biological effects varies with peak pressure and ultrasound frequency.
The MI accounts for these two factors. The higher the MI value, the greater the likelihood
of mechanical bioeffects occurring. However, there is no specific MI value that means
that a mechanical bioeffect will actually occur. The MI should be used as a guide for
implementing the ALARA principle.

„„Thermal Index (TI) Display

The TI informs the user of potential temperature increase occurring on the body surface,
within body tissue, or at the point of focus of the ultrasound beam on bone. The TI is an
estimate of the temperature increase in specific body tissues. The actual amount of any
temperature rise is influenced by factors such as tissue type, vascularity, and modes of
operation. The TI should be used as a guide for implementing the ALARA principle.
The bone thermal index (TIb) informs the user about potential heating at or near the focus
after the ultrasound beam has passed through soft tissue or fluid, such as the skeletal
structure of a 2-3 month old fetus. The cranial bone thermal index (TIc) informs the user
about the potential heating of bone at or near the surface, for example, the cranial bone.
The soft tissue thermal index (TIs) informs the user about the potential for heating within
soft homogeneous tissue. TIc is displayed when you select a trans-cranial application.
You can select the TI to display at Setup > Imaging > Application/Preset > Thermal Index
Type.

„„Mechanical and Thermal Indices Display Precision and Accuracy

The Mechanical and Thermal Indices on the system are precise to 0.1 units.
The MI and TI display accuracy estimates for the system are given in the manual‘s Acoustic
Output Tables. These accuracy estimates are based on the variability ranges of probes and
systems, inherent acoustic output modeling errors, and the measurement variability, as
described below.
The displayed values should be interpreted as relative information to help the system
operator achieve the ALARA principle through prudent use of the system. The values
should not be interpreted as actual physical values of investigated tissue or organs.
The initial data that is used to support the output display is derived from laboratory
measurements based on the AIUM measurement standard. The measurements are then
put into algorithms to calculate the displayed output values.

1-24
 Chapter 1 Safety

Many of the assumptions used in the process of measurement and calculation are
conservative in nature. Over-estimation of actual in situ exposure, for the vast majority
of tissue paths, is built into the measurement and calculation process. For example, the
acoustic output values measured underwater are derated using a conservative, industry
standard, attenuation coefficient of 0.3dB/cm-MHz.
Conservative values for tissue characteristics were selected for use in the TI models.
Conservative values for tissue or bone absorption rates, blood perfusion rates, blood heat
capacity, and tissue thermal conductivity were selected.
A steady state temperature rise is assumed in the industry standard TI models, and the
assumption is made that the ultrasound probe is held steady in one position long enough
for a steady state to be reached.
A number of factors are considered when estimating the accuracy of display values:
Hardware deviation, algorithm accuracy, and measurement deviation. Deviation among
probes and systems in particular is an important factor. Probe deviation results from
piezoelectric crystal efficiencies, process-related impedance differences, and sensitive
lens focusing parameter variations. Differences in the system pulse voltage control and
efficiencies are also a contributor to variability. There are inherent uncertainties in the
algorithms use d for estimating acoustic output values over the range of possible system
operating conditions and pulse voltages. Inaccuracies in laboratory measurements are
related to differences in hydrophone calibration and performance, positioning, alignment
and digitization tolerances, and variability among test operators.
The conservative assumptions of the output estimation algorithms of linear propagation,
at all depths, through a 0.3dB/cm-MHz attenuated medium are not taken into account
in the calculation of the accuracy estimate displayed. Neither linear propagation nor
uniform attenuation at the 0.3dB/cm-MHz rate occurs in underwater measurements, or
in most tissue paths in the body. In the body, different tissues and organs have dissimilar
attenuation characteristics. In water, there is almost no attenuation. In the body, and
particularly in underwater measurements, non-linear propagation and saturation losses
occur as pulse voltages increase.
The display accuracy estimates take into account the variability ranges of probes and
systems, inherent acoustic output modeling errors, and the measurement variability.
Display accuracy estimates are measured according to AIUM measurement standards
but not based on errors caused during the measurement or inherent errors. They are also
independent of the effects of non-linear loss on the measured values.

1-25
 User Manual

Control Effects – Controls Affecting the Indices

As various system controls are adjusted, the TI and MI values may change. This will be most
apparent as the Power control is adjusted; however, other system controls will also affect the
on-screen output values.

„„Power
Power controls the system acoustic output. Two real-time output values are on the screen:
a TI and a MI. They change as the system responds to Power adjustments.
In combined modes, such as simultaneous Color, 2D mode, and Pulsed Doppler, the total TI
is the sum of TIs of the individual modes. Each mode is a vital contributor to this total; the
displayed MI will be from the mode with the largest peak pressure.

2D Mode Controls

„„2D Mode Size

Narrowing the sector angle may increase the frame rate. This will increase the TI. Pulse
voltage may be automatically adjusted down with software controls to keep the TI below
the system maximum. A decrease in pulse voltage will decrease MI.

„„Zoom
Increasing the zoom magnification may increase frame rate. This will increase the TI. The
number of focal zones may also increase automatically to improve the resolution. This
action may change the MI, since the peak intensity can occur at a different depth.

„„Number of Focal Zones

Increasing the number of focal zones may change both the TI and MI by automatically
changing the frame rate or focal depth. Lower frame rates decrease the TI. The MI
displayed will correspond to the focal zone with the largest peak intensity.

„„Focus
In general, higher MI values will occur when the focal depth is near the natural focus of the
probe (transducer).

1-26
 Chapter 1 Safety

Color and Power Controls

„„Color Sensitivity
Increasing the color sensitivity may increase the TI. More time is required for the scanning
of color images. Color pulses are the dominant pulse type in this mode.

„„Color Sector Width

Narrower color sector width will increase the color frame rate, and so the TI will increase.
The system may automatically decrease the pulse voltage to stay below the system
maximum. A decrease in pulse voltage will decrease the MI. If Pulsed Doppler is also
enabled, then Pulsed Doppler will remain the dominant mode and the TI change will be
small.

„„Color Sector Depth

Deeper color sector depth may automatically decrease color frame rate, or select a
new color focal zone or color pulse length. The TI will change due to the combination
of these effects. Generally, the TI will decrease with increased color sector depth. MI
will correspond to the peak intensity of the dominant pulse type, which is a color pulse.
However, if Pulsed Doppler is also enabled, then Pulsed Doppler will remain the dominant
mode and the TI change will be small.

„„Scale
Using the Scale control to increase the color velocity range may increase the TI. The system
will automatically adjust the pulse voltage to stay below the system maximum. A decrease
in pulse voltage will also decrease MI.

„„2D Mode Size

A narrower 2D mode sector width in Color imaging will increase color frame rate. The TI
will increase. MI will not change. If Pulsed Doppler is also enabled, then Pulsed Doppler
will remain the dominant mode and the TI change will be small.

1-27
 User Manual

M Mode and Doppler Controls

„„Simultaneous and Update Methods

Use of combination modes affects both the TI and MI through the combination of pulse
types. During Simultaneous mode, the TI is an ancillary element. During auto-update and
duplex, the TI will display the dominant pulse type. The displayed MI will be from the mode
with the largest peak pressure.

„„Sample Volume Depth

When Doppler sample volume depth is increased, the Doppler PRF may automatically
decrease. A decrease in PRF will decrease the TI. The system may also decrease the pulse
voltage to remain below the system maximum. A decrease in pulse voltage will decrease MI.

Doppler, CW, M Mode, and Color Imaging Controls

When a new imaging mode is selected, both the TI and the MI will change to their default
settings. Each mode has a corresponding pulse repetition frequency and maximum intensity
point. In combined or simultaneous modes, the TI is the sum of the contribution from the
modes enabled, and the MI is the value for the focal zone of the mode with the largest derated
intensity. If a mode is turned off and then reselected, the system will return to the previously
selected settings.

„„Probe
Each probe model available has unique specifications for the contact area, beam shape,
and center frequency. Defaults are initialized when you select a probe. Samsung Medison‘s
factory defaults vary according to the probe, application, and mode. Defaults have been
chosen below the FDA limits for intended use.

„„Depth
An increase in the 2D mode depth will automatically decrease the 2D mode frame rate.
This would decrease the TI. The system may also automatically choose a deeper 2D mode
focal depth. A change of focal depth may change the MI. The MI displayed is that of the
zone with the largest peak intensity.

„„Application
Acoustic output defaults are set when you select an application. Factory defaults vary
with probe, application, and mode. Defaults have been chosen below the FDA limits for
intended use.

1-28
 Chapter 1 Safety

Related Guidance Documents

For more information about ultrasonic bioeffects and related topics, refer to the following;
XXMedical Ultrasound Safety (AIUM, 2014).
XXAIUM Consensus Report on Potential Bioeffects of Diagnostic Ultrasound: Executive
Summary, J. Ultrasound in Medicine, 2008, Vol. 27, Num. 4.
XXWFUMB. Symposium on Safety of Ultrasound in Medicine: Conclusions and
Recommendations on Thermal and Non-thermal Mechanisms for Biological Effects.
Ultrasound in Med. & Biol; 1998, 24: Supplement 1.
XXBioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound (AIUM, 1993)
XXGuidelines for the safe use of diagnostic ultrasound equipment. (BMUS, 2009)
XXInformation for Manufacturers Seeking Marketing Clearance of Diagnostic Ultrasound
Systems and Transducers (U.S. FDA - 2008)
XXParticular requirements for the basic safety and essential performance of ultrasonic
medical diagnostic and monitoring equipment. (IEC, 2007)
XXAcoustic Output Labeling Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment (AIUM, 2008)
XXStandard Means for the Reporting of the Acoustic Output of Medical Diagnostic Ultrasonic
Equipment. (IEC, 2007)
XXStandard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices On
Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment (AIUM/NEMA, 2004)
XXUltrasonics - Field characterization - Test methods for the determination of thermal and
mechanical indices related to medical diagnostic ultrasonic fields (IEC, 2005)
XXMeasurement and Characterization of Medical Ultrasonic Fields up to 40 MHz. (IEC, 2007)
XXUltrasonics - Power Measurements - Radiation Force Balances and Performance
Requirements. (IEC, 2006)
XXAcoustic Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment.
(AIUM/NEMA, 2004)

1-29
 User Manual

Acoustic Output and Measurement

Since the first usage of diagnostic ultrasound, the possible human biological effects
(bioeffects) of ultrasound exposure have been studied by various scientific and medical
institutions. In October 1987, the American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine (AIUM) ratified
a report prepared by its Bioeffects Committee (Bioeffect Considerations for the Safety of
Diagnostic Ultrasound, J Ultrasound Med., Sept. 1988: Vol.7, No.9 Supplement), sometimes
referred to as the Stowe Report, which reviewed available data on possible effects of
ultrasound exposure. Another report, “Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound”, dated
January 28, 1993, provides more up to date information. In addition, periodically updated
reports on biological effects, results, and guidelines on safe usage have been published by
groups such as the WFUMB (World Federation of Ultrasound in Medicine and Biology), AIUM,
and BMUS.
The Acoustic output for this system has been measured and calculated in accordance with
the Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices On
Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment (AIUM/NEMA, 2004) and Acoustic Output Measurement
Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment (AIUM/NEMA, 2004).

1-30
 Chapter 1 Safety

In Situ, Derated, and Water Value Intensities

All intensity parameters are measured in water. Since water does not absorb acoustic energy,
these water measurements represent the largest possible value. Biological tissue absorbs
acoustic energy. The true value of the intensity at any point depends on the amount and type
of tissue, and the frequency of the ultrasound that passes through the tissue. The intensity
value in the tissue, In Situ, has been estimated using the following formula:
In Situ = Water [e - (0.23 alf)]
Where: In Situ = In Situ Intensity Value
Water = Water Value Intensity
e = 2.7183
a = Attenuation Factor
Tissue a (dB/cm-MHz)
Brain 0.53
Heart 0.66
Kidney 0.79
Liver 0.43
Muscle 0.55
l = Skin line to measurement depth (cm)
f = Center frequency of the transducer/system/mode combination (MHz)
Since the ultrasonic path during an examination is likely to pass through varying lengths and
types of tissue, it is difficult to estimate the true In Situ intensity. An attenuation factor of
0.3 is used for general reporting purposes; therefore, the In Situ value is commonly reported
using this formula:
In Situ (derated) = Water [e - (0.069 lf)]
Since this value is not the true In situ intensity, the term “derated“ is used.
The maximum derated and maximum water values do not always occur under the same
operating conditions. Therefore, the reported maximum water and derated values may not be
related to the In Situ (derated) formula. For example, a multi-zone array transducer has the
greatest water value intensities at its deepest zone. The same transducer may have its largest
derated intensity at one of its shallowest focal zones.

1-31
 User Manual

Terms and Symbols Related to Acoustic Output and Measurement

The terms and symbols used in the acoustic output tables are defined in the following
paragraphs.
fawf ACOUSTIC WORKING FREQUENCY is the frequency of an acoustic signal based
on the observation of the output of a hydrophone placed in an acoustic field
at the position corresponding to the spatial-peak temporal-peak acoustic
pressure. (unit: MHz)

Ipa,α at zpii,α The ATTENUATED PULSE-AVERAGE INTENSITY at the depth of maximum

ATTENUATED SPATIAL-PEAK TEMPORAL-AVERAGE INTENSITY. (unit: Watts per
square centimeter)

Ita (z) The TEMPORAL-AVERAGE INTENSITY at axial distance z.

(unit: Milliwatts per square centimeter)

Ita, α (z) The ATTENUATED TEMPORAL-AVERAGE INTENSITY at axial distance z.

(unit: Milliwatts per square centimeter)

MI MECHANICAL INDEX is a displayed parameter representing potential

cavitation bioeffects (unit: N/A)

npps The number of acoustic pulses travelling along a particular ULTRASONIC SCAN
LINE.

P OUTPUT POWER is time-average ultrasonic power emitted by an ultrasonic

transducer into an approximately free field under specified conditions in a
specified medium, preferably water. (unit: mW)

P1x1 Maximum value of the time average acoustic output power emitted from any
one-centimetre square region of the active area of the transducer, the one-
centimetre square region having 1 cm dimensions in the x- and y-directions.

Pr at zpii The PEAK-RAREFACTIONAL ACOUSTIC PRESSURE at the depth of maximum

SPATIAL-PEAK TEMPORAL-AVERAGE INTENSITY. (unit: Megapascals)

Pr,α at zMI The ATTENUATED PEAK-RAREFACTIONAL ACOUSTIC PRESSURE associated

with the transmit pattern giving rise to the reported value of MI.
(unit: Megapascals)

pii Time integral of the instantaneous intensity at a particular point in an acoustic

field integated over the acoustic pulse waveform. (unit: Watts per square
centimeter)

1-32
 Chapter 1 Safety

pii α (Z) Value of the pulse-intensity integral after attenuation, at a specified distance
from the external transducer aperture. (unit: Watts per square centimeter)

prr PULSE REPETITION RATE is reciprocal of time interval between equivalent

points on successive pulses or tone-bursts. (unit: Hz)

srr SCAN REPETITION RATE is reciprocal of time interval between identical points
on two successive frames, sectors or scans, applying to automatic scanning
systems with a periodic scan sequence only.(unit: Pulses per second or Hz)

TIB BONE THERMAL INDEX is a themal index for applications such as foetal
(second and third trimester), in which the ultrasound beam passes through
soft tissue and a focal region is in the immediate vicinity of bone. (unit: N/A)

TIC CRANIAL BONE THERMAL INDEX is a thermal index for applications, in which
the ultrasound beam passes through bone near the beam entrance into the
body, such as paediatric and adult cranial or neonatal cephalic applications.
(unit: N/A)

TIS SOFTT TISSUE THERMAL INDEX is a thermal index related to soft tissues. (unit:
N/A)

zb,ns DEPTH FOR BONE THERMAL INDEX for non-scanning modes, the distance
along the beam axis from the external transducer aperture to the plane
where the product of attenuated output power and attenuated spatial-peak
temporal-average intensity is a maximum over the distance range equal to, or
greater than, the break-point depth, zbp. (unit: cm)

zMI Depth on the BEAM-AXIS from the EXTERNAL TRANSDUCER APERTURE to the
plane of maximum ATTENUATED PULSE INTENSITY INTEGRAL (pii,α). (unit: cm)

zs,ns DEPTH FOR SOFT-TISSUE THERMAL INDEX for non-scanning modes, the
distance along the beam axis from the external transducer aperture to the
plane at which the lower value of the attenuated output power and the
product of the attenuated spatial-peak temporal-average intensity and 1 cm2
is maximized over the distance range equal to, or greater than, the break-point
depth, zbp. (unit: cm)

zpii,α Position of maximum ATTENUATED SPATIAL-PEAK TEMPORAL-AVERAGE

INTENSITY for NONSCANNING MODE components, determined beyond the
BREAK-POINT DEPTH, zbp, on the BEAM-AXIS. (unit: cm)

1-33
 User Manual

Acoustic Measurement Precision and Uncertainty

The Acoustic Measurement Precision and Acoustic Measurement Uncertainty are described
below.

Quantity Precision Total Uncertainty

pii α (attenuated pulse intensity integral) 3.2% +21% to -24%

P (acoustic power) 6.2% ±19%

Pr,α (attenuated rarefaction pressure) 5.4% ±15%

fawf (acoustic working frequency) < 1% ±4.5%

„„Systematic Uncertainties
For the pulse intensity integral, derated rarefaction pressure Pr.3, center frequency, and
pulse duration, the analysis includes considerations of the effects on accuracy of:
Hydrophone calibration drift or errors.
Hydrophone/Amp frequency response.
Spatial averaging.
Alignment errors.
Voltage measurement accuracy, including.
XXOscilloscope vertical accuracy.
XXOscilloscope offset accuracy.
XXOscilloscope clock accuracy.
XXOscilloscope Digitization rates.
XXNoise.
The acoustic power is measured using a Radiation Force for systematic uncertainties
through the use of calibrated NIST acoustic power sources.
We also refer to a September 1993 analysis conducted by the working group of the
IEC technical committee 87 and prepared by K. Beissner, as a first supplement to IEC
publication 1161.

1-34
 Chapter 1 Safety

The document includes analysis and discussion of the sources of error/measurement effects
due to:
XXBalance system calibration.
XXAbsorbing (or reflecting) target suspension mechanisms.
XXLinearity of the balance system.
XXExtrapolation to the moment of switching the ultrasonic transducer (compensation for
ringing and thermal drift).
XXTarget imperfections.
XXAbsorbing (reflecting) target geometry and finite target size.
XXTarget misalignment.
XXUltrasonic transducer misalignment.
XXWater temperature.
XXUltrasonic attenuation and acoustic streaming.
XXCoupling or shielding foil properties.
XXPlane-wave assumption.
XXEnvironmental influences.
XXExcitation voltage measurement.
XXUltrasonic transducer temperature.
XXEffects due to nonlinear propagation and saturation loss.

Training
The users of this ultrasound system must familiarize themselves with the ultrasound
system to optimize the performance of the device and to detect possible malfunctions. It is
recommended that all users receive proper training before using the device. You can receive
training on the use of the product from the Samsung Medison service department, or any of
the customer support centers worldwide.

1-35
 User Manual

Protecting the Environment

CAUTION:
XXFor disposal of the system or accessories that have come to the end of their service lives,
contact the vendor or follow appropriate disposal procedures.
XXWaste must be disposed of in compliance with local regulations.
XXThe lithium ion battery used in the product must be replaced by a Samsung Medison
service engineer or an authorized dealer.

EU WEEE Directive

Correct Disposal of This Product

(Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)

This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its
electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with
other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the
environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items
from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of
material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or
their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for
environmentally safe recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the
purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other
commercial wastes for disposal.

1-36
 Chapter 1 Safety

EU REACH Regulation
For information on Samsung’s environmental commitments and product specific regulatory
obligations e.g. REACH visit:
Samsung.com/uk/aboutsamsung/samsungelectronics/corporatecitizenship/data_corner.html

State of California Proposition 65 Warning (US Only)

WARNING: This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer,
birth defects or other reproductive harm.

1-37
Chapter 2
Introduction

‹‹Product Specifications............................ 2-3

‹‹Product Configuration.............................2-7
Monitor...................................................................... 2-9
Control Panel.......................................................... 2-11
Console.................................................................... 2-18
Peripheral Devices.................................................2-21
Probes..................................................................... 2-24
Accessories............................................................. 2-25
Optional Functions................................................ 2-26
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Product Specifications
Height: 1,344 mm (with Monitor)
Width: 529 mm
Physical Dimensions Depth: 767 mm (with Keyboard)
Weight: 79.8 kg (without accessories)
Weight: Approx. 98 kg (with Safe Working Load)

2D Mode
M Mode
Color M Mode
Anatomical Mode
Color Doppler Mode
Pulsed Wave (PW) Spectral Doppler Mode
Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Mode
Tissue Doppler Imaging (TDI) Mode
Imaging Modes Tissue Doppler Wave (TDW) Mode
Power Doppler (PD) Mode
ElastoScan Mode
3D/4D/XI STIC imaging Mode
Dual Mode
Quad Mode
Combined Mode
Simultaneous Mode
Zoom Mode

Gray Scale 256 (8 bits)

Transmit focusing, maximum of eight points (four points simultaneously

Focusing selectable)
Digital dynamic receive focusing (continuous)

2-3
 User Manual

HS50/XH50
Linear Array
LA3-14AD, LA3-16A
Curved Array
CA1-7AD, CA2-9AD, CA2-6BM, CF4-9
Endo Cavity
ER4-9, EVN4-9
Phased Array
PA3-8B, PE2-4, PA4-12B
3D
CV1-8AD, V5-9
CW
CW6.0, DP2B
TEE
MMPT3-7

HS60/XH60
Probes
Linear Array
(Type BF/IPX7)
LA3-14AD, LA2-9A, LA3-16AI, LA4-18BD, LA3-16A
Curved Array
CA1-7AD, CA2-9AD, CA2-6BM, CF4-9, CA3-10A
Endo Cavity
EA2-11B, VR5-9, EA2-11AR
Phased Array
PA1-5A, PA3-8B, PA4-12B
3D
CV1-8AD, V5-9
CW
CW6.0, DP2B, DP8B
TEE
MMPT3-7

NOTE:
XXProbe CA2-6BM is not supported in the US and Canada.
XXCW6.0 Probe is not supported for XH50 and XH60.

2-4
 Chapter 2 Introduction

3 Probe Connectors, 4 Probe Connectors for option

NOTE:

HS50/XH50 HS60/XH60
Probe Connections
3 PORT O X

4 PORT O (Option) O

CW Probe Connector

Main Monitor
Number of Pixel: 1,920 x 1,080
21.5 inch LCD Monitor (LED Backlight unit, hereafter referred to as
“LCD monitor”)
Monitor
Touchscreen Monitor
Number of Pixel: 1,280 x 800
10.1 inch LCD Monitor (LED Backlight unit, hereafter referred to as
“LCD monitor”)

ECG USB Type (Defibrillation-proof type CF)

Audio Output Port (Right/Left)

Rear Panel VGA monitor
Input/Output LAN
Connections USB Port
HDMI output

Maximum 45,000 frames for Cine memory

Image Storage Maximum 14,000 Lines for Loop memory
Image filing system

Obstetrics, Gynecology, Urology, Abdomen, Cardiac, Vascular, Small Parts, TCD,

Application
MSK, Pediatric

100-240VAC, 800VA, 50/60Hz

Electrical Parameters
Battery: 14.4VDC, 6900mAh

Abdomen, Obstetrics, Gynecology, MSK, Pediatric, Small Parts, Urology,

Measurement
Vascular, Cardiac, Fetal Heart
Packages
* Refer to the ‘Chapter 8. Measurements’ for additional information.

Acoustic Power Control

Signal Processing Dynamic Aperture Control
(Pre-Processing) Dynamic Apodization Control
Dynamic LPF Control

2-5
 User Manual

Digital TGC Control

Slider TGC Control
Mode-Independent Gain Control
Black Hole/Noise Spike Filtering
1D Lateral/Axial Filtering
Signal Processing
2D Edge/Blurring Filtering
(Post-Processing)
Frame average
M/D Mode Sweep Speed Control
Zoom
Image View Area Control
Image Orientation (left/right and up/down)

Trackball operation of multiple cursors

XX2D Mode: Linear measurements and area measurements using elliptical
Measurement approximation or trace
XXM Mode: Continuous readout of distance, time, and slope rate
XXDoppler Mode: Velocity and trace
DVD Multi-Drive
Digital B/W Video Printer
Digital Color Video Printer
USB Printer
DVD Recorder
Auxiliary
Foot switch (IPX8)
USB Flash Memory Media
USB HDD
USB ECG
Monitor

User Interface English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Russian, Chinese

Operating: 700 – 1060hPa

Pressure Limits
Storage: 700 – 1060hPa

Operating: 30 – 75%
Humidity Limits
Storage & Shipping: 20 – 90%

Operating: 10 – 35°C
Temperature Limits
Storage & Shipping: -25 – 60°C

2-6
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Product Configuration
This product consists of monitor, control panel, console, peripheral devices and probes.

1 Monitor
2 Monitor arm
3 Keyboard
1 2 4 Control panel
5 Lift
6 Probe holder
7 DVD drive
8 USB port
4
9 Speaker
0 Probe port
8
! Wheel
6 $
3 @ Location of ID Label
% # Brake
5
$ Gel warmer
7
% Internal peripheral
devices outlet

0 @

[Figure 2.1 Front of the Product]

2-7
 User Manual

1 Handle
2 Storage compartments
3 Ventilation
4 Rear panel
5 Power connection part
6 ID label

1
2

5
4

[Figure 2.2 Back of the Product]

2-8
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Monitor
Ultrasound images and other information are displayed on the color LCD monitor.

Screen Layout
The monitor displays ultrasound images, operation menus and a variety of other information.

4
[Figure 2.3 Monitor Display]

1 Title Area
Displays patient information, hospital name, application, frame rate, depth, probe
information, acoustic output information, and the current date and time.
2 Image Area
Displays ultrasound images. Image information, annotation, and measurement
information are also displayed.
3 Thumbnail Area
Images saved by pressing the preset Store button are shown in the thumbnails. When you
save Single screens, up to 4 images are shown in a list; for Quad screens, up to 12 images
are shown. Click it with the pointer to enlarge the preview image.
4 User Information and Status Information Area
Information that is useful to the user, such as current system status, image information,
selectable items, etc., is displayed.

2-9
 User Manual

Battery Assist
Tips!
XXBatteries are attached to the product so you can move it while scanning patients without
turning it off.
XXPlease check the battery capacity before use.

Battery in use

Battery not in use

5 User Key (User Defined Key) Area

Settings for User Defined Keys, including the positions of Set and Exit buttons, are
displayed. You can change the setting of each button in Setup > Customize > Buttons.

NOTE: For information on User Key Setup, please refer to ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’.

Principles of Operation of the Diagnostic Ultrasound System

Tips!
Medical ultrasound images are created by digital memory and computer when they convert
the high-frequency wave signals that are transmitted and received by the probe.
As ultrasound waves propagate through the human body, they generate reflected signals
whenever they encounter a change in density. For example, reflected signals are generated
when signals pass from fatty tissues to muscle tissues. Reflected signals return to the probe,
where they are converted into electronic signals. The reflected signals are amplified and
processed by analog and digital circuits that have filters for various frequencies and response
time options. Then they are again converted into high-frequency electronic signals, and
saved as a series of digital image signals. The monitor displays the image signals stored on
the storage device in real time.
The entire process of transmitting, receiving, and processing signals is controlled by the
computer.

2-10
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Control Panel
The system can be controlled by using the control panel.

[Figure 2.4 Control Panel]

The control panel consists of a keyboard, soft menus, buttons, dials, dial-buttons, a slider, and a
trackball.
The dial-button can be used both as a dial and a button.

2-11
 User Manual

Functions of the Control Panel

The following are the descriptions and instructions for the controls on the control panel. For
more information on controls with multiple functions, see Chapter 3 and later in this manual.

Button Turns the system on/off.

On/Off

Finishes the exam of the currently selected patient and resets the
Button
related data.
End Exam

Button Displays the screen for viewing and managing stored images.
SonoView

Displays the Report screen that shows the measurement results of the
Button
current application and other information.
Report
When you press the dial-button, the menu items that are available in
the current scan mode are shown on screen. Rotating the Menu dial-
Dial-button
button to the right selects the menu one row above the current menu
selected, and rotating it to the left selects the menu one row below.
XXMarker: Allows the user to enter a BodyMarker over an image.
Dial-button
XXRef: Moves the reference slice horizontally in 3D View.
Adjusts the angle of the sample volume in Spectral Doppler mode.
Dial-button It is also used to adjust the Arrow’s angle or the probe angle for a
BodyMarker.

Button In this mode, only the image is displayed on the screen.

Button Compares four independent images.

Compares two independent images. The active image mode is on the

Button
left.

Compares two independent images. The active image mode is on the

Button
right.

Switch Adjusts the scanning depth of the image.

Switch Moves the focus to the target area for observation.

2-12
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Makes the Zoom Box appear.

Dial-button
In order to close the Zoom mode, press the Exit button.

Press this button to turn the Quick Scan function on. The ‘Q Scan’ mark
Button will appear at the top of an image. It can be used in applications of all
probes.

Button Pauses/resumes scanning.

Stands for User Key; functions can be assigned to these buttons as

Button desired. The function for each button can be assigned in Setup >
Customize > Buttons > User Key.

Start or end M Mode. Rotate this dial-button to adjust Gain. Also,

Dial-button turning this dial-button when in 3D View rotates the image along the
x-axis.
Press this button to start/stop PW Spectral Doppler mode. Rotate this
Dial-button dial-button to adjust Gain. Also, turning this dial-button, when in 3D
View rotates the image along the y-axis.
Press this button to start/stop Color Doppler mode. Rotate this dial-
Dial-button button to adjust Gain. Also, turning this dial-button when in 3D View
rotates the image along the z-axis.

Button Press this button to start/stop Power Doppler mode.

Press this button to start/stop CW Spectral Doppler mode.

Button
Available only with the phased array probe.

Press this button to start 2D mode. Rotate this dial-button to adjust

Dial-button
Gain.

Button Press this button to turn 3D/4D Mode on/off.

Set or Exit function may be assigned to this button. The function for
each button can be assigned in Setup > Customize > Set/Exit Key.
XXSet: Select an item or value using the trackball. Also used to change
Button
the function of the trackball.
Set/Exit
XXExit: Exits the function currently being used and returns to the
previous state.

2-13
 User Manual

Deletes text, Arrow, BodyMarker, measurement results, etc. displayed

Button
on an image.
Clear

When this is pressed, an arrow marker appears to point to parts of the

Button
displayed image.
Pointer

Button Changes the current trackball function.

Change

Button Allows the user to place text on an image.

Button Starts measurements by application.

Calculator

Trackball Moves the cursor on the screen. Also scrolls through Cine images.
Trackball

2-14
 Chapter 2 Introduction

„„Keyboard
The keyboard is used to type in text.

[Figure 2.5 Keyboard]

Help Displays the Help Manual on the screen.

Patient Displays the General Information on the screen.

Patient Info. Shows or hides the patient information on the screen.

Image Info. Shows or hides the Image Parameters on the screen

DICOM Spooler Displays the DICOM Spooler on the screen.

Arrow Initiates Arrow mode.

Home Moves the cursor to the Home position in Annotation mode.

Set Home Specifies the Home position in Annotation mode.

Delete Word Deletes the last text entered in Annotation mode.

Delete All Deletes all the text that has been entered in Annotation mode.

Setup This displays the Setup screen.

Insert Select an input method.

Delete Deletes text.

Turns up the speaker volume.

Turns down the speaker volume.

2-15
 User Manual

Touchscreen
The touchscreen is an operating tool that can be touched by the user to input data. The
functions that are available in the current mode are shown in the form of buttons or a dial-
button.

„„Touchscreen Layout

4
3

[Figure 2.6 Touchscreen Display]

1 These buttons are always displayed on the touchscreen. Buttons that are in use are
shown in blue and buttons that cannot be used are deactivated.

The Patient Information screen will appear, where you can select a
Patient
Patient ID in the list or enter new patient information.

It displays the Probe Selection screen where you can select and modify
Probe
the probe and application.

Quick Preset 1–4 It shows up to 4 Preset buttons configured at Setup.

The general system settings that do not have a direct bearing on imaging
Setup
are explained below.

NOTE: For further details about setting up Quick Preset, please refer to ‘Setup > System >
Quick Preset’ in ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’.

2-16
 Chapter 2 Introduction

2 Displays the mode that is currently used.

3 This is the TGC area. Adjust TGC Slide when TGC Curve is activated on the touchscreen.
Move the slider to the right to increase Gain and brighten the image. TGC stands for
Time Gain Compensation.

CAUTION: Too great a difference in the gain value settings of adjacent TGC sliders may cause
stripes in an image.

4 Menu Area: The menu items that are available in the current input mode are shown
in the form of buttons. The user can access the desired menu item by pressing the
corresponding button. The menu currently in use is shown in blue. To change the values
in the menu, use the ◁ and ▷ buttons.
5 Soft Menu Area: The Soft Menu items that are available in the current input mode are
shown. Press or rotate the dial-buttons right below each menu.

When there are Two Soft Menus

Tips!
When there are two menus available – upper and lower, both menus can be adjusted with
the corresponding dial-button. Or tap the button for the menu you want to use on the
touchscreen and then use the dial-button.

Adjusting the Control Panel

CAUTION:
XXDo not apply excessive force to the control panel.
XXUse the handle at the back of the product when moving it.

„„Adjusting to the Right and Left

Hold the control panel handle and move it carefully to the right or left.

„„Adjusting the Height

Press the lever on the handle of the control panel and move it carefully up or down.

2-17
 User Manual

Console
The console consists of two parts – the inner and outer units. The interior of the console mainly
contains devices that produce ultrasound images. On the exterior of the console are various
connectors, probe holders, storage compartments, handles, and wheels, etc.

Rear Panel
A monitor and other peripheral devices, like a printer, are connected via the rear panel at the
back of the system.

1 HDMI Port (Output): Outputs digital signals to the

monitor. (Input: Not supported.)

1 3 2 USB Port: Used to connect to peripheral USB devices.

3 Audio Port (Output): Outputs audio signal. (Input: Not
2 supported.)
5 4 Network Port: Connect to a network. You can transfer
patient information to another server via DICOM
4
network.
6 5 R.G.B Port (Output): Provides analog signal output to
be displayed on the monitor.
7 6 S-VHS Port (Output): Provides an S-VHS connection for
a VCR.
[Figure 2.7 Rear Panel]
7 Microphone Port (Input): Connects a microphone.

2-18
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Power Connection Part

The power connection part is located at the bottom on the rear panel.

1
2
3

[Figure 2.8 Power Connection Part]

1 Power switch/breaker: Turns on the power of the product, and cuts off power if
overcurrent or overvoltage occurs.
2 Power inlet: Accepts the power cord, which connects to an external power supply.
3 Equipotential Terminal: This should be connected to the equipotential connection part in
the exam room.

2-19
 User Manual

Probe Holder
Probe holders are mounted at the left and right-hand sides of the control panel.
The holder can be separated for easy cleaning.

The six probe holders on the

control panel can be attached
and removed.

Hold the marked area at the top Pull the holder up th detach it.
of the holder and pull it in the
direction shown by the arrow.

[Figure 2.9 Removing the Probe Holder]

Hockey Stick Probe Holder

Tips!
Insert the Hockey stick probe holder into the probe holder to mount. It is provided as an
option.

2-20
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Peripheral Devices
Peripheral devices can be connected to their corresponding ports on the left/right or rear sides
of the console, as needed.

XXDo not install peripheral devices that are not listed in this user manual in the patient
environment. If you install an unlisted device in the patient environment, it may cause an
electrical hazard.
XXDo not connect additional external peripheral devices to the auxiliary socket outlet. Doing
so may decrease safety level.

1.5m

1.5m

1.5m

[Figure 2.10 Patient Environment]

NOTE: Refer to the user manual of the peripheral device for its operating information.

2-21
 User Manual

„„DVD-Multi
DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD-RAM, CD-R, CD-RW

„„Solid State Device

SSD 512G

CAUTION: When using a peripheral device via a USB port, always turn the power off before
connecting/disconnecting the device. Connection/disconnection of USB devices while the
power is on may lead to malfunction of the system and the USB devices.

NOTE: The console’s USB ports are located on the rear panels of both the control panel and
the console. We recommend that you connect USB storage devices (flash memory media,
etc.) to the ports on the control panel, and other USB peripheral devices to the rear panel for
convenience.

The following products are recommended:

„„Digital Video Printer

XXBlack and White: Sony UP-D897 (UP-897MD, UP-X898MD, UP-D898MD), Mitsubishi
P95DE (P95DW, P95D, P95DE)
XXColor: Sony UP-D25MD, Mitsubishi CP30DW

„„USB Printer
HP Officejet 4500, Samsung CLP-620NDK, Samsung ML-2950 Series

2-22
 Chapter 2 Introduction

„„DVD Recorder
Sony DVO-1000MD

CAUTION:
XXYou must install a printer and driver compatible with the English version of Microsoft
Windows 7. Contact Samsung Medison customer support division for inquiries about
printer driver installation.
XXWhen connecting the printer, ensure that the printer is configured under Microsoft
Windows or system setup and has been chosen as the default printer.
XXPlease check the port that the printer uses before connecting. Printers should be
connected to the printer port while the USB printer should be connected to the USB port.

„„Foot Switch
XX3 Pedals HID Type
To configure the foot switch function, go to Setup > Customize > Buttons > Foot Switch.
You can select Exit, Freeze, U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, U6, Update, Single, or Quad.

„„Misc.
Flash Memory Media

NOTE:
XXThe system cannot recognize USB 1.1 flash memory. Remove the flash memory from the
console and equip again with an appropriate device.
XXRegarding file formats that are not ordinarily saved: Please check first to see if it is
possible to save the file format on a desktop PC before trying to save the file on flash
memory.
XXDo not use flash memory media which contain anti-virus programs or are defective.
Otherwise, the product may fail to work properly.

2-23
 User Manual

Probes
Probes are devices that generate ultrasound waves and process reflected wave data for the
purpose of image formation.

NOTE: For information on probes, refer to ‘Chapter 5. Probes’ and the Reference Manual.

Connecting Probes
Be sure to connect or disconnect probes when the power is off to ensure the safety of the
system and the probes.
1. Connect probes to the probe connectors on the front panel of the system. Up to four
(options inclusive) (five including CW) probes may be connected.
2. Turn the connector-locking handle clockwise.

[Figure 2.11 Probe Connector]

NOTE: If the probe does not connect properly, try reconnecting it after removing any foreign
objects.

2-24
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Accessories
An accessory box containing the items below is supplied with the product.

SONO GEL GROUND CABLE

MANUAL USER GUIDE

[Figure 2.12 Accessories]

NOTE: Supplied accessories may vary by region.

2-25
 User Manual

Optional Functions
HS50 and HS60 products have the following options based on the version:

Option HS50/XH50 HS60/XH60

4D O O

3DXI O O

DICOM O O

EZ-Exam+ O O

MultiVision O Basic option

5D NT O O

CW Function O O

Cardiac Measurement O O

Strain+ O O

Auto IMT+ O O

ElastoScan O O

E-Strain O O

Panoramic O O

XI STIC O O

SEE Stream (RU region only) O O

NeedleMate+ O O

CEUS+ X O

Realistic Vue O O

HDVI X O

Mobile Export O O

5D Follicle O O

Stress Echo O/X O/X

2D NT O O

5D Heart Color X O

Crystal Vue X O

2-26
 Chapter 2 Introduction

Option HS50/XH50 HS60/XH60

S-Detect for Breast X O

3D MXI X O

HQ-Vision X O

For further information about optional functions, please refer to the relevant chapters in this
manual.

NOTE: XH50 and XH60 do not support ‘Stress Echo’.

2-27
Chapter 3
Utilities

‹‹Setup......................................................... 3-3
System....................................................................... 3-4
Imaging................................................................... 3-18
Application............................................................. 3-25
Measurement......................................................... 3-27
Report.....................................................................3-46
Annotation..............................................................3-50
BodyMarker............................................................3-54
Customize...............................................................3-58
Peripherals.............................................................3-63
Connectivity...........................................................3-66
Service.....................................................................3-88
Help.........................................................................3-88

‹‹ECG (Option)...........................................3-89

‹‹EzCompare (Option).............................. 3-91

‹‹Stress Echo (Option).............................. 3-92

Setting up a Protocol............................................ 3-92
Starting a Protocol and Acquiring Images........ 3-97
Reviewing an Image............................................ 3-101

‹‹Strain+ Image (Option)....................... 3-106

Strain+................................................................... 3-107
Auto EF...................................................................3-114
TMAD......................................................................3-121
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Setup
General system settings that do not have direct bearing on imaging are explained. The setup can
be modified depending on your specific needs or preferences.
1. Tap button on the touchscreen or press Setup button on the keyboard.
2. Setup screen will appear on the monitor and the touchscreen. Select a tab that contains items
you want to specify.

Selecting a Tab
Tips!
You can select the tab you want in either one of two ways. Select the method that suits you.
XXUse the trackball and the Set button to select a tab.
XXTap the corresponding button on the touchscreen.

3. Specify the settings for each item.

4. Save settings and exit. Click Exit on the monitor screen, or tap Exit on the touchscreen, or
press the Exit button on the control panel to switch to Scan Mode.

[Figure 3.1 Setup – Touchscreen]

3-3
 User Manual

System
In the Setup screen, select System tab. Or tap System on the touchscreen. From this tab, you can
configure the general system settings.

General
In the Setup screen, select General tab in the System category.

[Figure 3.2 Setup – System – General]

Location
You can specify the information that is displayed in the title area on the screen.

„„Institute
Enter the name of the hospital/institution where the product is installed. Special
characters can be entered.

„„Language
Select the system language. (Supported languages: English, German, French, Spanish,
Italian, Simplified Chinese, Russian, Portuguese (Brazilian))

3-4
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Date and Time

Set the date and time for use in the system.

CAUTION:
XXBefore starting diagnosis, please confirm the time, date and time zone and modify the
settings if necessary.
XXMake sure to set the date and time to the time zone in which the system is installed. If it
is not set, the date and time can be automatically synchronized to the time zone of the
country of the manufacturer.

NOTE:
XXYou cannot change the date and time when a patient ID has been registered. To change
the date and time, you should finish the current diagnosis by pressing the End Exam
button on the control panel.
XXWhen the system time and date are changed, the change is not reflected in the time and
date indicated in previous diagnosis results.

„„Date Format
Specify the date format. Select a date format using the combo button. The date format
that you specify will be applied to various date fields in Patient Information.

„„Time Format
Specify the time format. Press the combo button to select the preferred display format
(12 Hour or 24 Hour).

„„Date and Time

Select settings for date and time. When you press this button, the Date and Time screen
appears.
1. Set the date and time by using the trackball and the Set button on the control panel.
2. Press Save to apply the settings. Tap Cancel or press Exit button on the control panel to
cancel.

3-5
 User Manual

„„Time Zone
Specify the local time zone where the system is used. When you press this button, the Time
Zone Settings screen appears.
1. Press Time Zone.
2. Specify the time zone by using the trackball and the Set button for the combo button.
3. Press OK to apply the settings. Tap Cancel to cancel.

Temperature

„„Temperature Unit
Set the temperature unit.

Trackball Speed

„„Scan Mode
Specify the trackball speed in Scanning Mode as Slow, Normal, or Fast.

„„Measurement
Used to specify the trackball’s speed during measurement. Select Slow, Normal, or Fast.
Slower speeds allow for more precise measurements.

Video

„„Format
Choose between NTSC or PAL.

3-6
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Beep Sound

„„Touchscreen
Set the sound level when using the touchscreen. Turn it on or off by using the trackball.

„„Control Panel
Set the sound level of sound when using buttons and dial-buttons in the control panel.
You can turn it on or off by using the trackball.
In particular, for Set/Exit, Freeze, Save, and Other buttons and dial-buttons, you can turn
them on or off.

Account
Register a user ID and password.

„„User Account Manager

This is the exclusive administrator function for approval and management of accounts.
XXUser Login: You can enable the user account (login) function. When turned on, this
applies to the following cases:
–– Screen Saver
–– System startup
XXPassword Expiry Period (Days): Set the password expiration period to None, 30, 60, or 90.
XXLogin Attempts for Account Lockout (times): Set the number of failed login attempts
that are allowed before an account is locked out to None or 5.
XXUser Account List: You can manage user accounts.
XXCreate: Fill out the User ID, Password, Name, and Authority fields. Then, press the
OK button to create a new ID. You can specify the Grade (i.e., Admin or User) of the
created account. When you create a User Grade account, you can restrict the following
functions:
–– Export (SonoView, Report, External Storage)
–– Backup & Restore (SonoView)
–– Delete (Patient, SonoView)
–– Connectivity (Setup)

3-7
 User Manual

XXModify: Save the changes.

XXDelete: Delete the selected ID.
XXClose: Close Settings.

Emergency
Tips!
This is an Emergency Login function provided in case of an emergency. You can use this
function on the User Login screen. When you log in using Emergency Login, the existing
function for using patient information is disabled.

„„Login
You can set a User Account ID after logging in to the Admin account. Please contact the
service engineer to learn how to reset user account information including the Admin
account.

NOTE:
XXThe Admin account can be configured when you run ‘User Account Manager’ at Setup for
the first time.
XXThe Admin account cannot be deleted.
XXOnce the user account function is activated, you cannot load exams without logging in.
XXThe password must be 8 to 16 characters and composed of at least three of the following:
–– English alphabet upper case
–– English alphabet lower case
–– Numbers
–– Special characters
XXIf you exceed the maximum number of invalid password attempts, you cannot login for a
certain period of time.

„„Logout
Close the account.

3-8
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Display
In the Setup screen, select Display tab in the System category. Configure the settings for
displaying images.

[Figure 3.3 Setup – System – Display]

3-9
 User Manual

Display

„„System Logo
Choose one of SAMSUNG or HS50/HS60/XH50/XH60.

„„Direction Marker
Set the Direction Marker. Among SAMSUNG HS50/HS60/XH50/XH60, HS50/HS60/XH50/
XH60, and S Marker, select a desirable shape.

„„Screen Saver
Select the wait time (in minutes) for the screen saver.

„„System Power Button

XXAsk me what to do: Set a message to recheck the Off status when it is shut down.
XXShut Down: The power will turn off.

„„Option
XXAuto Freeze: Automatically switch to freeze state. Set the Freeze time by clicking the
– and + buttons.
XXPrompt for Save on Exit: Use the checkbox to select whether to save or not.
–– Check On: Set a message to recheck whether to save the changes when closing the
setup.
–– Check Off: Set it to automatically save changes when closing the setup.
XXBoot up Caps Lock On: When the checkbox is selected, Caps Lock is turned on after
completing the system booting.

„„Touchscreen Brightness
By using the trackball, adjust brightness of the touchscreen from 0 to 100 in the units of
10. Adjust it by pressing – and + buttons.

3-10
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Patient
In the Setup screen, select the Patient tab in the System category.

[Figure 3.4 Setup – System – Patient]

Patient Data

„„Name Display
XXLast, First Middle: Display the name of the patient in the order of last name, first name,
then middle name.
XXFirst Last Middle: Display the name of the patient in the order of first name, last name,
then middle name.

„„Title Display
Show or hide patient information in the Title area of the screen.
XXNone: Patient information is not displayed.
XXDate of Birth: Displays the patient's date of birth.
XXAge: Displays the patient's age.
XXGender: Select this checkbox to display the patient's gender. Note that the patient's
gender can only be displayed if their date of birth or age is also displayed.

3-11
 User Manual

„„Title LMP/GA/EDD Display

XXLMP/GA: The last menstruation date and estimated gestation weeks are shown on the
screen.
XXEDD/GA: The expected delivery date and estimated gestation weeks are shown on the
screen.

„„Save Patient Page as First Image

If On is checked, Patient information is saved as the first image.

„„Other ID
When a Patient record is created, a GUI for text input is displayed for you to enter the Other
ID.
XXOther ID Format: Any, Numbers, Letters and Numbers, and NHS Numbers are available.
Except Any, inputs in each format type can only be entered as text.

User Defined List

You may enter information related to studies beforehand, so that you can assign the
information easily when entering patient information.
XXKeep Last Physician/Operator Name: Decide whether or not the last name entered should
also be used for the next patient.
Use the Change, Delete All, Delete, Up, and Down buttons to add, edit, or delete
information; you may create a list of up to 20 for each item.
XXOperator: You can save the name of the operator who scanned the patient.
XXDiag. Physician: The name of the physician who diagnosed the patient can be saved.
XXRef. Physician: You can save the name of the referring physician.
XXIndication: You can save information about the patient's medical history.
XXDescription: You can save up to 20 diagnostic memos per application.

3-12
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Quick Preset
In the Setup screen, select Quick Preset tab in the System category.

[Figure 3.5 Setup – System – Quick Preset]

Quick Preset
After selecting the Probe, Application, and Preset connected to the port, save them to Quick
Preset. Up to 4 sets can be saved. By using Preview, you can preview the saved preset.
XXIn the Operation modes, the saved Probe and Preset are shown as a button on the
touchscreen.

3-13
 User Manual

EZ‑Exam+
In the Setup screen, select the EZ‑Exam+ tab in the System category.
EZ‑Exam+ is a macro function that saves your frequently used exams as a protocol and runs them
together. This feature streamlines the diagnosis process.

!
1
3
4
5
9 6
0
2

7
8

[Figure 3.6 Setup – System – EZ‑Exam+]

3-14
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Protocol List
Provides a protocol list for the application. EZ-Exam+ in the Default List cannot be deleted or
edited. Adding a new EZ-Exam+ is not allowed.
XXShow EZ-Exam+ Guide Image: On the Protocol List, liver-related guide protocols will show
a guide image appropriate for the task at the bottom left side.
1 Category: A list of available applications is shown.
2 If previously configured EZ Exams are available, they will be shown in the Preset Lists
when an application is selected.
3 New Protocol: An EZ-Exam+ Creator window is created; upon opening the window, a
new protocol is created automatically.
4 Edit: Edits any protocol selected in the protocol list.
5 Rename: Modifies the name of the protocol selected from the protocol list.
6 Delete: Deletes a protocol selected from the protocol list.
7 Import: Imports the protocol data.
8 Export: Exports the protocol selected from the protocol list.
9 Move Up Button: Moves the protocol selected from the protocol list up one row.
0 Move Down Button: Moves the protocol selected from the protocol list down one row.
! Task List: Provides a task list which belongs to the protocol selected from the protocol
list.

3-15
 User Manual

EZ‑Exam+ Creator

[Figure 3.7 Setup – System – EZ‑Exam+ Creator]

1 Options in Function Window

XXNew: Creates a new protocol.
XXOpen: Loads an existing protocol.
XXSave: Saves the current protocol. It is activated at any time even when there is no
change of data.
XXSave As: Saves the current protocol with a different name.
XXUndo/Redo: Undoes the last performed function, or restores the last undone function.
(Up to 50 Undo/Redo actions can be done; this function will be inactive if it cannot be
performed.)
XXFormat Painter: Applies the format settings from one protocol to another.
2 View Preview: Shows a preview automatically when a task is performed.

3-16
 Chapter 3 Utilities

[Figure 3.8 Setup – System – EZ-Exam+ New Protocol]

XXAdd Task(↑): Creates a new task on the row above the task selected from the task list.
XXAdd Task(↓): Creates a new task on the row below the task selected from the task list.
XXCopy: Copies a task selected from the task list.
XXCut: Cuts a task selected from the task list.
XXPaste: Pastes a task below the task selected from the task list.
XXDelete: Deletes a task selected from the task list.
XXMove Up: Moves a task selected from the task list up one row.
XXMove Down: Moves a task selected from the task list down one row.
XXTask List: Provides the task list which belongs to the protocol.
XXTask Parameter: Provides a parameter which belongs to the protocol selected from the
protocol list.

3-17
 User Manual

Imaging
In the Setup screen, select the Imaging tab. Or tap Imaging on the touchscreen. Configure the
settings for displaying images.

Common
Common settings apply to all applications.
You can select multiple items. Use the trackball and Set button to select items and set the
checkbox.

[Figure 3.9 Setup – Imaging – Common]

General Settings

„„HPRF
In PW Spectral Doppler Mode, this detects blood flow velocity that exceeds the maximum
speed at the depth you want to obtain the Sample Volume from.

„„Color Map Auto Invert (on Linear)

Turns the Color Map’s Invert function on or off when Steer is changed.

3-18
 Chapter 3 Utilities

„„Write Zoom Rearrangement

Enable this to align the Write Zoom image with the center. When disabled, the Write Zoom
image is displayed in the same shape as the observed position.

„„Update 2D in Cursor Moving

Enable this so that in PW Only Mode, moving the SV stops tracing and changes the mode
to 2D Live, while stopping the SV resumes tracing.

„„Relative Focal Position

Enable this so that when adjusting the 2D Depth value, a similar pre-modification ratio of
depth to focus position can be maintained.

„„Enable MultiVision in Dual Live Mode

Enable this so that in Dual Live, MultiVision is applied to the left image regardless of the
configuration of the right image. Note that in B/BC Dual Live Mode, MultiVision will be
applied to both images regardless of this setting.

„„Enable ClearVision in Dual Live Mode

Enable this so that in Dual Live, ClearVision is applied to the left image regardless of the
configuration of the right image. Note that in B/BC Dual Live Mode, ClearVision will be
applied to both images regardless of this setting.

„„Preferred Probe Port

Select the Probe Port that takes the highest priority when the system starts or when you
select a probe.

„„Color Velocity Unit

Select the units of velocity in Color Mode.

„„Doppler Scale Unit

Select the units of measurement for the axis scale in Spectral Doppler Mode.

3-19
 User Manual

Strain+
Apical View Order: Provides each view in the order of LAX, A2C, A4C or A2C, A4C, and LAX.

Display Settings

„„Show Image Info

Show or hide the image information. If the image information intrudes too much on the
screen, when it is turned off, it hides the image information.

„„Show Horizontal Scale Bar

Show or hide the Horizontal Scale Bar in the Scan UI.

„„Display Tx Frequency
Specify how to display the Tx Frequency for each probe. If checked, the current state will
be indicated in MHz; if unchecked, the state will be indicated as PEN, GEN, or RES.

„„Display Linear Full Image in Single Mode

Show the full image of the Linear (including virtual convex) probe in Single Mode. When
the sides of an ultrasound image are not visible at a low depth, use this function to view
the entire image.

„„Display Linear Full Image in Dual Mode

Show the full image of the Linear (including Virtual Convex) probe in Dual (or Dual Live)
Mode. When the sides of an ultrasound image are not visible at a low depth, use this
function to view the entire image.

„„Live Scan Display at EzCompare

When EzCompare is executed, you can locate the live images to the left or right.

„„TGC Window Auto Close (sec)

Specify how much time must elapse before the TGC Control Window on the touchscreen
automatically closes because of a lack of user input. You can select among Off, 3, 5, 10, 15,
or 20 seconds. If Off is ticked, it does not automatically close. You must press the Close
button.

3-20
 Chapter 3 Utilities

„„TGC Curve Display

Specify how long the TGC Curve is displayed for in Scan UI (On: Always displayed, Off:
Never displayed, Auto: Displayed for a specific length of time and then disappears).

„„Biopsy Guideline Type

Select the type of Biopsy Guide Line displayed. Select one from Center Line Only, Outer
Line Only, or Both.

„„Wide Dual View

Wide screen is provided. Select one from Dual, Dual Live, CEUS+, or ElastoScan.

„„Quad: Active Window Sequence

Set the Window Change Order in Quad Mode to Zigzag or Clockwise.
XXZigzag: Set in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.
XXClockwise: Set in the order of 1 → 2 → 4 → 3.

3-21
 User Manual

Application/Preset
These settings specifically apply to the selected application.
You can select multiple items. Use the trackball and the Set button to select and check or
uncheck items.

[Figure 3.10 Setup – Imaging – Application/Preset]

Application Settings

„„Select Application
Set up the measurement application.

„„Seamless Dual Mode

Select whether or not to use Seamless Dual Mode in Dual Mode.
When checked, no space will be shown between the left and right images in the Dual
Mode, while when unchecked, a space will be shown between the left and right images.

„„Enable Doppler Cursor Mode

Select whether or not to enter Cursor Mode before Doppler Mode.

3-22
 Chapter 3 Utilities

„„Enable M Cursor Mode

Select whether or not to enter Cursor Mode before M Mode.

„„Activated Mode When Image is Frozen

Select which mode will activate upon freezing an image.
Choose one of the following: Cine, Measurement, Annotation, BodyMarker, or Arrow.
XXWhen you select Measurement, the D or M Mode Only button is enabled; If you tick it,
Measurement is enabled in D or M Mode only.

Preset Settings

„„Select Preset
Check the Probe, Application, and Preset.

„„ECG
Enable or disable ECG for each Preset.

„„Thermal Index Type

Set the TIs shown on the screen from among TIs (Soft tissue thermal Index), TIb (Bone
thermal index), TIc (Cranial bone thermal index). You can specify indices by Preset.

3-23
 User Manual

S-Detect
On the Setup screen, select the S-Detect tab. Enable or disable the settings for Breast.

[Figure 3.11 Setup – Imaging – S-Detect]

S-Detect for Breast

„„Description
Select On or Off to display the BIRADS to use. Turn this option Off to hide the call text from
the screen.

„„Sensitivity Setting
Select High Sensitivity, High Accuracy, or High Specificity.

„„Classification
Select the classification to use: BIRADS2003 or BIRADS2013.

3-24
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Application
In the Setup screen, select the Application tab. Or tap Application on the touchscreen.

General

[Figure 3.12 Setup – Application – General]

Probe
Select a probe.

Application
Select an application.

Preset
Select the Preset that is supported by the selected application.

3-25
 User Manual

Select Library

„„Annotation
Setup a text library.

„„BodyMarker
Setup a BodyMarker library.

„„Measurement
XXApplication: Setup the measurement application.
XXPackage: Setup a package for the measurement application.

3-26
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Measurement
Specify various setup options for measurements. The setup can be modified depending on your
specific needs or preferences.
1. Press Setup on the touchscreen or keyboard. When the Setup screen appears, select the
Measurement tab.
2. When the Measurement screen appears, select the tab that contains the items you wish to
configure.
3. Specify the settings for each item.
4. Press the Save button to save the settings and finish. You can click Exit on the monitor screen
or tap Exit on the touchscreen to exit the Setup screen and switch to Scan Mode.

General
In the Setup screen, select the General tab in the Measurement category. You can specify basic
measurement options.

[Figure 3.13 Setup – Measurement – General]

3-27
 User Manual

Menu

„„Directions
Select the Direction Type to be applied to the measurement target in the initial system
status. The options are Left and Right.

„„Location
Select the Location Type to be applied to the measurement target in the initial system
status. The options are Prox, Mid, and Dist.

„„Hide the menu on Unfreeze

Hide or show the Measurement menu on the screen after taking measurements. Show the
Scan Mode (On) or hide the Measurement menu (Off).

Display

„„2D Line Type

Select the type of line to use for measurement in 2D mode (Solid: Solid line, Dot: Dotted
line, None: Start and end points).

„„Ellipse Cross Line

Show (On) or hide (Off) the long axis and the short axis of an ellipse while taking Ellipse
measurements.

„„Clear Measurement(s) on Unfreeze

Show or hide measurement results on the screen when switching to Scan Mode after
taking measurements. Select this checkbox to show measurement results in 2D or M/D
Mode.

„„Zoom Window
Generate an enlarged image centered around the marker. You can select On or Off.

3-28
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Result
Select how measurement results are displayed.

„„Position on 2D Mode
Reposition the measurement results when 2D Mode is selected.
XXLeft-Top: Measurement results are displayed in the top left corner of the screen.
XXLeft-Bottom: Measurement results are displayed in the bottom left corner of the
screen.
XXRight-Bottom: Measurement results are displayed in the bottom right corner of the
screen.
XXRight-Top: Measurement results are displayed in the top right-hand corner of the
screen.
XXCustom: Measurement results are displayed in a location selected by the user.

„„Position on M/D Mode

Move the measurement results.
XXLeft-Top: Measurement results are moved towards the top left corner of the screen.
XXLeft-Bottom: Measurement results are moved towards the bottom left corner of the
screen.
XXRight-Bottom: Measurement results are moved towards the bottom right corner of the
screen.
XXRight-Top: Measurement results are moved towards the top right corner of the screen.
XXCustom: Measurement results are moved to a location selected by the user.

„„Font Size
Select the size of the font used for the measurement results.

„„Show Background
Turn the background of the measurement results transparent (On) or opaque (Off).

3-29
 User Manual

Key

„„Trackball Operation
Set the motion of the trackball when using Caliper or Measure.
XXMarker: Stand-by and ready to measure; display the basic marker on the measurement
screen.
XXCine: Ready to select a Cine frame by using the trackball.

„„Set Measurement on Store

Turn the function on or off that automatically completes measurements when the Store
key on the control pad is pressed while a measurement is being taken.

„„Set Measurement on Unfreeze

Turn on or off the function that completes measurements when the image is unfreezed by
using Freeze Key while a measurement is being taken.

Cursor

„„Cursor Type
Select the shape of the default caliper cursor displayed on the screen. Select between
‘Cross’ shape (+) and ‘X’.

„„Arrow Head Marker

Show or hide the Head Marker when measuring a small area.

„„Size
Select the size of the default caliper cursor displayed on the screen. Select Small, Medium,
or Large.

3-30
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Library
In the Setup screen, select the Library tab in the Measurement category.

[Figure 3.14 Setup – Measurement – Library]

Measure
Library in the Measure category is shown. Latest, Average, Max, or Min may be selected for
each item.

„„Application
Select an application.

„„Create Group
Create a USERGROUP other than default group.

„„Create Label
Enter a preferred Name for the created group.

NOTE: ‘Create Label’ can be edited.

„„Delete
Delete a newly created name or group in ‘Create Label’ or ‘Create Group’, respectively.
3-31
 User Manual

Caliper
Specify whether additional information will be shown along with the basic measurement
values when basic measurements are taken by pressing the control panel’s Caliper button.
If this option is selected, the additional information will be saved as an output along with the
measurement results.
Setting ‘Application’ to General will change the items in ‘D Trace’. Setting ‘Application’ to
Cardiac will change the items in ‘D Trace’ and ‘D Velocity’.

NOTE: ‘Cardiac’ setting is activated when the probe setting is Cardiac.

Select the default tool that functions in the measurement cursor state for each Image mode.

Distance, Trace, Trace Length, Ellipse, Open Spline, Closed Spline, Distance Stenosis,
Trace Length Stenosis, Open Spline Stenosis, Ellipse Stenosis, Trace Stenosis, Closed
2D Mode
Spline Stenosis, Ellipse Trace Stenosis, 2 Lines Angle, 3 Point Angle, 1 Dist Volume, 2
Dist Volume, 3 Dist Volume, Ellipse Volume, Ellipse + Dist Vol, Disk Volume

Velocity, Velocity (Cardiac), Accel, Time(D), HR(D), RI, Auto Trace, Limited Trace, Manual
Trace, Auto Trace(Cardiac), Limited Trace(Cardiac), Manual Trace(Cardiac), Dist Volume
Flow, Trace Length Volume Flow, Open Spline Volume Flow, Ellipse Volume Flow,
Trace Volume Flow, Closed Spline Volume Flow, S/D Ratio, D/S Ratio, V1/V2 Ratio,
D Mode Velocity(F), Velocity(F) (Cardiac), Auto Trace(F), Limited Trace(F), Manual Trace(F), Auto
Trace(F) (Cardiac), Limited Trace(F) (Cardiac), Manual Trace(F) (Cardiac), Dist Volume
Flow(F), Trace Length Volume Flow(F), Open Spline Volume Flow(F), Ellipse Volume
Flow(F), Trace Volume Flow(F), Closed Spline Volume Flow(F), S/D Ratio(F), D/S
Ratio(F), V1/V2 Ratio(F)

M Mode Distance, Slope, Time(M), HR(M)

3-32
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Menu
In the Setup screen, select the Menu tab in the Measurement category.

[Figure 3.15 Setup – Measurement – Menu]

Library
Measurement items provided for each application are shown in a list.

3-33
 User Manual

Menu

„„Package
Select the Packages that are supported by each application.

„„Image Mode
View the Menu and the Touch Menu for each Image mode.

„„Group View
Group View lists the groups shown in the Menu. When Group View is activated, you can
delete any of the groups shown, and change the layout of the groups shown in the Menu
and the Touch Menu.

„„Label View
Label View lists the items shown in the Menu. When Item View is activated, you can delete
any of the items shown and change the layout of the items shown in the Menu and the
Touch Menu.

„„Auto Sequence
It is activated when the Auto Sequence box is checked. It provides a function for executing
selected items in a group in sequential order. It also supports the sequential measurement
function for measuring AFI and Volume in OB.

„„Up, Down
Adjust the order of the groups or items in Label View.

„„Remove
Delete a group or item selected in Group View or Item View.

3-34
 Chapter 3 Utilities

„„Touch
A Group or an Item can be placed on the touchscreen or shown in the Group View or Item
View.
XXClick the Touch button to display a dialog box that shows the touch button.
XXClear All: Delete all groups and items.
XXAdd Page: Add a page.
XXRemove Page: Delete a page.
XXClick the touch button to display the groups and items that may be assigned to the
button.
XXSelect Empty in the groups and items shown to delete the groups and items currently
assigned to the touch button.
XXDeleted groups and items from the Touch will be removed from the Group View or Item
View when closing the dialogue box by clicking the Save button.

„„Reset Defaults
Press the Reset Defaults button and then select OK to go to the initial state.

3-35
 User Manual

Applications
In the Setup screen, select the Applications tab in the Measurement category.

[Figure 3.16 Setup – Measurement – Applications]

Caliper

„„Caliper then Assign

After taking a Basic Measurement, the measurement result may be set as a Label. You can
enable or disable each Image Mode by selecting On or Off.

„„Default Tool
You can set up a maximum of three default tools for each Image Mode, which can function
when the measurement cursor is active.
XX2D Mode: Distance, Trace, Trace Length, Ellipse, Open Spline, Closed Spline,
%Stenosis(D), %Stenosis(A), 2 Lines Angle, 3 Points Angle,1 Dist Volume, 2 Dist Volume,
3 Dist Volume, Ellipse Volume, Ellipse Dist Vol, Disk Volume
XXD Mode: Velocity, Accel, Time(D), HR(D), RI, Limited Trace, Manual Trace, Volume
Flow(D), Volume Flow(A), S/D Ratio, D/S Ratio, V1/V2 Ratio
XXM Mode: Distance, Slope, Time(M), HR(M)

3-36
 Chapter 3 Utilities

„„Default Tool Category

Select the default tool for each measurement category.
XX%Stenosis(D): Distance Stenosis, Trace Length Stenosis, Open Spline Stenosis
XX%Stenosis(A): Ellipse Trace Stenosis, Ellipse Stenosis, Trace Stenosis, Closed Spline
Stenosis
XXVolume Flow(D): Dist Volume Flow, Trace Length Volume Flow, Open Spline Volume
Flow
XXVolume Flow(A): Ellipse Volume Flow, Trace Volume Flow, Closed Spline Volume Flow

Menu
XXCaliper then Calc: Clicking the Calculator button switches the mode back and forth from
Caliper to Calc.
XXCalc. then Caliper: Clicking the Calculator button switches the mode back and forth from
Cal. to Caliper.
XXCaliper Only: Clicking the Calculator button switches the mode to Calc.
XXCalc. Only: Clicking the Calculator button switches the mode to Caliper.

Tips! When the Menu Type is set to Caliper Only or Calc. Only, pressing the Measurement Key on
the control panel during measurements will exit the user.

Doppler

„„Display Absolute Value

The doppler measurement is displayed as an absolute value.

„„Heart Rate
XXCycle: Select the number of heart rate (HR) cycles.
XXManual: Enter the heart rate manually when conducting a measurement.
XXAutomatic: Heart rate is entered automatically by the ECG while conducting a
measurement.

3-37
 User Manual

Additional Options
In the Setup screen, select the Additional Options tab in the Measurement category.

[Figure 3.17 Setup – Measurement – Additional Options]

3-38
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Application
Select an application.

„„Cardiac
XXRAP Default Value: Configure the default value of RAP. You may select 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, or
25mmHg.
XXLV Volume Method: Specify how the volume of the left ventricle is measured. Select
Teichholz, Gibson, or Cubed. For more information on calculation formulae, please refer
to the reference manual.
XXLV Study On Straight Line: The measurement direction can be set for each LV
measurement. If it is On, the initial measurement direction is fixed. If it is Off,
measurement can be conducted in any desirable direction.

„„OB
XXSD/Percentile Type: Select None, SD, or Percentile.
XXNT Marker: Select the indicator symbol for measuring NT. You can select either Cross or
Line type.
XXClear Measurement(s) on Unfreeze: You can set whether to delete the results at
Unfreeze. Select either of 2D or M/D or both of them.
–– 2D: Set whether to delete the values shown in the 2D image.
–– M/D: Set whether to delete the values shown in the Trace image.
XXBiometry Assist: Select a measurement item amongst BPD, HC, AC, and FL to display
the selected item on the screen. The measurement standard for the BPD Method can
be set to either Outer-Inner or Outer-Outer.

„„Vascular
ICA/CCA Ratio: Select a measurement item to use to calculate the ICA/CCA ratio. You can
select Max, Prox, Mid, or Dist as PS and ED for ICA and CCA, individually.

NOTE: You may select this when the application is OB, GYN, Vascular, or Cardiac.

3-39
 User Manual

AutoCalc.
In the Setup screen, select the AutoCalc. tab in the Measurement category. AutoCalc. is a
Spectral Doppler Mode feature that automatically performs specific calculations based on
measured values.

NOTE: The specified items will only appear on the screen when the AutoCalc. button on the
touchscreen is tapped in Power Doppler Mode.

[Figure 3.18 Setup – Measurement – AutoCalc.]

AutoCalc. Setting
Add and remove automatic calculations by using the check boxes.
When the Peak Systolic Velocity and End Diastolic Velocity values are 0, not all results for the
items will be displayed on the screen.

3-40
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Tables
In the Setup screen, select the Tables tab in the Measurement category. View and edit the Tables
and Equations to be used in each measurement item of OB.

[Figure 3.19 Setup – Measurement – Tables]

„„Select Category
Select a category from Fetal Age, Fetal Growth, and EFW (Estimated Fetal Weight) to view
and edit tables and charts for that category.

„„Select Label
Select a Label in the list box; that Label’s Author List will be copied into the combo box and
the first Author’s data will be displayed on screen.

„„Select Author
Select Author in the combo box and the Author’s data will be displayed on screen.

„„Create
Create new Author data.

„„Copy
Copy the currently selected Author’s data to create new Author data.

3-41
 User Manual

„„Edit
Modify the currently selected Author data.

„„Delete
Delete the currently selected Author data.

NOTE: Only the Author data created by the user may be deleted.

„„Author Name
Indicates the currently selected Author’s name. The Author’s name may be entered when
creating new Author data.

NOTE: When creating new Author data, you cannot save the data without entering the
Author’s name.

„„Author Data Label

Indicates the Label that the currently selected Author data belongs to. The Label may be
changed when creating new Author data.

„„Author Data Type

Represents the currently selected Author data type.

NOTE: Author data type may be changed when creating new Author data by using the New
button. Note that Table type data cannot be created for EFW.

„„Age Unit
Indicates the Fetal Age unit for the currently selected Author data. The age unit may be
changed when creating new Author data.

„„Valid GA Range
Indicates the valid range of the Gestational Age (GA) for the currently selected Author
data. The valid GA range may be changed when creating new Author data.

3-42
 Chapter 3 Utilities

„„Label Unit
Indicates the Label unit for the currently selected Author data. The Label unit may be
changed when creating new Author data.

„„Valid Label Value Range

Represents the valid range of the Label value for the currently selected Author data.
The valid Label value range may be changed when creating new Author data.

„„Table Type
Indicates the deviation type of the Fetal Age Table for the currently selected Author data.
The deviation type of the Table may be changed when creating new Author data.

„„SD Type
Indicates the deviation type of the Fetal Growth Table for the currently selected Author
data. The deviation type of the Table may be changed when creating new Author data.

„„EFW Unit
Indicates the EFW unit of the currently selected Author data. The EFW unit may be
changed when creating new Author data.

„„Equation
Indicates the currently selected Author Equation data. The equation may be changed using
the Input Parameter list box or the Calculator buttons when creating new Author data.

NOTE:
XXIf the Equation contains a formulaic error, the data cannot be saved.
XXIf you enter a Label that is not found in the Input Parameter list box, the data cannot be
saved.

„„Table
Indicates the table for the currently selected Author data. The table may be changed using
the Insert Row, Delete Row, and Clear Table buttons when creating new Author data.

NOTE: At least one row of data must be entered into the Table before data can be saved.

3-43
 User Manual

Author
In the Setup screen, select the Author tab in the Measurement category.

[Figure 3.20 Setup – Measurement – Author]

Fetal Age
Specify the Fetal Age Author for each Label.

Fetal Growth
Specify the Fetal Growth Author for each Label.

Estimated Fetal Weight

Specify the EFW or EFW percentile Author. Each label is displayed sequentially in EFW
Sequential Measurement upon setting each item.

3-44
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Composite GA Author
Specify the Author to use for Composite GA.

„„Set Authors To
This enables the user to set all applicable measurement values at a time as selected in the
applicable list box.

3-45
 User Manual

Report
In the Setup screen, select the Report tab. Or tap Report on the touchscreen. Here you can set
items related to the measurement report.

[Figure 3.21 Setup – Report – Report Order]

Report Order
In the Setup screen, select the Report Order tab in the Report category.

Library
Application ComboBox: It provides a list of labels for each application.

Report Order
You can add items from the library to the Report Order list.
XXReset Defaults: Restores the default settings for Report Order.
XXUp/Down: Change the order (up/down) of the selected items in Report Order.
XXDelete: Removes the items from the library when they’ve been moved by the user.
(Original items in the Application cannot be deleted.)

3-46
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Comment
In the Setup screen, select the Comment tab in the Report category.

[Figure 3.22 Setup – Report – Comments]

Select Application
Display all diagnostic measurement information and select the measurement information to
show in Report.

Comment
The user can enter comments manually.

„„Clear
Delete saved comments. When executing Unfreeze, any annotation is deleted.

3-47
 User Manual

Description
In the Setup screen, select the Description tab in the Report category.

[Figure 3.23 Setup – Report – Description]

„„Application
Select an available application. Preset items exist for this application, but for other
applications, only user-added items are available.

„„Create
Create a user item. Enter a name and category, then tap the OK button to create, or tap the
Cancel button to reset all values to the defaults.

3-48
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Available Items
This is a category or item list that can be added to the Anatomy page.

Selected Items
This is a category or item list that has been added to the Anatomy page.

Selection Menu
This is a list of the lower-tier items belonging to an item you have selected that has been
added to the Anatomy page.
XXEdit: Items added by the user can be edited.
XXDelete: Items added by the user can be deleted.
XXOn the Setup – Report – Description screen, users can tap the 1 buttons to add or remove
a selected item.
XXOn the Setup – Report – Description screen, users can tap the 2 buttons to change the
order of a selected item.

3-49
 User Manual

Annotation
In the Setup screen, select Annotation. Or tap Annotation on the touchscreen. Set up options for
entering an opinion or a diagnosis.

Library
In the Setup screen, select the Library tab in the Annotation category. You can create, edit, or
delete an Annotation library.

[Figure 3.24 Setup – Annotation – Library]

3-50
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Library
Select an application type.

User Defined Library

The user can enter or delete text.

„„Create
Create text.

„„Delete
Delete text.

„„Reset Defaults
Revert to default settings.

Touchscreen Page 1
Specify the items that will be displayed on the first page of the touchscreen.

Touchscreen Page 2
Specify the items that will be displayed on the second page of the touchscreen.

Replacement Words
Select and edit the text you wish to modify and then save it by tapping the Save button. Up to
four different preset text entries can be added for one text button.

Copy From Existing

Select and set up items provided by the system.

3-51
 User Manual

Annotation
In the Setup screen, select the Annotation tab in the Annotation category. Select whether or not
to discard annotations from the screen when in Scan Mode or when the probe or application is
changed.

[Figure 3.25 Setup – Annotation – Annotation]

Common

„„Erase When the Image is Unfrozen

When executing Unfreeze, the annotation is deleted.

„„Erase When the Probe or Application is Changed

Select whether or not to erase annotations when the probe or application is changed.

„„Erase When the Mode is Changed

Select whether or not to erase annotations when the Operation mode is changed.

„„Display Annotation on Thumbnail Images

Select whether or not to display annotations on thumbnail images.

3-52
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Annotation

„„Font Size
Select the font size to use.

„„Text Color
Select the font color to use.

Arrow

„„Arrow Size
Select the size of the arrow.

„„Arrow Type
Select the shape of the arrow.

„„Arrow Angle
Select the angle of the arrow.

3-53
 User Manual

BodyMarker
In the Setup screen, select the BodyMarker tab.

Library
In the Setup screen, select the Library tab in the BodyMarker category.
You can create, edit, or delete a library in the BodyMarker category.
1. On Touchscreen Page 1 or Touchscreen Page 2, use the trackball to select the location you
want; the touch button will be selected.
2. In Copy From Existing, select the BodyMarker you want; the new BodyMarker will be created
at the location marked in blue.
3. On Touchscreen Page 1 or Touchscreen Page 2, use the trackball to select a BodyMarker to
display it in blue; tap Erase to delete the BodyMarker.

[Figure 3.26 Setup – BodyMarker – Library]

3-54
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Library
Select an application.

User Defined Library

The user can create or delete a Library.

„„Create
Create a new Library.

„„Delete
Delete a BodyMarker.

„„Reset Defaults
Revert to default settings.

Touchscreen Page 1
Specify the items that will be displayed on the first page of the touchscreen.

Touchscreen Page 2
Specify the items that will be displayed on the second page of the touchscreen.

Copy From Existing

Select and set up the BodyMarker provided by the system.

3-55
 User Manual

BodyMarker
In the Setup screen, select the BodyMarker tab in the BodyMarker category.

[Figure 3.27 Setup – BodyMarker – BodyMarker]

3-56
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Common

„„Activate when dual/quad mode on

Show or hide BodyMarker when Dual or Quad Mode is active.

„„Erase when the image is unfrozen

Choose whether or not pressing the Freeze button on the control panel to switch to Scan
Mode automatically deletes the BodyMarker.

„„Erase when the preset is changed

Select whether or not to erase the BodyMarker when the Preset is changed.

„„Copy to active area when dual/quad mode on

Select whether or not to copy the BodyMarker to the active area when Dual or Quad Mode
is activated.

BodyMarker

„„Home Position
You can save the position of a BodyMarker. Select a desired position.

3-57
 User Manual

Customize
Select the Customize tab on the Setup screen. Alternatively, tap Customize on the touchscreen.

General
In the Setup screen, select the General tab in the Customize category. You can set the functions
of the keys and buttons on the product.

[Figure 3.28 Setup – Customize – General]

3-58
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Common

„„Set/Exit Key
Select the functions to assign to the buttons on the left and right sides of the trackball on
the control panel.
XXSet/Set: Both the left and the right buttons are set to the Set function.
XXSet/Exit: The left button is set to Set and the right button is set to Exit.
XXExit/Set: The left button is set to Exit and the right button is set to Set.

„„Pointer
Select Pointer or Arrow.

„„End Exam
XXEnd Exam + Patient: Switches the screen to the Patient Information screen.
XXEnd Exam Only: Switches the screen to the B Mode Scan screen as soon as an exam
ends.
XXReset Preset: Preset is saved to default settings.

„„Foot Switch
Assign functions to the Foot Switch’s left, middle, and right pedals. The functions you can
assign are as follows:
XXExit, Freeze, U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, U6, Update, Single, and Quad.

Clip Store

„„Clip Store Type

XXRetrospective: When saving images, images before pressing the save button are saved.
XXProspective: When saving images, images after pressing the save button are saved.

3-59
 User Manual

Clip Store Method

„„Clip Length (sec)

Specify the length of the image to save. Select a desired Sec value using the button.

„„Number of Heart Cycles

Specify the number of Heart Cycles to be included in the image.

„„Time before Heart Cycle (ms)

Specify the time to be included before a Heart Cycle begins.

„„Time after Heart Cycle (ms)

Specify the time to be included before a Heart Cycle completes.

3-60
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Buttons
On the Setup screen, select the Buttons tab in the Customize category. Configure User Keys.

[Figure 3.29 Setup – Customize – Buttons]

Assign functions to the U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, and U6 buttons on the control panel. The functions
you can assign are as follows:

U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, U6

Patient Quad Arrow

Exit Biopsy Pointer

TGC Simultaneous Probe Change

Q scan Caliper TDI

Harmonic Calculation TDW

Single EFW Measure Store/Send/Print

Dual EFW Result Steer Invert

Dual Live Auto IMT+ None

When you select Store/Send/Print, you can additionally configure the Store (e.g., Single, Clip,
3D Image Save, or Volume Save), Send (e.g., DICOM Storage Service), and Print-related settings.
When you select External Storage, you can configure the settings such as the external storage
that you use to export images (e.g., USB/Network Drive), directory, file type, image quality, and
display of patient information.

3-61
 User Manual

Touch Menu
In the Setup screen, select the Touch Menu tab in the Customize category.

[Figure 3.30 Setup – Customize – Touch Menu]

Mode Type
You can configure the 2D Live, 2D Freeze, C/PD Live, C/PD Freeze, TDI/S-Flow Live, TDI/S-Flow
Freeze, PW /TDW Live, PW/TDW Freeze, CW Live, CW Freeze, M Live, M Freeze, ECG Live, ECG
Freeze, SEE Stream Live, SEE Stream Freeze, Panoramic Ready, Panoramic Review, ElastoScan
Live, ElastoScan Freeze, CEUS+ Live, CEUS+ Freeze, Lithotripsy, Stress Echo, and Stress Echo
Review settings.
* SEE Stream Live and SEE Stream Freeze are only available in Russia.

„„Touch Panel
Specify items to be included on the touchscreen and their positions.

„„Toggle Control
Specify the dial-button activated items to be included in the bottom menu on the
touchscreen and their positions.

„„Reset Defaults
Revert to default settings.

3-62
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Peripherals
In the Setup screen, select the Peripherals tab. Or tap Peripherals on the touchscreen. You can
configure keys, buttons, and the peripheral devices connected to the product.

Peripherals
In the Setup screen, select the Peripherals tab in the Peripherals category. You can configure
peripheral devices connected to the product.

[Figure 3.31 Setup – Peripherals – Peripherals]

3-63
 User Manual

Printer

„„Printer Settings
Select the printer to use by using the combo button. To remove a printer that is no longer
used, select the printer and press the Remove button.

„„Printing Image Adjustment

Choose a printer you wish to use from Printer Settings. You can configure the Gamma,
Brightness, and Contrast settings in 2D Mode and 3D Mode separately. Press the Reset
button to reset it to the default settings.

„„Print Queue
Choose whether or not to cancel a printer job while an image is being printed. Use the
combo button to select a printer that is printing an image. Press the Clear Print Queue
button to cancel the print job.
XXSelect All Printer: Select this checkbox to cancel all print jobs for the connected printer.

NOTE: A print job can be canceled only if the image data to print has not been completely
sent to the printer.

„„Local Printing Area

Select the area that will be printed.
XXFull Screen: Prints everything shown on the monitor screen.
XXVideo Out: Prints only a certain area of the screen, including the Image area.
XXImage Only: Print out the image area only.

„„Hide Patient Data

Select whether or not to display the patient information.

Export Image Compensation

When transferring external images, the user can configure the monitor settings according to
their environment. You can change the Gamma, Brightness, and Contrast settings, and click
the Reset button to restore the default settings.

3-64
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Device
In the Setup screen, select the Device tab in the Peripherals category.
Press the Eject/Remove button to eject or remove the disk from the device. Press the Format
Media button to erase the CD/DVD.

[Figure 3.32 Setup – Peripherals – Device]

Map Network Drive

Connect to a network.
1. Press Map Network Drive button.
2. Select a Drive Name.
3. Enter a Network Folder Path.
4. Enter User ID and password and then press the Connect button.
5. Select a Drive Name and press the Disconnect button to close it.

3-65
 User Manual

Connectivity
Tap Connectivity on the touchscreen. You can perform DICOM administration tasks or manage
DICOM server settings and network information for your system.

DICOM
In the Setup screen, select the DICOM tab in the Connectivity category. Configure DICOM (Digital
Imaging and Communication in Medicine) operation and DICOM server.

NOTE: For more information, please refer to the server’s user manual or the DICOM
Conformance Statement.

[Figure 3.33 Setup – Connectivity – DICOM]

3-66
 Chapter 3 Utilities

System Configuration
Information about the DICOM server used by the system is displayed.
You can change the information, or add or delete a server. The server information is used to
identify the DICOM for the system within a network. It is also used to transfer data to other
DICOM servers.

NOTE: For the ‘IP Address’, ‘AE Title’, and ‘Port No’ settings, contact your organization’s
network administrator.

„„Station Name
Enter the name of the system. Along with AE Title, it is often used to identify the system in
the DICOM network.

„„Port No.
Enter the port number of the server being used.

„„AE Title
Enter the name of the DICOM AE (Application Entity). Used for identifying the equipment
that uses DICOM on the network.

„„Use TLS
Choose whether or not to use DICOM TLS when receiving data.
XXVerify Client Certificate: You can check whether the certificate of the counterpart that
tries to send data using the Trusted Authority Certificates saved on the device is valid.

3-67
 User Manual

„„DICOM TLS
Select a certificate required for DICOM communication encryption. For encrypted DICOM
communication, the device must have a certificate; if not, you must register a new
certificate.
XXImport: Register a certificate for the device. Select the certificate and private key file
that you have. Fields marked in red are required fields.
XXCreate: A certificate is self-generated for the device. Fields marked in red are required
fields.
XXDelete: Delete a certificate from the device.
XXExport: Copy a device’s certificate to a USB drive. If you have created a certificate
yourself on the device, the other’s server that you will access later may need to verify
the certificate for the device.
XXTrusted Autority Certificates: When using the DICOM function, register the certificate
for the certification authority which will verify the certificate of the counterpart
you will access. Press Import under Trusted Authority Certificates and then select a
certificate file.

General Configuration

„„SR Format
Select a format to be used to save SR among General Report and ViewPoint.

„„Store SR at End of Exam

Select whether or not to store the SR at the end of the exam. When you select this
checkbox, the SR is automatically stored at the end of the exam. Otherwise, it is not
stored.

„„Create New Series by Pressing Continue Exam

Even if patients are not examined continuously, the exam results are provided together,
and not separated.

3-68
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Adding DICOM Services

Click Add on the screen. A screen is displayed where you can enter a DICOM service to add.
After adding a service, click Apply to save the information. Tap Cancel to cancel.

„„DICOM Services
Select the type of service to use via DICOM. The supported DICOM servers are Storage, SC,
Worklist, Print, PPS, STORAGE SR, and QR.

„„Alias
Enter the name of the DICOM server.

„„AE Title
Enter the AE title of the DICOM server. Consult your network administrator before
specifying this option.

„„Host
Enter the IP address of the server being used. Consult your network administrator before
specifying this option.

„„Port No.
Enter the port number of the server being used. Consult your network administrator before
specifying this option.

„„Connect Timeout
The connection will time out if there is no response from the DICOM server within the
configured time period. You can specify this time period in seconds.

„„Read Timeout
Specify the Read Timeout time limit for the server you are adding.

„„Retry Interval
Specify how many seconds the system will wait before it retries a failed transmission. You
can specify this time period in seconds.

3-69
 User Manual

„„Maximum Retries
Specify how many times a failed transmission will be retried.

„„Packet Size
Specify the size of the transfer packet.

„„Use TLS
Choose whether or not to use DICOM TLS when sending data.
XXVerify Server Certificate: You can check whether the certificate of the server that tries
to receive data using the Trusted Authority Certificates saved on the device is valid.

Storage Server Information

Select ‘Storage’ as the DICOM Service Options item. Configure the Image Storage Service
using DICOM.

[Figure 3.34 DICOM Service Options – Storage]

„„Transfer Mode
Select a transfer method:
XXSend After Acquisition: Send an image whenever you press the Store button to save it.
XXSend on End Exam: Send all saved images when you press the End Exam button.

3-70
 Chapter 3 Utilities

„„Transfer Types
XXInclude Multi Frame: Select this checkbox to transfer Cine Loops.
XXInclude 3D Volume: Select whether or not to send 3D volume data together with the 3D
images.

NOTE: Only select this option if you use a storage service that supports the 3D volume data
format used by Samsung Medison.

„„Convert to Grayscale
Select the grayscale conversion type for the image you want to apply the DICOM service to.
XXNo Conversion: Send the original image without converting it.
XXAll Images: Convert all images to grayscale before sending them.
XXB/W Image only: Only the images that do not have color are converted to grayscale
before being sent.

„„Support
Include Pixel Spacing: In addition to the area information used in ultrasonography, the
area information used in CT or radiography is also included. You can take measurements in
a PACS system that does not support ultrasound area information.

NOTE: However, only 2D and 2D Color Mode images are supported. In Dual and Quad Mode,
the depths of the included images must be identical.

„„DICOM Compression
Select whether or not to compress the images for the DICOM service. Use the combo
button to select the image type and the compression type (Uncompressed or JPEG
Baseline). When you select Uncompressed, the images are saved without compression.
XXSingle Frame: Specify the compression type for still images.
XXMulti Frame: Specify the compression type for Cine images.
XXFor JPEG Baseline type, choose either Lossless, Low, Medium, or High. You can prioritize
either the quality or the compression ratio. You can specify the compression type,
compression ratio, and frame rate. You can select Full, 10, or 20 as the frame rate for
Multi Frame.

3-71
 User Manual

„„VOI LUT Setup

Configure the VOI LUT (Value Of Interest Look Up Table). Adjust the brightness and
contrast of a DICOM image when saving it. The saved image can be viewed with any PACS
device that has DICOM VOI LUT implemented.
XXWindow Center: Enter a value for the DICOM Tag (0028, 1050) setting. The setting value
indicates the brightness of an image that is displayed by the storage service. The image
will get darker if the value is set to 128 or higher. Note that this function can be used
only when it is supported by the storage service.
XXWindow Width: Enter a value for the DICOM Tag (0028, 1051) setting. The setting value
indicates the contrast of the image displayed by the storage service. Values set to
higher than 256 will result in lower contrast. Note that this function is available only
when it is supported by the storage service.

SC Server Information
Select ‘SC’ (Storage Commitment) as the DICOM Service Options item. Configure the Storage
Commitment Service using DICOM. The Storage Commitment Service is used after a diagnosis
is finished and all saved images and reports are sent.

[Figure 3.35 DICOM Service Options – SC]

„„Associated Storage Server

Select an Image Storage server to connect to.

3-72
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Worklist Server Information

Select ‘Worklist’ as the DICOM Service Options item. Set Modality Worklist service by using
DICOM.

[Figure 3.36 DICOM Service Options – Worklist]

„„Query Setting
Select the type of Modality to retrieve when updating the worklist.
XXModality: Select either ultrasound images (US) or all images (All).

Tips! After setting up the Worklist service, press the Patient button on the control panel to go to
the Worklist page.

„„Update Method
Specify the method of updating worklist.
XXOnly on User Request: Updates the Worklist only upon user request.

Tips! To update the Worklist, set Search Source to Worklist in the Search tab on the Patient
Information screen, and then press Search.

XXWhen Worklist Page Opens: Updates the Worklist every time it is opened.

3-73
 User Manual

XXOn Startup and Every: Updates the Worklist when the system starts, and then updates
it automatically at specified intervals.

„„Exam Description
You can specify which sections of the DICOM file you will import information for the Exam
Description from.

Print Server Information

Select ‘Print’ as the DICOM Service Options item. Configure the Print Service using DICOM.

[Figure 3.37 DICOM Service Options – Print]

NOTE:
XXYou can only configure printers connected to the DICOM network.
XXDepending on the printer, some of the following functions may not be available.
Before configuring a printer, please refer to the printer’s user manual, or the DICOM
Conformance Statement.

3-74
 Chapter 3 Utilities

„„Transfer Mode
Select a printing method:
XXPrint After Acquisition: Print an image whenever you press the Store button to save it.
XXPrint on End Exam: Print all saved images when you press the End Exam button.

„„Layout Setting
Specify the paper layout. For the rows from 1 to 6, the columns from 1 to 4 may be selected.

„„Printer Setup
XXColor: Specify whether to use colors. Select Grayscale or RGB.
XXOrientation: Specify the paper orientation. Select either Landscape or Portrait.
XXMagnification: Specify the interpolation when resizing an image to print. Select from
Replicate, Bilinear, Cubic, or None.
XXBorder Density: Specify the border color of the image to be printed. Select Black or
White.
XXPriority: Specify a priority for the print command. Select High, Med, or Low.
XXDestination: Specify the paper pathway. Select Magazine or Processor.
XXMedium Type: Specify the material type for the printout. Select from Paper, Clear Film,
Blue Film, Mammo Clear Film, or Mammo Blue Film.
XXCopies (1–99): Enter the number of copies to print, using a value from 1 to 99.
XXFilm Size: Select a paper size from 8×10 inches, 8.5×11 inches, 10×12 inches,
10×14 inches, 11×14 inches, 11×17 inches, 14×14 inches, 14×17 inches, 24×24 cm,
24×30 cm, A4, or A3.
XXSmoothing Type: This option is available only when Magnification is set to CUBIC. Enter
the value for the printer which is specified in the DICOM Conformance Statement.
XXEmpty Density: Specify the background color of an image to print. Select Black or
White.
XXMin Density: Specify the minimum brightness of an image to print. If this option is not
specified, the default value is applied.
XXMax Density: Specify the maximum brightness of an image to print. If this option is not
specified, the default value is applied.
XXConfiguration Info: Specify the unique value for a printer. Please refer to the DICOM
Conformance Statement for the printer.

3-75
 User Manual

PPS Server Information

Select DICOM Service Options as the ‘PPS’ (Performed Procedure Step). Configure the
Modality Performed Procedure Step Service using DICOM.

[Figure 3.38 DICOM Service Options – PPS]

„„Always Complete Exams

When you check this checkbox, exams are always reported in their final state. If you press
the End Exam button without selecting a checkbox, the cancellation message that was
selected after you selected the cancellation message for End Exam will be sent to the RIS
server.

3-76
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Storage SR Server Information

Select ‘Storage SR’ (Storage Structured Report) as the DICOM Service Options item. Configure
the Report Storage Service using DICOM.

[Figure 3.39 DICOM Service Options – Storage SR]

„„Transfer Mode
Select a printing method:
XXSend After Acquisition: Whenever you press the Store button, the measurement data in
the report is transferred.
XXSend on End Exam: Whenever the End Exam button is pressed, the measurement data
in the report will be sent.

3-77
 User Manual

QR Server Information
Set DICOM Service Options to ‘QR (Query & Retrieve)’. Configure the Query & Retrieve Service
settings using DICOM.

[Figure 3.40 DICOM Service Options – QR]

3-78
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Modifying DICOM Information

Select a service and click Modify on the screen. The information on the selected service will
appear. After changing the information, click Apply to save the changes. Tap Cancel to cancel.

Deleting DICOM Services

Select a service and click Delete on the screen.

Testing DICOM Servers

Select a service and click Verify on the screen. The connection with the selected service
is tested and the results are shown under Verify. If the result is Success, the connection is
normal.

3-79
 User Manual

HL7
Include the Measurement Data PDF in the HL7 Message and send it to the HL7 Repository server.
Select the HL7 tab and click the HL7 Manager button on the screen.

[Figure 3.41 DICOM HL7 – HL7 Manager]

3-80
 Chapter 3 Utilities

„„Repository
Register, edit, and delete a report repository server to send reports to.
XXAdd Repository: Add a repository to send an HL7 message.
–– Alias: Refers to a name of the HL7 repository server to send an HL7 message to.
–– IP Address: Enter an IP address for the HL7 repository server.
–– Port No: Enter the port number of the HL7 repository server. (a value from 0 to
65535)
–– Connect Timeout: Select a time for transfer standby in seconds. (a value from 120 to
300)
–– Read Timeout: Set the standby time for transmission in seconds. (a value from 120
to 300)

[Figure 3.42 DICOM HL7 – HL7 Manager]

XXEdit Repository: Edit the repository server information.

XXDelete Repository: Delete the repository server information.
XXActive/Inactive Repository: Select whether or not to use the repository server by
selecting the Active checkbox for the registered repository.

3-81
 User Manual

„„Show Job Status

Shows the information regarding the transfer of the HL7 report into an HL7 message.
XXColumns: The user can select columns to check.
XXRetry: The user can select and retry the failed jobs.
XXDelete: The user can delete a job, whether the status is ‘SUCCESS’ or ‘FAIL’.
XXShow All: Shows all jobs.
XXDelete Archived Job Status after (days): Delete archived jobs for the selected dates.

[Figure 3.43 DICOM HL7 – HL7 Manager]

3-82
 Chapter 3 Utilities

„„HL7 Export
If there is an Active repository server registered to the HL7 Manager, the user can export
the report by selecting the HL7 button after taking at least one measurement on the
Report screen. (However, patient information must exist and a warning message asking
for a valid patient ID will appear if the information has not been entered.)

[Figure 3.44 Report – HL7 Export]

3-83
 User Manual

Network
In the Setup screen, select the Network tab in the Connectivity category. Or tap Connectivity on
the touchscreen. You can manage the network information for the current equipment.

[Figure 3.45 Setup – Connectivity – Network]

Network Configuration
Set up the network information for the current equipment.

„„Automatic Configuration (DHCP)

If the checkbox is selected, the IP information will be configured automatically.

„„Static Configuration
If the checkbox is empty (Automatic Configuration), you can enter a static IP address.
Specify the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS information.

„„Revert
Clear the currently entered information and revert to the default settings.

„„Apply
Use the information entered currently to set up the IP.

3-84
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Wireless

„„Wireless LAN
Use a USB adapter to connect the system to a wireless network.

NOTE: The Wireless Network Settings window is enabled only when the system is connected
to a wireless USB adapter.

XXSSID: Displays the name of the connected wireless network. SSID stands for Service Set
IDentifier.
XXAuthentication: Displays the authentication method for the wireless network.
XXEncryption: Displays the data encryption method for communicating with the wireless
network.
XXPassword: Enter the password for the network.

Connecting to a Wireless Network

Tips!
1. Use the trackball and the Set button to press the Scan button.
2. Select an available wireless network and then press the Select button.
3. Press the Connect button to connect the system to the wireless network.
4. Press the Disconnect button to disconnect the system from the wireless network.
5. Press the Close button to finish the setup.

3-85
 User Manual

Profile Manager
This function allows the user to backup and restore the Connectivity Setup data.

[Figure 3.46 Setup – Connectivity – Profile Manager]

„„Add
Save the current DICOM Service list, HL7 Repository list, and Local Network Setting
information.

„„Modify
Edit the Institute and Department information of the saved Profile (other information
cannot be edited).

„„Refresh
Update the saved Profile List and display it on the screen.

„„Import
Import Profile settings from an external storage device (USB drive). (You can only execute
one import at a time; the target profile names are displayed in the Import UI.)

3-86
 Chapter 3 Utilities

„„Export
Export the Profile settings to an external storage device (USB drive).

„„Delete/Delete All
Delete the selected Profile or all Profiles.

„„Apply
Restore the Profile settings to the selected values and then shut down the system.

NOTE:
XXA maximum of 30 Profiles can be registered.
XXWhen adding a Profile, you can enter up to 30 alphabetical characters into the Profile
Name, Institute, and Department fields (Profile Name is a mandatory field; Institution and
Department are optional fields).
XXIf there is no User Data setting for the DICOM Service and HL7 Repository, the checkbox
will be disabled.
XXIf there is no additional User Data setting in the Local Network Setting, the Profile List
will be disabled.
XXOther settings for DICOM and HL7 (e.g., System and General Configuration) are excluded
from the Import, Export, and Apply actions.

3-87
 User Manual

Service
NOTE:
XXUsers should not attempt to perform anything on their own. They must contact the
customer service department of Samsung Medison who can perform this service for
them.
XXEnable or disable optional software or hardware.
–– Option: Show the types of optional software that can be installed on the product.
–– Status: Show the current status of optional software. Registered means that the
software can be used until the date specified by the Expiration Date is reached.
Unregistered means that the software cannot be used now.
XXDisplays the software version of the product.

Help
Press the Help button on the keyboard. The electronic manual will appear on the monitor’s
screen. Press the button one more time or Exit to close it.

3-88
 Chapter 3 Utilities

ECG (Option)
If an ECG is installed, the ECG tab will be displayed on the touchscreen. In a Multi Image Mode
such as Dual or Quad, ECG Cine can be used for each image.

NOTE: You can set each Preset to show or hide the ECG on the screen by going to Setup >
Application/Preset > Preset Setting.

Starting and Terminating an ECG

Tap the ECG button on the touchscreen menu to turn the function on or off.

ECG Setup

„„Sweep Speed
Tap the Sweep Speed button in the touchscreen menu to select the ECG display speed. You
can select 15mm/s, 29mm/s, 44mm/s,59mm/s, 88mm/s, or 117mm/s.

„„Invert
Tap the Invert button on the touchscreen menu to turn ECG Invert on or off.

„„Gain
Adjust the amplitude of the ECG. Rotate the Soft Menu dial-button 1 to adjust the gain
from 0 to 100.

„„Position
Rotating the Soft Menu dial-button 2 changes the display position of the ECG signal. You
may select a position from 0 to 10; selecting a higher value will position the ECG higher on
the screen.

„„Clip
Rotate the Soft Menu dial-button 3 to select the interval for saving the clip. You can select
either Time or Beat.

3-89
 User Manual

„„Trigger
Tap the Trigger button on the touchscreen menu to set up Trigger. You can rotate the Soft
Menu dial-button 4 to select a number of ECG Triggers from 1 to 7.

„„Trigger Delay
Select the time delay between the R-wave and the frame containing the trigger, which
will be applied to the Trigger function. Rotate the dial-button 4 to select a value from 0 to
3,000msec.

„„Dual Trigger
Tap the Dual Trigger button on the touchscreen menu to turn Dual Trigger on or off.

„„Dual Trigger Delay

Select the time delay between the frame containing the first trigger and the frame
containing the second trigger, which will be applied to the Dual Trigger function. Rotate
the dial-button 4 to select a value from 6 to 3,000 msec.

CAUTION:
XXIf the ECG is less than 30 Hz, the Heart Rate (HR) might not be displayed.
XXIn CW Mode, when the ECG is active, the error ratio of the Heart Rate (HR) should be
within 2%.

3-90
 Chapter 3 Utilities

EzCompare (Option)
EzCompare is a function that automatically sets and displays the exam list of a previously
saved patient and the current scanning images in the same setting values on the screen to help
diagnosis.

However, Live scan is available only when the same probe preset is selected as that of the
Tips!
saved image or scan.

XXTap the Patient button on the touchscreen. Select an exam list to analyze using the trackball
and the Set button. (Multiple selection of lists allowed.)
XXTap the EzCompare button.
XXThe saved screen is provided in the Thumbnail field and Date tab appears.
XXDouble click an image of desirable screen to show the selected exam image in the right or
left-hand of the screen and the live scan is shown in the opposite side with the same setting
values as that of the exam image.
XXWhen saved in the EzCompare screen, it is saved in the Current Exam tab under the thumbnail
field.

NOTE: Go to Setup > Imaging > Display Settings and specify the position of live images to the
left or right.

3-91
 User Manual

Stress Echo (Option)

Stress Echo is a function that is used to observe changes in the heart and make a diagnosis after
placing an added burden on the heart through exercise or drugs.

NOTE:
XXStress Echo is an optional feature of this product.
XXIt is not supported for XH50/XH60.
XXYou can use it only when the application is cardiac.

The procedure for using Stress Echo is as follows:

XXWhen setting up and using a new protocol: Register a patient ID → Set up a protocol → Select
a protocol and start → Acquire and specify images → Review the images and make a diagnosis
→ Create a Stress Echo report.
XXWhen selecting and using an existing protocol: Register a patient ID → Select a protocol and
start → Acquire and specify images → Review the images and make a diagnosis → Create a
Stress Echo report.
This manual provides instructions for using Stress Echo by setting up a new protocol. For
instructions on registering patient IDs, please refer to ‘Chapter 6. Starting Modes of Operation.’
For information on Stress Echo reports, please refer to ‘Chapter 8. Measurements.’

Setting up a Protocol
After registering a patient ID, press the Stress Echo button on the touchscreen followed by the
Template Editor button. The Protocol Template Editor screen will be displayed. You may edit an
existing protocol or set up a new protocol.

„„Creating a New Protocol Template

Press the New button.

„„Editing an Existing Protocol Template

Press the combo button in the upper left corner of the screen, and select a protocol to use
from the protocol list.

3-92
 Chapter 3 Utilities

The Protocol Template Editor Screen

The Protocol Template Editor screen consists of the following items. Use these items to set a
protocol.

[Figure 3.47 Protocol Template Editor]

„„Protocol
When you press the combo button, a list of the default protocols and other existing
protocols appears.

3-93
 User Manual

Default Protocols
Tips!
This product offers the following five protocols by default: The default protocols cannot be
deleted or transferred to external storage media. In addition, once the default protocol is
revised, it cannot be save with the same name.

Protocol View Stage

Two Stage
PLAX, PSAX, A4C, A2C Rest, Peak
Exercise Stress

Three Stage
PLAX, PSAX, A4C, A2C Rest, Peak, Post
Bicycle Stress

Four Stage
Pharmacological PLAX, PSAX, A4C, A2C Stage 1–4
Stress (TBD)

MV-PW, TDI, LVOT-PW, TR, Baseline, Legs UP, 25W, 50W,

Diastolic Stress PSAX-BASE, PSAX-Mid, PSAX- 75W, 100W, 125W, REC2, REC5,
APEX, 4CH, 2CH, MR REC10

PLAX, PSAX, 4CH, APLAX, 2CH, Baseline, 5, 10, 20, 30, 40,
Dobutamin Stress
MV-PW, TDI, LVOT-PW, TR-CW atropine, recovery

„„Stage
Set the stage. Use this button to add or delete a stage.
To select one of the default Stages, use the Combo button. To enter it manually, use the
keyboard.

NOTE: You must create at least two stages, and you can add up to 10 stages.

„„View
Set the view. Use this button to add or delete a view.
To select one of the default Views, use the Combo button. To enter it manually, use the
keyboard.

NOTE: You must create at least two views, and you can add up to 10 views.

3-94
 Chapter 3 Utilities

„„Capture Unit
Select a method for image acquisition by pressing the Save button on the control panel.
XXBeats: Acquires images by the number of heartbeats.
XXTime: Acquires images by the unit of seconds.

„„Cycle/Time
Select the image acquisition interval by pressing the Save button on the control panel. For
the Capture Unit, you can select a Beats value from 1 to 4 or a Time value from 2 to 4.

„„Auto Assign
Once images are acquired, they are automatically assigned to each stage and view.

„„Show Reference
Displays the reference image in Dual Mode when a stage image is acquired. This can only
be used if the ‘Auto Assign’ checkbox is ticked.
When this is enabled, the previous stage automatically becomes the reference image.
Tick each stage’s checkbox to acquire images for each stage using the same settings as the
reference image.

„„Auto Next Stage

When an image is assigned to the last view of the current stage, the system automatically
proceeds to the next stage.

„„Capture Method
Select the video acquisition range for images by pressing the Save button on the control
panel.
XXProspective: Saves images acquired after the button is pressed.
XXRetrospective: Saves images acquired before the button is pressed.

3-95
 User Manual

„„Timer
Set the onscreen timer display settings.
XXShow Protocol Timer (T1): Displays the protocol’s recorded time (T1) on the screen.
XXShow Stage Timer (T2): Displays the current stage’s time record (T2) on the screen.

„„New Template
Press the New Template button on the touchscreen to create a new protocol.

„„Save
Press the Save button on the touchscreen to save the newly created protocol. This cannot
be used when a default protocol has been changed.

„„Save As
Press the Save As button on the touchscreen to save a set protocol under a different name.

„„Delete Template
Press the Delete Template button on the touchscreen to delete the currently selected
protocol and open a new protocol template. This cannot be used when a default protocol is
selected.

„„Apply & Exit

Press the Apply & Exit button on the touchscreen to apply any changes made in the
Protocol Template Editor and exit the screen.

„„Exit
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen to exit the Protocol Template Editor screen.

3-96
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Starting a Protocol and Acquiring Images

After registering a patient ID, press the Stress Echo button on the touchscreen. The Protocol
Screen will appear. Select a protocol to start an examination, and review the acquired Stress
Echo images.

„„Selecting a Protocol
Press the combo button at the top of the screen, and select the protocol to use from the
protocol list.

„„Starting a Protocol
Press Begin/Continue. The screen will switch to Modes of Operation.

„„Capturing Stress Echo Images

Press the Save button on the control panel to acquire images for each view and stage.
A matrix that indicates a Stress Echo image acquisition is displayed on the left-hand side
of the screen.

[Figure 3.48 Matrix]

XXTo return to the Protocol Screen while acquiring an image, press the Stress Echo button
on the touchscreen.
XXTo change a stage and acquire images, use one of the following methods:
1. Press the Pointer button on the control panel. Use the pointer to select the next
stage.
2. While using Stress Echo, press Next Stage.

3-97
 User Manual

Auto Assign and Auto Next Stage

Tips!
If either Auto Assign or Auto Next Stage is enabled, images will be automatically assigned
when you acquire Stress Echo images. The matrix will be displayed as shown below:

[Figure 3.49 Matrix – Auto Assign, Auto Next Stage]

Show Reference
Tips!
If you have selected Show Reference from the Protocol Template Editor screen, images
will be scanned by comparing them against the reference image on the Protocol Screen.
Show Reference is a feature that sets the first stage as the reference image and compares
subsequent scans under identical conditions. This feature can only be used if the Auto Assign
checkbox has been selected.
Enabling this feature activates Dual mode. The reference image is shown on the left. The
current image is shown on the right-hand side of the screen and can be acquired under the
same conditions as the reference image.
Applied reference image conditions are as follows:
XXImage Depth
XXWidth
XXDynamic Range
XX2D Mode (Harmonic, etc.), Color Mode
XXClearVision Index
XXPost-Processing (Gray map)
XXGain (2D, C)
XXRead Zoom

3-98
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Protocol Screen
The Protocol Screen consists of the following items:
1 Protocol: Press the combo button to display the protocol list. Select the protocol that you
want to use.

NOTE: Once a protocol has started, you cannot change it.

2 Stage: Press the combo button to display the stage list. Select the stage to use. The
thumbnail list shows the images saved for the selected stage.

Tips! The area of the stage that is currently acquiring images is highlighted.

3 Stress Echo Image Area: Displays Stress Echo images by aligning them with View on the
horizontal axis and Stage on the vertical axis. The currently selected Stress Echo image is
highlighted with a blue border.
4 Thumbnail List: Displays the acquired Stress Echo images by stage. Images that have
already been assigned to the Stress Echo image area are not displayed in the thumbnail
list.
5 Stress Echo Information Area: Displays the Stress Echo settings.

„„Pause Protocol
Pauses a protocol. The Pause Protocol button disappears, and the Begin/Continue Protocol
button appears.

„„Begin/Continue
Starts a protocol. Closes the Protocol Screen.

„„Review
Switches the screen to the Stress Echo Review screen.

3-99
 User Manual

„„Assign
The stage selected in Stage is highlighted with a blue border. The Stress Echo images in
the thumbnail list are assigned as appropriate to each view and stage. This cannot be used
after the protocol has ended.

„„Change View
If Auto Assign has been enabled, this changes the Acquisition Focus View. When you move
the Change View knob on the Protocol window, the blue border also moves to the left or
right in the direction of View. This will not be displayed if Auto Assign or Auto Next Stage
has not been enabled.

„„Next Stage
The stage will change to the next one. The stage that is currently being acquired is
displayed with a green outline in the Stage area on the left-hand side of the screen.

„„Thumb Scroll
This will only be displayed if there are four or more acquired images. It changes the page
of the thumbnail list.

3-100
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Reviewing an Image
Select a Stress Echo image on the Protocol Screen and press Review. The Stress Echo Review
screen appears. Here you can review the selected image and perform measurements and other
tasks.

Stress Echo Review Screen

1 Stress Echo Image Area: The Stress Echo images selected on the Protocol Screen are
displayed. You can review up to four Stress Echo images on one screen. At the top of each
image, the stage and view names, as well as the Protocol Timer (T1) and Stage Timer (T2),
are displayed. You can review up to four Stress Echo images on one screen.
2 Image Information Area: The probe type, application, frame rate, depth, frequency, TI,
image saving time, matrix, etc. are displayed.
3 WMS Diagram Area: Four of the seven WMS diagrams are displayed. WMS stands for Wall
Motion Scoring. At the top of each diagram, there is a combo button that can be used
to select a stage. At the bottom of each diagram, the WMSI value and the current value
selected from the score menu are displayed.

NOTE: You can perform measurements using the Caliper and Calculator buttons. Pressing
the Calculator button displays the heart measurement menu, and the current stage is
displayed in the menu subject line.

3-101
 User Manual

WMS
Four of the seven WMS diagrams are displayed. Enter WMS information after selecting a
stage.
1. PLAX: Parasternal Long Axis
2. PSAX-Mid
3. A4C: Apical Four Chamber
4. A2C: Apical Two Chamber
5. APLAX
6. PASX-Base
7. PASX-Apex

[Figure 3.50 WMS Diagram]

3-102
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Left Ventricular Segment Area Number

Basal Anterior Septum 1

Basal Anterior 2

Basal Lateral 3

Basal Posterior 4

Basal Inferior 5

Basal Septum 6

Mid Anterior Septum 7

Mid Anterior 8

Mid Lateral 9

Mid Posterior 10

Mid Inferior 11

Mid Septum 12

Apical Septum 13

Apical Anterior 14

Apical Lateral 15

Apical Inferior 16

[Table 3.1 Segments and Area Numbers]

„„Entering WMS
1. Select a segment that you want to enter a WMS into by using the trackball and the
Set button. The Score menu will appear.
2. Select a value from the menu. It will be displayed in the segment’s number and color.
3. Select a desired value on the Score menu at the bottom of the screen.
4. Place the pointer in the segment that you want to enter a value into, and press the
Set button. The segment color will change and the WMS will be displayed.

When a WMS is entered into a segment, the same score is applied to all segments that have
Tips!
the same area number.

3-103
 User Manual

„„Deleting a WMS
To delete an entered value, select the applicable segment and then ‘N-Not Scored’. The
color of the selected segment will be reset.

Tips! Press Delete WMS to delete all WMS data entered for the current stage.

„„Delete WMS
Deletes all WMS data entered for the current stage.

„„Cine Play
You can play or stop playing all Cine images shown in the Stress Echo Image Area
simultaneously.

„„Strain+
You can use the Strain+ Image function. This is displayed only if the conditions for using
the Strain+ Image function are met.

„„Change Sync
Select Normal, Short, Long, or End to End as the synchronization method for Cine images.
XXNormal: Indicates the general Cine image play status.
XXShort: Plays the shortest of the four Cine images.
XXLong: Plays the longest of the four Cine images.
XXEnd to End: Synchronizes the beginning and the end of the four Cine images and plays
them.

3-104
 Chapter 3 Utilities

„„Protocol Screen
After closing the Stress Echo Review screen, it switches to the Protocol Screen.

NOTE: For information on Stress Echo reports, please refer to ‘Chapter 8. Measurements.’

Pressing the Report button after finishing the WMSI drawing on the Stress Echo Review
Tips! screen will open the Stress Echo Report.
XXThe Stress Echo Report cannot be edited.

3-105
 User Manual

Strain+ Image (Option)

Strain+ Image provides a feature that supports cardiovascular system applications. It uses a
motion vector to see the heart movement.

NOTE: Strain+ is an option of this product.

NOTE: The Strain+ Image function can only be used when the following conditions are met:
XXApplication: Cardiac
XXOperation mode: 2D (Freeze state)
XXECG: On; two or more ECG trigger points; ECG HR: 30–240 Range

„„Quantification
You may select Strain+, Auto EF, and TMAD.

NOTE: When the image selection is not appropriate, it does not go to Quantification screen.

3-106
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Strain+
Tap Strain+ button on the touchscreen. It goes to Strain+ screen.
Strain+ is executed in the following order:
Select an image → Set up the contour line → Calculate Strain data → Analyze the result

Select an Image
Select the image and chamber information. The Strain+ screen is composed as follows:

1
2

1 Thumbnail List: Saved images will be displayed as thumbnails.

2 Image Area: The images selected from the Thumbnail list are displayed.
3 Operation Guide: Displays the methods of selecting an image and retrieving it from the
thumbnail list.

3-107
 User Manual

„„Select Images
Select from one to three desired images from the thumbnail list. Use the trackball and
the Set button on the control panel to select an image. The following two options are
available:
1 When you double-click a desired image, the image will be displayed in the image area.
2 When you select a desired image and click the pointer in the image area, the image will
appear.

NOTE:
XXIf the conditions for using the Strain+ Image function (i.e., Cardiac, 2D Mode, ECG On (HR:
30-240 Range)) are not met, the relevant items will be displayed in red in the upper left
corner of the image.
XXEach image cannot be used repeatedly.

„„Selecting Cine Position

Set up the Cine for each image displayed in the image area.

Select an image by referring to the following:

Tips!
XXSelect an image that shows the entire wall of the heart.
XXThere should be an R-Peak before/after the selected image, and there should be more
than 70 Cine frames between the previous R-Peak and the last image.

„„Selecting Chamber Information

Select Apical View or Short Axis View using the radio button on the left or the View button
on the touchscreen.

NOTE: If the previously saved Strain+ data differs from the current Chamber information, a
warning window will appear.

3-108
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Contour Line Setup and Calculations

Tap the Next button on the Strain+ screen. The screen will switch to the Contour Setup screen.
In the Contour Setup screen, a contour line will be drawn on the image and the calculations
based on it will be carried out.
The Next button is enabled only when the three displayed images are different from one
another.

[Figure 3.51 Strain+ Screen]

„„Step 1: Setting an Image View Method

Set an image view method, and select three images.
XXApical View: Displays each view in order of LAX, A2C, and A4C.
XXShort Axis View: Displays views in order of Basal, Mid, and Apical.

3-109
 User Manual

„„Steps 2, 3 and 4: Drawing and Generating an Endocardial Contour Line

Provides the same endocardial contour line for each view selected in Step 1.

1. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify three points. Select
three points that match the guide. While specifying three points, if you wish to edit any
of the selected points, press the Undo button. Select Calculate when completed.
XXClear: Resets all images that have been set.
XXFrame: You can explore the Cine Frame.
XXThickness: Once a contour is drawn automatically based on the three points, the
thickness between the Epicardial Line and Contour Line is adjusted.

3-110
 Chapter 3 Utilities

2. When you bring the cursor near the point you want to correct, the point will be marked
by yellow borders. Press the Set button on the control panel and then use the trackball
to reposition the point. Press the Set button again to update the contour line according
to the changed point.
3. A checkbox is provided on the left of the values displayed for each segment. Inaccurate
segment results can be disabled by unticking the relevant checkboxes, and the AVO
and AVC values can be adjusted using the provided buttons.
4. To repeat, select the Reset or Edit button; when completed, select Calculate.
XXDirection: Subcategories are determined by View.

5. In Apical View, EF values are provided for A4C and A2C, but not for LAX. The Short Axis
method does not provide EF values. Please review the result.

3-111
 User Manual

„„Step 5: Calculating Strain+ Data

The final results for the three images are provided based on the image view method.

6. Step 5 begins.
7. You can check the Bull’s Eye and comprehensive results.
XXFrame, Cine Play, Cine Speed: Enabled when Display is set to Bull’s Eye + Images.
XXDisplay: Subcategories include Bull’s Eye (Default), Bull’s Eye + Images, and Bull’s
Eye + Graph.
XXSave as AVI: When selected, images are saved as .AVI files. To use the Screen
Capture function, press the Save button on the control panel.

3-112
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Strain+ Result
The Strain+ result screen is composed as follows:

[Figure 3.52 Strain+ Touch Panel]

XXDirection: For Apical View, the direction setting can be changed to Longitudinal or Radial,
while for Short Axis View, it can be changed to Circumferential or Radial.
XXSegment: The default value is set to 18 Segment, and it can be changed to 17 Segment.
XXSave Strain Data: Saves strain data. If you are retrieving a saved image, the used exam will
be automatically loaded, and Step 5 will begin.
XXAssign to Report: Saves the Strain+ analysis result to the report.
XXExport to Excel: Saves the results and the representative image in an Excel file. This is
available only if a USB flash memory drive is connected.
XXExport to AVI: Saves the result in an .AVI file. This is available only if a USB flash memory
drive is connected.
XXStrain: Displays the Strain value and relevant Parametric image on the screen.
XXStrain Rate: Displays the Strain Rate value and relevant Parametric image on the screen.
XXTime to Peak Strain: Displays the Strain’s Time to Peak value and relevant Parametric
image on the screen in Step 5 only.

After finishing reporting in the Strain+ Analysis screen, pressing the Report button on the
Tips! control panel opens the Strain Report.
XXThe Strain report cannot be edited.

3-113
 User Manual

Auto EF
Press the Auto EF button on the touchscreen.

NOTE:
XXThe Auto EF function can only be used when the following conditions are met.
–– Operation mode: 2D (Freeze state)
–– Screen Mode: Single Mode
XXThe Auto EF function is not an auto-finishing option and the user needs to set the points
to draw a contour line.

[Figure 3.53 Auto EF Screen]

3-114
 Chapter 3 Utilities

Select Images
Select a View. A4C is selected by default.

„„Automatically Calculate
XXWhen enabled: After selecting three points, the user is moved to the Result screen.
XXWhen disabled: Modifications can be made after selecting three points. When the user
selects the Calculate button manually, they are moved to the Result screen.

„„Calculate
Go to the Result screen. This is enabled after 3 points are selected.

„„Clear
You can reset and start over.

3-115
 User Manual

Contour Line Setup and Calculations

„„Drawing Contour Lines

Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify three points. Select
three points that match the guide. While specifying three points, if you wish to edit any of
the selected points, press the Undo button. Select the Calculate button when completed.

3-116
 Chapter 3 Utilities

„„Calculating Auto EF Data

Press Calculate. The screen will switch to the Result screen. Pressing the Reset button will
reset the data and switch to the screen where a three-point contour line can be drawn.

3-117
 User Manual

Auto EF Result
The Auto EF Result screen consists of the following items:

1 End Diastolic: Displays the related information in yellow.

2 End Systolic: Displays the related information in orange.
3 Calculation Results: Displays the Stroke Volume (SV) and Ejection Fraction (EF) values.
If the position of the Cine frame is changed, the calculation results will be changed
accordingly. To reposition the frame, use Diastolic or Systolic. To reset the frame’s
changed position, use Reset Systolic or Reset Diastolic on the touchscreen.

[Figure 3.54 Auto EF Touch Panel]

3-118
 Chapter 3 Utilities

„„Display
Subcategories include Dual View + Graph and Quad View Layout.
XXFrame, Cine Play, Cine Speed: Enabled when Display is set to Quad View.

„„Assign to Report
Relevant information will be saved in the report.

„„Frame
Move the current Frame.

„„Cine Speed
Select the playback speed for Cine images.

„„Cine Play
Stop or resume the playback of the image.

3-119
 User Manual

NOTE:
XXBased on the Endocardial contour set by the user, it traces the endocardium in other
images within the set Beat and finds its border.
XXUsing the endocardial border calculated from all images of cardiac cycle and Simpson’s
Rule, it measures the volume.
XXAmong all volumes of the heart intervals, use the smallest value (ES: End Systolic) and
the biggest value (ED: End Diastolic) to calculate the Stroke Volume (SV) and the Ejection
Fraction (EF).
XXThe user checks ED and ES.

Simpson’s Rule

Find the position of the Apex, followed by the length component of the longest axis. Based
on this information, measure the volume assuming that there are multiple disks.
Stroke Volume
SV = EDV – ESV

EF (Ejection Fraction)
EF(%) = SV / EDV * 100

(Terminology)
EDV: End-Diastolic Volume
ESV: End-Systolic Volume

3-120
 Chapter 3 Utilities

TMAD
In the Cardiac Preset, execute Freeze and then press the TMAD button. TMAD stands for
Tissue Motion Annulus Displacement, which studies the function of the heart by analyzing the
displacement of the motion of the annulus.

NOTE: TMAD function can only be used when the following conditions are met:
XXApplication: Cardiac
XXOperation mode: 2D (Freeze state)
XXScreen Mode: Single Mode
XXECG: On

[Figure 3.55 TMAD Screen]

Select Images
Select a View. A4C is selected by default.

„„Automatically Calculate
XXWhen enabled: After selecting three points, the user is moved to the Result screen.
XXWhen disabled: Modifications can be made after selecting three points. When the user
selects the Calculate button manually, they are moved to the Result screen.

3-121
 User Manual

„„Calculate
Go to the Result screen. This is enabled after 3 points are selected.

„„Clear
You can reset and start over.

Contour Line Setup and Calculations

„„Drawing Contour Lines

1. A4C is selected as the default screen. Use the trackball and the Set button on the
control panel to specify three points. First, select a point in the direction of Septal, then
a point in the Lateral, and finally one in the Apex. After specifying the points, a line
connecting each point will be displayed.
2. Press Calculate. The screen will switch to the Result screen. Pressing the Reset button
will reset the data and switch to the screen where a three-point contour line can be
drawn.

3-122
 Chapter 3 Utilities

TMAD Result
TMAD result screen is configured as below:

1. Measurement result and menu: The result of the measurement as well as the menu for
adjusting or saving the Cine are displayed.
2. Image area: The image with the specified points is displayed.
3. Graph: The ECG and the graph of displacement by time are displayed.

[Figure 3.56 TMAD Touch Panel]

3-123
 User Manual

„„Measurement Result
The displacement and gradient of TMAD points and median are displayed. The color used
for displaying the measurement result corresponds to the color of each point in the image.

„„Position
XXMid Point: Adjust the location of Apex point.
XXTMAD Point: Adjust the location of two Annuli.

„„Export to Excel
Save the result and the representative image as an Excel file. This is only available if a USB
flash memory drive is connected.

„„Export to AVI
Save the result as an AVI file. This is only available if a USB flash memory drive is
connected.

„„Displacement Line
Display the displacement line on the image.

„„Displacement Graph
Display the displacement by time. The graph line to be studied can be selected from the
check box on the right-hand side.
The color used for the graph line corresponds to the color of each point in the image. The
vertical dotted line indicates the current position.

„„Frame
Move the current Frame.

„„Cine Speed
Select the playback speed for Cine images.

„„Cine Play
Stop or resume the playback of the image.

3-124
Chapter 4
Maintenance

‹‹Operational Environment...................... 4-3

‹‹Product Maintenance.............................. 4-4

Cleaning and Disinfection...................................... 4-4
Electrical Safety Check........................................... 4-9
Accuracy Check........................................................ 4-9

‹‹Battery Pack Management................... 4-10

Replacing the Battery Pack................................. 4-10
Recharging the Battery Pack...............................4-11
Disposing of the Battery Pack..............................4-11

‹‹Information Maintenance.....................4-12
User Setting Backup............................................. 4-12
Patient Information Backup................................ 4-12
Software.................................................................. 4-12
Cybersecurity......................................................... 4-13
 Chapter 4 Maintenance

Operational Environment
When installing the product, please pay attention to the following:

CAUTION: Placing the system near generators, X-ray machines or broadcast cables may result
in screen noise and abnormal visual images. Sharing the power source with other electrical
devices may also induce noise.

XXFor the system to function correctly, the temperature should be maintained from 10 to 35℃
and humidity from 30 to 75%.
XXAvoid excess humidity.
XXAvoid direct sunlight.
XXAvoid excessive fluctuations in temperature.
XXAvoid installing the product near a heating appliance.
XXAvoid dusty and/or poorly ventilated locations.
XXAvoid locations that are subject to vibration.
XXAvoid locations where chemical substances or harmful gases are present.
XXAvoid using this product close to or on top of another device as it may cause malfunctions.
XXDo not block the vents on the system, peripheral devices, and accessories.

4-3
 User Manual

Product Maintenance

Cleaning and Disinfection

Using an inappropriate cleaner or disinfectant may damage the product. Please read the
following carefully.
Clean and disinfect the product every day or after each test.

WARNING:
XXTurn off the system and disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before cleaning
and disinfecting, Otherwise, there is a risk of electric shock or fire.
XXDo not clean the electrical contacts or connectors.
XXAlways wear a protective face mask and gloves when cleaning and disinfecting the
product.

Cleaning

CAUTION:
XXWhen you use a detergent, comply with the recommendations of the detergent
manufacturer.
XXDo not spray detergent directly onto the product’s exterior. Doing so may discolor or crack
the surface.
XXWhen using a spray-on product, do not spray it directly onto the product to prevent liquid
from entering the product.
XXDo not use chemicals such as wax, benzene, alcohol, paint thinner, insecticide, air
freshener, or lubricant.
XXDo not use liquid products (including cosmetics) containing glycol components such as
Propylene glycol, Butylene glycol, Polyethylene glycol, etc. on the surface of the product.
Doing so may discolor or crack the instruments on the exterior of the product.

NOTE: For information on cleaning and disinfecting probes, please refer to ‘Chapter 5. Probes’
in this User Manual.

4-4
 Chapter 4 Maintenance

„„Console
Use a soft cloth lightly dampened with a neutral soap solution or clean water to clean the
exterior surface of the product.

NOTE: Neutral soap solution: Since it does not contain strong chemical ingredients, it will not
irritate the skin. The solution must not contain any fragrances, oil, or alcohol.

„„Cleaning the Monitor

Wipe the LCD surface carefully with a soft dry cloth.

NOTE: Do not use glass cleaners or products containing bleach.

„„Touchscreen
Wipe the LCD surface carefully with a soft dry cloth.

NOTE:
XXMake sure that the touchscreen is not contaminated by an electrically conductive
substance.
XXContamination of the LCD screen by ultrasound gel or other substances may degrade the
sensitivity of the touchscreen and cause malfunctions. This phenomenon is caused by the
contact between the capacitive touchscreen and the conductive substance. If you find
foreign substances on the screen, clean it with a dry cloth, and then restart the system.
XXDo not use glass cleaners or products containing bleach.

4-5
 User Manual

„„Trackball

CAUTION: Make sure that liquids or other objects do not enter the product while cleaning the
trackball.

1. Turn the trackball rim counterclockwise to remove it from the control panel.
2. Wipe the trackball with a soft cloth and reassemble in reverse order of disassembly.

Rim

[Figure 4.1 Removing the Trackball]

NOTE:
XXFor information on cleaning and disinfecting probes, please refer to ‘Chapter 5. Probes’ in
this User Manual.
XXThis image may differ from the actual system.

4-6
 Chapter 4 Maintenance

„„Air Filter
The air filter minimizes the amount of dust that ends up inside the product. When the air
filter is clogged with dust, it may cause the product to overheat and generate noise. It may
also reduce the reliability and the system performance.
Clean the filter once a month to maintain the system in optimal condition.

CAUTION: Be sure to lock the brakes on the front wheels before removing or installing the air
filter. Otherwise, unexpected movement of the product may result in injury.

[Figure 4.2 Removing the Air Filter]

1. Pull out the filter under the front part of the console to remove it from the product.
2. Remove dust using a brush or a vacuum cleaner.
3. Slide the filter back into the product and finish installation.

NOTE: If you install the filter while it is wet, it may cause the system to malfunction. Allow the
wet filter to dry thoroughly before installation.

„„Peripheral Devices (Printer, etc.)

Clean peripheral devices according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

4-7
 User Manual

Disinfection
In general, an ultrasound system has an irregular surface and disinfection of the entire
surface of the product is not recommended. Therefore, the user should determine the areas
to be disinfected and the disinfection cycle by taking into account different environments in
which the ultrasound system and its accessories are used.

CAUTION:
XXWhen using a disinfectant, comply with the recommendations of the disinfectant
manufacturer.
XXWhen disinfecting the surface, be sure to use the disinfectants recommended by Samsung
Medison.

NOTE: For information on cleaning and disinfecting probes, please refer to ‘Chapter 5. Probes’
in this User Manual.

A disinfectant qualified by the FDA 510 (k) process is recommended.

1. Turn off the system and disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Dilute the disinfectant solution to the strength specified on the instruction label.
3. Wipe the system’s surfaces with the disinfectant solution, following the disinfectant’s
instructions.
4. Air dry or towel dry with a soft cloth according to the instructions on the disinfectant
product label.

4-8
 Chapter 4 Maintenance

Electrical Safety Check

NOTE: Users may request safety inspections as required, but only trained persons are
allowed to perform the safety inspection.

The product’s maintenance status may affect the electrical safety of the product. The product
should be maintained in an electrical safety state for the safety of the people.

Accuracy Check

NOTE: In case of doubt in the measurements, please contact your local Samsung Medison
Service Department for an accuracy test.

The product’s maintenance status may affect the measurements obtained using the product.
The product should be maintained in an optimal state to ensure reliable measurements.
The equations and table related to measurement accuracy are included in ‘Chapter 8.
Measurements’ in this User Manual.

4-9
 User Manual

Battery Pack Management

The battery pack is a consumable, and will lose performance over time. If the battery life
becomes less than half of what it was when first purchased, it is time for a replacement.

CAUTION:
XXThe warranty period for battery packs is six months.
XXSamsung Medison recommends that you replace the battery pack once a year.

NOTE: To purchase a battery pack, please contact Samsung Medison Service Department.

Replacing the Battery Pack

To replace a battery pack, please contact Samsung Medison Service Department.

WARNING: Disconnect the power cord if you are not planning to use the product. Leaving
the product unused and not plugged in to a power outlet for an extended period of time may
deplete the battery completely, making it impossible to recharge the batteries. In addition,
allowing the battery pack to become completely depleted may cause communication
problems for the product.

4-10
 Chapter 4 Maintenance

Recharging the Battery Pack

Connecting the AC adapter automatically begins to recharge the battery pack. The battery pack
must be charged and discharged within the following temperature ranges:

Battery Model
State Ambient Temperature

Charging 5 – 35°C

Discharging 10 – 35°C

CAUTION: The ideal charging temperature is from 10 to 35°C. The battery pack can overheat if
the ambient temperature is too high, or can take much longer than normal to recharge if the
temperature is too low.

Disposing of the Battery Pack

A service representative of Samsung Medison or an authorized dealer must replace and dispose
of the battery.

WARNING: Do not dispose of the battery pack carelessly. Do not incinerate the battery, as this
may cause an explosion or a fire.

4-11
 User Manual

Information Maintenance
CAUTION: You may lose stored data due to external shocks or internal errors. Therefore,
backup data on a regular basis.

User Setting Backup

Always keep a backup copy of all information related to the user settings in case of data loss.
Users should not attempt to back up user settings on their own. Staff at Samsung Medison’s
Customer Service Department should perform backup upon client’s request.

Patient Information Backup

The SonoView program can be used to backup patients’ basic information and scanned images.
The data is saved in the system by default, and the user can also choose to save the data to
a specific location. If the system needs to be reinstalled due to a defect in the product, staff
at Samsung Medison’s Customer Service Department will restore the saved basic patient
information and images. For more information, please refer to ‘Chapter 9. Image Management.’

Software
The software may be changed to improve the product’s performance. Users should not attempt
to modify the software by themselves; please contact staff at Samsung Medison’s Customer
Service Department for help.

CAUTION: Minor software updates may be carried out without prior notice from the
manufacturer.

If errors occur in the operating system (Windows 7) or a system upgrade is required, please
follow the instructions of the operating system manufacturer.

NOTE: This product uses the Windows firewall to prevent any hacker or malicious software
from accessing the system through the internet or network.

4-12
 Chapter 4 Maintenance

Cybersecurity
Threats against cybersecurity have intensified gradually in recent years.
Threats manifest in a variety of forms, including a system breakdown caused by virus infections
or a leak of patient data stored on the system, and unfortunately, no security measure can totally
(100%) prevent such threats. Therefore, please comply with the following to prepare for cyber
threats.
XXDo not connect the product to an unsecured public wired or wireless network, and under no
circumstances do you connect to the Internet via this product.
XXPlace this product in an area where it cannot be operated or tampered with physically by non-
designated persons, and shut off power when it is not in use.
XXOnly external devices (e.g., USB drive) that have been scanned for viruses and malwares
should be connected to the product.
XXIf you suspect that the product is infected, stop using it immediately, shut off power, and
make sure that you contact the Security Manager (Technical Support).
XXIf a new security patch has been released, adjust the schedule with the Service Team to apply
the patch promptly.
XXSamsung Medison shall provide support until the product becomes discontinued, so that you
can respond to publicly known cybersecurity vulnerabilities.

4-13
Chapter 5
Probes

‹‹Probes....................................................... 5-3
Using Ultrasound Gel........................................... 5-25
Using Sheaths........................................................ 5-27
Probe Safety Precautions.....................................5-28
Using and Infection Control of the Probe......... 5-29
Risk of Electric Shock...........................................5-30
Cleaning and Disinfecting Probes...................... 5-31
MPTEE Probe..........................................................5-40

‹‹Biopsy..................................................... 5-47
Biopsy Kit Components........................................5-48
Using Biopsy Kit.....................................................5-49
Assembling the Biopsy Kit................................... 5-52
Cleaning and Disinfecting Biopsy Kits............... 5-57
 Chapter 5 Probes

Probes
A probe is a device that acquires image data by sending and receiving ultrasound. It is also called
a transducer or scanhead.
The system limits the maximum temperature that a patient can contact to 43 °C, and the output
of ultrasound energy complies with US FDA regulations. A power protection fuse circuit protects
against overcurrent conditions. If the power monitor protection circuit senses an over-current
condition, then the drive current to the probe is shut off immediately, preventing the probe
surfaces from overheating and limiting acoustic output.

Probe List
The ultrasound image scanner uses probes to obtain graphic data of the human body and
then displays it on the screen. Always use application-specific probes in order to obtain
the best quality images. It is also recommended to use a preset that is best suited to the
particular organ being scanned.

NOTE: For the configuration of probes and presets that are not available in the US and
Canada, please refer to ‘Chapter 5. Probes’

„„Thermal Index (TI) Table

Thermal Index (TI) is displayed in the Title area of the screen and represents the
probability of temperature rise in a particular area of the body. There are soft tissue
(TIs), bone (TIb), and cranial bone (TIc) thermal indexes, depending on the body part. This
product is configured to automatically display a thermal index according to the selected
probe and application.
Types of probes, applications, presets, and thermal indexes available in this product are as
follows:

5-3
 User Manual

Probe Application Preset Thermal Index

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

General, Superficial, Deep TIs

MSK
Spine TIb

Small Parts Breast, Thyroid, Testicle TIs

Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc
LA3-14AD
1st Trimester TIs
OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart TIb

GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

Ped Abd TIs

Pediatric Ped Hip TIb

Neo Head TIc

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

General, Superficial, Deep TIs

MSK
Spine TIb

Small Parts Breast, Thyroid,Testicle TIs

Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc
LA2-9A
1st Trimester TIs
OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart TIb

GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

Ped Abd TIs

Pediatric Neo Head TIc

Ped Hip TIb

5-4
 Chapter 5 Probes

Probe Application Preset Thermal Index

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

MSK General, Superficial, Deep TIs

Small Parts Breast, Thyroid,Testicle TIs

Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc

LA3-16AI 1st Trimester TIs

OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart TIb

GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

Ped Abd, Ped Hip TIs

Pediatric Neo Head TIc

Ped Hip TIb

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

General, Superficial, Deep TIs

MSK
Spine TIb

Small Parts Breast, Thyroid,Testicle TIs

Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc
LA4-18BD
1st Trimester TIs
OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart TIb

GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

Ped Abd TIs

Pediatric Neo Head TIc

Ped Hip TIb

5-5
 User Manual

Probe Application Preset Thermal Index

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

General, Superficial, Deep TIs

MSK
Spine TIb

Small Parts Breast, Thyroid,Testicle TIs

Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc
LA3-16A
1st Trimester TIs
OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart TIb

GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

Ped Abd TIs

Pediatric Neo Head TIc

Ped Hip TIb

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

General, Superficial, Deep TIs

MSK
Spine TIb

1st Trimester TIs

OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart, NT TIb

GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

CA1-7AD
Ped Abd TIs

Pediatric Neo Head TIc

Ped Hip TIb

Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc

Urology Prostate, Bladder TIs

5-6
 Chapter 5 Probes

Probe Application Preset Thermal Index

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

General, Superficial, Deep TIs

MSK
Spine TIb

1st Trimester TIs

OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart, NT TIb

GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

CA2-9AD
Ped Abd TIs

Pediatric Neo Head TIc

Ped Hip TIb

Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc

Urology Prostate, Bladder TIs

CA2-6BM Abdomen Abdomen, Renal TIs

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

General, Superficial, Deep TIs

MSK
Spine TIb

1st Trimester TIs

OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart TIb

GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

CF4-9
Ped Abd TIs

Pediatric Neo Head TIc

Ped Hip TIb

Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc

Urology Prostate, Bladder TIs

5-7
 User Manual

Probe Application Preset Thermal Index

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

Cardiac Adult Echo, Echo Penetration, Ped Echo, Aortic Arch TIs

PA1-5A Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc

Pediatric Ped Abd TIs

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

Cardiac Adult Echo, Ped Echo, Aortic Arch TIs

PA3-8B Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc

Pediatric Ped Abd TIs

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

Cardiac Adult Echo, Echo Penetration, Ped Echo, Aortic Arch TIs

PE2-4 Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc

Pediatric Ped Abd TIs

1st Trimester TIs

OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart TIb
EA2-11B
GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

Urology Prostate, Bladder TIs

1st Trimester TIs

OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart TIb
ER4-9
GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

Urology Prostate, Bladder TIs

5-8
 Chapter 5 Probes

Probe Application Preset Thermal Index

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

General, Superficial, Deep TIs

MSK
Spine TIb

1st Trimester TIs

OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart, NT TIb

GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

CV1-8AD
Ped Abd TIs

Pediatric Neo Head TIc

Ped Hip TIb

Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc

Urology Prostate, Bladder TIs

1st Trimester TIs

OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart TIb
V5-9
GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

Urology Prostate, Bladder TIs

Cardiac Adult Echo, Ped Echo TIs

DP2B Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc

Cardiac Adult Echo, Ped Echo TIs

CW6.0 Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc

MMPT3-7 Cardiac Adult Echo, Ped Echo, Aortic Arch TIs

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

Cardiac Adult Echo, Ped Echo, Aortic Arch TIs

PA4-12B Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc

Pediatric Ped Abd TIs

5-9
 User Manual

Probe Application Preset Thermal Index

1st Trimester TIs

OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart TIb
VR5-9
GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

Urology Prostate, Bladder TIs

1st Trimester TIs

OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart TIb
EVN4-9
GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

Urology Prostate, Bladder TIs

Cardiac Ped Echo TIs

DP8B Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

1st Trimester TIs

OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart, NT TIb

GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

General, Superficial, Deep TIs

MSK
Spine TIb
CA3-10A
Ped Abd TIs

Pediatric Neo Head TIc

Ped Hip TIb

Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc

Urology Prostate, Bladder TIs

1st Trimester TIs

OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart TIb
EA2-11AR
GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs

Urology Prostate, Bladder TIs

5-10
 Chapter 5 Probes

NOTE:
XXBesides the system-optimized presets, users can select preferred settings from User 1 to
User 8.
XXFor information on selection and settings of probes, please refer to ‘Chapter 6. Starting
Modes of Operation.’
XXThe default thermal index may vary depending on the preset.
XXYou can change the thermal index in Setup > Imaging > Application/Preset > Preset
Settings > Thermal Index Type.

5-11
 User Manual

NOTE:
XXCW6.0 Probe is not supported for XH50/XH60.
XXProbe CA2-6BM is not supported in the USA.
XXThe applications and presets for the following probes are not supported in the USA.

Probe Application Preset

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta
Vascular TCD
LA3-14AD
OB 1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
Pediatric Neo Head, Ped Abd, Ped Hip
Vascular TCD
LA2-9A OB 1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
Pediatric Neo Head, Ped Abd, Ped Hip
Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta
Small Parts Breast, Thyroid, Testicle
Vascular TCD
LA3-16AI
OB 1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
GYN Uterus, Adnexa
Pediatric Neo Head, Ped Abd, Ped Hip
Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta
Vascular TCD
LA4-18BD OB 1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
GYN Uterus, Adnexa
Pediatric Neo Head, Ped Abd, Ped Hip
Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta
Vascular TCD
LA3-16A
OB 1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
Pediatric Neo Head, Ped Abd, Ped Hip

5-12
 Chapter 5 Probes

Probe Application Preset

Pediatric Neo Head, Ped Abd, Ped Hip
CA1-7AD Vascular Carotid, Arterial, Venous, TCD
Urology Prostate, Bladder
MSK General, Superficial, Deep, Spine
Pediatric Neo Head, Ped Abd, Ped Hip
CA2-9AD
Vascular Carotid, Arterial, Venous, TCD
Urology Prostate, Bladder
MSK General, Superficial, Deep, Spine
CF4-9 Vascular TCD
Urology Prostate, Bladder
Vascular Carotid, Arterial, Venous
PA1-5A
Pediatric Ped Abd
PA3-8B Vascular Carotid, Arterial, Venous
Vascular Carotid, Arterial, Venous
PE2-4
Pediatric Ped Abd
MSK General, Superficial, Deep, Spine
Pediatric Neo Head, Ped Abd, Ped Hip
CV1-8AD
Vascular Carotid, Arterial, Venous, TCD
Urology Prostate, Bladder

5-13
 User Manual

NOTE:
XXProbe CA2-6BM is not supported in Canada.
XXThe applications and presets for the following probes are not supported in Canada.

Probe Application Preset

LA3-14AD Vascular TCD
LA2-9A Vascular TCD
Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta
OB 1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
LA3-16AI
GYN Uterus, Adnexa
Vascular TCD
Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta
OB 1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
LA4-18BD
GYN Uterus, Adnexa
Vascular TCD
OB 1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
LA3-16A Pediatric Neo Head
Vascular TCD
Pediatric Neo Head
CA1-7AD
Vascular TCD
MSK General, Superficial, Deep,Spine
CA2-9AD Pediatric Neo Head
Vascular TCD
MSK General, Superficial, Deep,Spine
CF4-9 Uroloy Prostate, Bladder
Vascular TCD
PA3-8B Vascular Carotid, Arterial, Venous
PE2-4 Vascular Carotid, Arterial, Venous
Pediatric Neo Head
CV1-8AD Urology Prostate, Bladder
MSK Superficial

5-14
 Chapter 5 Probes

„„Function List
The functions available in this product for various probes and applications are as follows:

Q S-
Probe Application Panoramic ECG Elasto Scan CM TDI PD
Scan Flow

Abdomen O O X O X X O O

X
MSK O O O X X O O
General (O)

X
Small Parts O O Breast (O), O X X O O
LA3-14AD Thyroid (O)

Vascular O O X O X X O O

OB O O X O X X O O

GYN O O X O X X O O

Pediatric O O X O X X O O

Abdomen O O X O X X O O

MSK O O X O X X O O

Small Parts O O X O X X O O

LA2-9A Vascular O O X O X X O O

OB O O X O X X O O

GYN O O X O X X O O

Pediatric O O X O X X O O

Abdomen O O X O X X O O

MSK O O X O X X O O

Small Parts O O X O X X O O

LA3-16AI Vascular O O X O X X O O

OB O O X O X X O O

GYN O O X O X X O O

Pediatric O O X O X X O O

5-15
 User Manual

Q S-
Probe Application Panoramic ECG Elasto Scan CM TDI PD
Scan Flow

Abdomen O O X O X X O O

X
MSK O O O X X O O
General (O)

X
Small Parts O O Breast (O), O X X O O
LA4-18BD Thyroid (O)

Vascular O O X O X X O O

OB O O X O X X O O

GYN O O X O X X O O

Pediatric O O X O X X O O

Abdomen O O X O X X O O

X
MSK O O O X X O O
General (O)

X
Small Parts O O Breast (O), O X X O O
LA3-16A Thyroid (O)

Vascular O O X O X X O O

OB O O X O X X O O

GYN O O X O X X O O

Pediatric O O X O X X O O

Abdomen O O X O X X O O

MSK O O X O X X O O

OB O O X O X X O O

CA1-7AD GYN O O X O X X O O

Pediatric O O X O X X O O

Vascular O O X O X X O O

Urology O O X O X X O O

5-16
 Chapter 5 Probes

Q S-
Probe Application Panoramic ECG Elasto Scan CM TDI PD
Scan Flow

Abdomen O O X O X X O O

MSK O O X O X X O O

OB O O X O X X O O

CA2-9AD GYN O O X O X X O O

Pediatric O O X O X X O O

Vascular O O X O X X O O

Urology O O X O X X O O

CA2-6BM Abdomen O O X O X X O O

Abdomen O O X O X X O O

MSK O O X O X X O O

OB O O X O X X O O

CF4-9 GYN O O X O X X O O

Pediatric O O X O X X O O

Vascular O O X O X X O O

Urology O O X O X X O O

Abdomen X O X O X X O O

Cardiac X O X O O O X X
PA1-5A
Vascular X O X O X X O O

Pediatric X O X O X X O O

Abdomen X O X O X X O O

Cardiac X O X O O O X X
PA3-8B
Vascular X O X O X X O O

Pediatric X O X O X X O O

Abdomen X O X O X X O O

Cardiac X O X O O O X X
PE2-4
Vascular X O X O X X O O

Pediatric X O X O X X O O

5-17
 User Manual

Q S-
Probe Application Panoramic ECG Elasto Scan CM TDI PD
Scan Flow

OB X O X O X X O O

GYN X O O O X X O O
EA2-11B
Prostate (O),
Urology X O O X X O O
Bladder (X)

OB X O X O X X O O

GYN X O O O X X O O
ER4-9
Prostate (O),
Urology X O O X X O O
Bladder (X)

Abdomen O O X O X X O O

MSK O O X O X X O O

OB O O X O X X O O

CV1-8AD GYN O O X O X X O O

Pediatric O O X O X X O O

Vascular O O X O X X O O

Urology O O X O X X O O

OB X O X O X X O O

GYN X O O O X X O O
V5-9
Prostate (O),
Urology X O O X X O O
Bladder (X)

Cardiac X O X X X X X X
DP2B
Vascular X O X X X X X X

Cardiac X O X X X X X X
CW6.0
Vascular X O X X X X X X

MMPT3-7 Cardiac X O X O O O X X

Abdomen X X X O X X O O

Cardiac X O X O O O X X

PA4-12B X
Vascular X Carotid X O X X O O
(O)

Pediatric X X X O X X O O

5-18
 Chapter 5 Probes

Q S-
Probe Application Panoramic ECG Elasto Scan CM TDI PD
Scan Flow

OB X X X O X X O O

GYN X X O O X X O O
VR5-9
X
Urology X X O X X O O
Prostate (O)

OB X X X O X X O O

GYN X X O O X X O O
EVN4-9
X
Urology X X O X X O O
Prostate (O)

Cardiac X O X X X X X X

DP8B X
Vascular X Carotid X X X X X X
(O)

Abdomen O X X O X X O O

OB O X X O X X O O

GYN O X X O X X O O

CA3-10A MSK O X X O X X O O

Pediatric O X X O X X O O

Vascular O X X O X X O O

Urology O X X O X X O O

OB X O X O X X O O

GYN X O O O X X O O
EA2-11AR
Prostate (O),
Urology X O O X X O O
Bladder (X)

5-19
 User Manual

Multi Clear
Probe Application Biopsy TDW CW S-Har. Har
Vision Vision

Abdomen O X X O O O O

MSK O X X O O O O

Small Parts O X X O O O O

LA3-14AD Vascular O X X O O O O

OB O X X O O O O

GYN O X X O O O O

Pediatric O X X O O O O

Abdomen O X X O O O O

MSK O X X O O O O

Small Parts O X X O O O O

LA2-9A Vascular O X X O O O O

OB O X X O O O O

GYN O X X O O O O

Pediatric O X X O O O O

Abdomen X X X O O O O

MSK X X X O O O O

Small Parts X X X O O O O

LA3-16AI Vascular X X X O O O O

OB X X X O O O O

GYN X X X O O O O

Pediatric X X X O O O O

Abdomen O X X O O O O

MSK O X X O O O O

Small Parts O X X O O O O

LA4-18BD Vascular O X X O O O O

OB O X X O O O O

GYN O X X O O O O

Pediatric O X X O O O O

5-20
 Chapter 5 Probes

Multi Clear
Probe Application Biopsy TDW CW S-Har. Har
Vision Vision

Abdomen O X X O O O O

MSK O X X O O O O

Small Parts O X X O O O O

LA3-16A Vascular O X X O O O O

OB O X X O O O O

GYN O X X O O O O

Pediatric O X X O O O O

Abdomen O X X O O O O

MSK O X X O O O O

OB O X X O O O O

CA1-7AD GYN O X X O O O O

Pediatric O X X O O O O

Vascular O X X O O O O

Urology O X X O O O O

Abdomen O X X O O O O

MSK O X X O O O O

OB O X X O O O O

CA2-9AD GYN O X X O O O O

Pediatric O X X O O O O

Vascular O X X O O O O

Urology O X X O O O O

CA2-6BM Abdomen X X X O O O O

5-21
 User Manual

Multi Clear
Probe Application Biopsy TDW CW S-Har. Har
Vision Vision

Abdomen X X X O O X X

MSK X X X O O X X

OB X X X O O X X

CF4-9 GYN X X X O O X X

Pediatric X X X O O X X

Vascular X X X O O X X

Urology X X X O O X X

Abdomen X X O X O O O

Cardiac X O O X O O O
PA1-5A
Vascular X X O X O O O

Pediatric X X O X O O O

Abdomen X X O X O O O

Cardiac X O O X O O O
PA3-8B
Vascular X X O X O O O

Pediatric X X O X O O O

Abdomen X X O X O O O

Cardiac X O O X O O O
PE2-4
Vascular X X O X O O O

Pediatric X X O X O O O

OB O X X O O O O

EA2-11B GYN O X X O O O O

Urology O X X O O O O

OB O X X O O O O

ER4-9 GYN O X X O O O O

Urology O X X O O O O

5-22
 Chapter 5 Probes

Multi Clear
Probe Application Biopsy TDW CW S-Har. Har
Vision Vision

Abdomen O X X O O O O

MSK O X X O O O O

OB O X X O O O O

CV1-8AD GYN O X X O O O O

Pediatric O X X O O O O

Vascular O X X O O O O

Urology O X X O O O O

OB O X X O O O O

V5-9 GYN O X X O O O O

Urology O X X O O O O

Cardiac X X O X X X X
DP2B
Vascular X X O X X X X

Cardiac X X O X X X X
CW6.0
Vascular X X O X X X X

MMPT3-7 Cardiac X O O X O O O

Abdomen X X O X O O O

Cardiac X O O X O O O
PA4-12B
Vascular X X O X O O O

Pediatric X X O X O O O

OB O X X O O O O

VR5-9 GYN O X X O O O O

Urology O X X O O O O

OB O X X O O O O

EVN4-9 GYN O X X O O O O

Urology O X X O O O O

Cardiac X X O X X X X
DP8B
Vascular X X O X X X X

5-23
 User Manual

Multi Clear
Probe Application Biopsy TDW CW S-Har. Har
Vision Vision

Abdomen X X X O O O O

OB X X X O O O O

GYN X X X O O O O

CA3-10A MSK X X X O O O O

Pediatric X X X O O O O

Vascular X X X O O O O

Urology X X X O O O O

OB O X X O O O O

EA2-11AR GYN O X X O O O O

Urology O X X O O O O

NOTE:
XXThe meaning of each symbol in the table is described below:
–– Q Scan: Quick Scan
–– Har: Harmonic Imaging
–– S-Har: S-Harmonic Imaging
–– ECG: Electro Cardio Graph Imaging
–– CM: Color M
–– TDI: Tissue Doppler
–– PD: Power Doppler
–– S-Flow: Directional Power Doppler Imaging
–– TDW: Tissue Doppler Wave
–– CW: Continuous Wave
XXMultiVision is only available in 2D/C Mode.

5-24
 Chapter 5 Probes

Using Ultrasound Gel

For successful acoustic signal transmission, please only use the ultrasound gels approved by
Samsung Medison.

WARNING:
XXThe use of inappropriate ultrasound gels could result in damage to the probe. Using
damaged probes may result in electric shocks and other hazards to the patients and/or
users.
XXDo not use ultrasound gels or coupling media that contain any of the following agents:
–– Oils such as mineral oil, cooking oil, gasoline, solvents, rust inhibitors, lanolin,
paraffin-based grease, ester, and excessive silicon-based release agents;
–– Alcohols, such as acetone, methanol, and plasticizer (dioctylphtalate), or denatured
alcohol;
–– Glacial acetic acid and iodine; or
–– All lotions or gels that contain aromatic substances

CAUTION:
XXWhen applying the ultrasonic gel to the probe, make sure that the tip of the gel tube does
not touch the surface of the probe lens.
XXThe tip of the gel tube may cause damage to the probe lens.

5-25
 User Manual

Gel Warmer (Option)

The Gel Warmer keeps the ultrasound gel warm. Warming up the ultrasound gel takes
approximately 5 minutes.

WARNING:
XXAlways turn the Gel Warmer off when it is not in use.
XXDo not put your hands inside the Gel Warmer, as it may burn your skin.

CAUTION:
XXDo not use the Gel Warmer for purposes other than to control the temperature of
ultrasound gel.
XXMake sure that no items such as the probe slip into the Gel Warmer.
XXDo not touch the power terminal of the Gel Warmer while you are examining a patient.
There is a risk of electric shock from leakage current.
XXDo not apply excessive force to the Gel Warmer, or you may damage its support parts.

[Figure 5.1 Gel Warmer Label – Example]

5-26
 Chapter 5 Probes

Using Sheaths
Sheaths are recommended for clinical applications of an invasive nature, including
intraoperative, transrectal, transvaginal, and biopsy procedures. Using a sheath prevents
contamination from blood or other bodily fluids during operations or biopsy.
Since Samsung Medison does not supply protective sheaths, users must select and apply
appropriate sheaths.

WARNING:
XXFor more information about sheaths, please contact the manufacturer.
XXAlways keep sheaths in a sterile state.
XXSheaths are disposable. Do not reuse them.
XXMake sure to clean and disinfect probes before each use.
XXCheck the exterior of a sheath before use. If a sheath is cut or contaminated, do not use it.
XXIn neurosurgical applications, a disinfected probe must be used with sterile gel and a
sterile pyrogen-free sheath.
XXIf a sheath is used on a patient with Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease during a neurosurgical
procedure, the probe that was used with it cannot be sterilized by any method whatsoever.
XXSome sheaths contain natural rubber latex and talc, which can cause allergic reactions in
some individuals. Please refer to the FDA Medical Alert released on March 29, 1991.

Applying Sheaths
1. Remove a sheath from the package, and fill it with ultrasound gel. Be sure to put on
sterilized surgical gloves.
2. Insert the probe into the sheath and pull the latex tip to cover the probe completely. If
possible, cover the probe cable as well.
3. Ensure that there are no air bubbles trapped within the ultrasound gel. If necessary,
secure the sheath to the probe and the probe cable.
4. Dispose of the sheath after use.

5-27
 User Manual

Probe Safety Precautions

The probe can easily be damaged by improper use or by coming into contact with certain
chemical substances. Always follow the instructions in the user manual to inspect the probe
cable, case and lens before and after each use.
Check the probe for cracks, broken parts, leaks and sharp edges. If there is any damage, stop
using the probe immediately and contact the Samsung Medison Customer Support Department.
Using damaged probes may result in electric shocks and other hazards to the patients and/or
users.

CAUTION:
XXThe user is responsible for cleaning, disinfecting, and sterilizing probes.
XXProbes are not sterilized at the time of shipment.
XXDo not apply mechanical shock to the probe.
XXIn case a probe is bumped against the ground or a hard surface, disconnect the probe
immediately from the console of the ultrasound system. If damaged, the electrical
insulation may cause an electrical shock.
XXDo not place the probe cable on the floor where the cable can be run over by equipment
wheels, etc. Do not apply excessive force to bend or pull the cable.
XXDo not immerse the probe into any inappropriate substances such as alcohol, bleach,
ammonium chloride, or hydrogen peroxide.
XXDo not expose the probe to temperatures of 50°C or higher.
XX3D and 4D probes may make a slight noise if they are used for a long time or if a certain
mode is in use.
XXProbes should be cleaned and disinfected prior to replacement or disposal.
XXAlways inspect the lenses, cables, and connectors after using probes. If damaged, stop
using them immediately.

5-28
 Chapter 5 Probes

Using and Infection Control of the Probe

The ultrasonographic image scanner uses ultrasound, and makes direct contact with the patient
when in use. Depending on the types of examinations, such contact can be made to a wide
variety of locations, including the ordinary skin or the location of blood transfusion during a
surgical procedure.
The most effective method of preventing infection among patients is to use each probe only
once. However, probes may need to be reused, as they are complex in design and expensive.
Consequently, the safety instructions must be followed carefully in order to minimize the risk of
infection among patients.

WARNING: No neurosurgical treatments or examinations should be carried out on a patient

with Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease. If the probe has been used on such a patient, it cannot be
sterilized by any method whatsoever.
If the probe or product is contaminated, dispose of it according to the local biohazardous
waste disposal procedures.

CAUTION: Sufficient washing and disinfecting must be carried out to prevent infection. This is
the responsibility of the user who manages and maintains the disinfection procedures for the
equipment. Always use legally approved cleaning solution and sheaths.

5-29
 User Manual

Risk of Electric Shock

Since a probe uses electrical energy, if it touches conductive materials, there are risks of injury,
such as electric shocks, to the patient or the user.

WARNING:
XXHave the system regularly inspected for electrical leakage by Samsung Medison’s
Customer Service Department.
XXDo not immerse the probe in liquid.
XXDo not touch the probe connectors or the connection pins on the product.
XXDo not drop the probe or apply mechanical shocks.
XXInspect the housing, strain relief, lens, and seal for damage, and check for any functional
problem before and after each use.
XXDo not apply excessive force to twist, pull or bend the probe cable.
XXThe power protection fuse protects the probe and the product from excess current. If the
power monitoring protection circuit detects excess current, it immediately shuts off the
current to the probe in order to prevent the overheating and to restrict the ultrasound
power output.
XXThe system limits the maximum temperature that a patient can contact to 43°C, and the
maximum output of ultrasound energy (AP&I) complies with US FDA regulations.

5-30
 Chapter 5 Probes

Cleaning and Disinfecting Probes

Probes must be cleaned and disinfected after each use. Cleaning is an important procedure that
must be carried out before disinfecting probes. For information on cleaning probes, please refer
to the relevant chapter. Using an inappropriate disinfectant may damage the probe.

WARNING:
XXAlways use protective face mask and gloves when cleaning and disinfecting probes.
XXAfter cleaning and disinfecting probes, inspect their housing, strain relief, lens, and seal for
damage, and check for any functional degradation.

Using an inappropriate cleaning or sterilizing agent may damage probes.

Information of Detergent, Disinfectant, and Ultrasound Gel

„„Classification of Disinfectants
To maintain the performance of ultrasound probes, proper maintenance is required.
As ultrasound probes are classified into critical, semi-critical or non-critical devices based
on the standards of FDA guidance* and the Hygiene Requirements for the Reprocessing of
Medical Devices from Germany guideline of Robert Koch Institute (RKI), proper cleaning
and disinfection or sterilization methods for that classification should be used.

Classification Criteria Contact Area Application Probe Level Selection

Convex, Linear
Non-critical device Intact skin array, and sector Low level disinfectant
transducers

Mucous membrane,
Semi-critical device Endocavity High level disinfectant
damaged skin

Blood, sterile High level disinfectant

Critical device Intraoperative, TEE
tissue, etc. or sterilization

* Guidance for Industry and FDA Staff - Information for Manufacturers Seeking Marketing
Clearance of Diagnostic Ultrasound Systems and Transducers - Appendix D
* It is recommended to use high level disinfectants only for endocavity probes.

5-31
 User Manual

An appropriate detergent, disinfectant, or ultrasound gel should be used for all probes.
Please use an appropriate detergent, disinfectant, or ultrasound gel by referring to the
Samsung Medison website and the User Guide. All probes have been tested in accordance
with IPX 7 Criteria.
XXUser Guide: A booklet is provided upon purchasing the product.
XXWebsite: http://www.samsunghealthcare.com
The following is information about the manufacturers (or Distributors) of detergents,
disinfectants, and ultrasound gels.

Product Manufacturer

Alkazyme Alkapharm UK Ltd.

Anioxyde 1000 Laboratoires Anios

Aquasonics 100 Parker laboratories, Inc.

Asepti-Wipes Ecolab

Asepti-Wipes II Ecolab

Bleach 5.25% –

CaviWipes Metrex

Cidex Advanced Sterilization Products

Cidex 2% Advanced Sterilization Products

Cidex OPA Advanced Sterilization Products

Cidex Plus Advanced Sterilization Products

Cidezyme Johnson & Johnson

Cleanisept Wipes Dr. Schumacher GmbH

Clear Image NEXT Medical Products

Enzol Johnson & Johnson

Ethanol 75% –

GE Ultrasound Contact Gel GE Accessories

Gigasept Schulke & Mayr GmbH

Gigasept AF Schulke & Mayr GmbH

Gigasept FF Schulke & Mayr GmbH

Hibitane Regent Medical

5-32
 Chapter 5 Probes

Product Manufacturer

Incidin Foam Ecolab

Isopropyl alcohol (70%) –

Isopropyl alcohol (80%) –

Kendall Tyco/Healthcare

Klenzyme Steris

McKesson McKesson Medical-Surgical Inc.

Metricide 14 Metrex

Metricide 28 Metrex

Metricide 30 Metrex

Metricide OPA Plus Metrex

Metricide Metrex

MetriWipes Metrex

Metrizyme Metrex

Milton Procter & Gamble

Natural Image Sonotech Inc.

Nuclean Alkapharm

Omnicide - FG2 Coventry Chemicals Limited

Omnicide 14NS Coventry Chemicals Limited

Omnicide (28) Coventry Chemicals Limited

PeraSafe ANTEC International Limited

Salvanios pH 7 Laboratoires Anios

Salvanios pH 10 Laboratoires Anios

Sani-Cloth Active PDI

Sani-Cloth AF Germicidal PDI

Sani-Cloth AF3 Germicidal PDI

Sani-Cloth Bleach Germicidal PDI

Sani-Cloth Germicidal PDI

Sani-Cloth HB PDI

5-33
 User Manual

Product Manufacturer

Sani-Cloth Plus PDI

Scan Parker laboratories, Inc.

Sekusept Extra Ecolab

Sekusept Plus Ecolab

Septiwipes Dr. Schumacher GmbH

Sonogel Sonogel Vertriebs GmbH

Sporox DSHealthcare Inc.

Sporox II DSHealthcare Inc.

Steranios 2% Laboratoires Anios

Ster-Bac Blu Ecolab

Super Sani-cloth PDI

Surfaces Hautes Laboratoires Anios

Transeptic spray Parker laboratories, Inc.

Tristel Duo Tristel Solutions Limited

Tristel Sporicidal Wipe Tristel Solutions Limited

Trophon Nanosonics Limited

T-Spray Pharmaceutical Innovations, Inc.

T-Spray II Pharmaceutical Innovations, Inc.

Virkon DuPont

Wavelength National Therapy Products Inc.

Wavicide-01 National Therapy Products Inc.

5-34
 Chapter 5 Probes

Cleaning Probes
Probes must be cleaned and disinfected after each use. Cleaning is an important procedure
that must be carried out before disinfecting probes.

CAUTION:
XXDo not use brushes when cleaning probes. Even the use of soft brushes can damage the
probe.
XXDuring cleaning and disinfection, keep the parts of the probe that must remain dry higher
than the other parts during wetting until all parts are dry.

1. Disconnect the probe from the system.

2. Remove the biopsy adapter or needle guide. Collect the reusable parts, reusable biopsy
adapter, or needle guide that need to be disinfected or sterilized, and discard the
disposable parts in the clinical waste bin. (For cleaning and disinfection/sterilization of the
reusable parts, please refer to the appropriate chapter.)
3. Remove and properly dispose of the medical sheath in the clinical waste bin. (Medical
sheaths are disposables.)
4. Use a soft cloth or appropriate cleaning sheet lightly dampened with clean water or a
cleaner to remove any foreign substances left on the probe, the edges, corners, and curved
parts of the probe and cables.
5. Thoroughly rinse with water to remove any loose particles, soap, and detergent residue (up
to the immersion point).
6. Wipe with a clean, dry, soft cloth.
7. If still wet, wipe with a clean water-dampened cloth, and again with a clean, dry, soft cloth.
8. Dispose of the used cloth in the clinical waste bin.

5-35
 User Manual

Disinfecting Probes
Probes must be cleaned and disinfected after each use. Disinfection of probes is an important
step that must be carried out.

NOTE: Disinfect to reduce pathogens to the level of 10-6.

„„Disinfecting the probe with a fluid disinfectant

Using an inappropriate disinfectant may damage the probe.

WARNING:
XXAlways use a protective face mask and gloves when disinfecting the probes.
XXInspect the housing, strain relief, lens and seal for damage, and check for any functional
degradation after disinfecting the probe.
XXNever use disinfectants after the expiration date.
XXThe type of tissue the probe will contact during use dictates the level of disinfection
required for a probe. Ensure that the solution strength and duration of contact are
appropriate for disinfection.

CAUTION:
XXFailing to use a recommended disinfectant or follow the recommended disinfection
method may damage and/or discolor the probe. This could also void the product warranty.
XXDo not immerse non-sterilizable probes in disinfectant for one hour or longer.
XXOnly use liquid solutions to sterilize probes. Do not sterilize by autoclaving or using EtO
gas.

5-36
 Chapter 5 Probes

1. Please refer to the user instructions of the disinfectant for details of proper storage,
use, and disposal of the disinfectant.
2. Mix a disinfectant appropriate for your probe according to the strength of the solution
specified in the disinfectant's user manual.
3. Immerse the probe into the disinfectant as shown in the illustration below.

[Figure 5.2 Disinfecting a Probe]

4. Follow the instructions on the disinfectant to complete the immersion procedure

for the probe and never leave the transducer immersed in the disinfectant solution
for longer than the maximum immersion duration. Rinse the probe with clean water
afterwards.
5. Air dry the probe and store it properly (e.g. in a sterile bag) to prevent any further
contamination.

5-37
 User Manual

„„Disinfecting the probe with a disinfection wipe

Using an inappropriate disinfection wipe may damage the probe.

WARNING:
XXAlways use a protective face mask and gloves when disinfecting the probes.
XXInspect the housing, strain relief, lens and seal for damage, and check for any functional
degradation after disinfecting the probe.
XXNever use disinfection wipes that have gone beyond their expiration date.
XXEnsure that the contact duration is appropriate for disinfection.

CAUTION: Using a non-recommended disinfection wipe or not following the recommended

disinfection method may damage and/or discolor the probe. This could also void the product
warranty.

1. For more information on the correct use, storage, and disposal of the holder, please
refer to the user instructions for the disinfection wipe.
2. Depending on the types of wipe, apply an active disinfectant to a dry wipe or use a
ready-to-use wet wipe containing disinfectant.
3. Use the disinfection wipe to apply the active disinfectant all over the surface of the
probe and ensure all areas are covered.
4. Discard the used disinfectant wipes as clinical waste. Do not re-use the disinfectant
wipes.
5. Air-dry the probe for the amount of time specified in the user instructions for the
disinfectant wipes and store the probe properly (e.g., in a sterile bag) to prevent any
further contamination.

5-38
 Chapter 5 Probes

„„Disinfecting the probe with a disinfection system

Using a non-approved probe/disinfection system combination may damage the probe.

WARNING:
XXAlways use protective eyewear and gloves when disinfecting probes.
XXInspect the housing, strain relief, lens and seal for damage, and check for any functional
problem after disinfecting the probe.
XXEnsure that the cycle duration is appropriate for the desired disinfection level.

CAUTION: Using a non-approved probe/disinfection system combination or not following the

recommended disinfection method can damage the probe. This could also void the probe
warranty.

1. Refer to the user instructions of the disinfection device for details of proper use,
storage and disposal of waste.
2. Place the probe head, a part of the cable and possible marker in the disinfection device,
following the user instructions of the disinfection device.
3. Start the desired disinfection process and wait until the end of the cycle.
4. Remove the probe and possible marker at the end of the cycle from the disinfection
device and store the probe properly (e.g. in a sterile bag), so that no new contamination
may appear.
5. Register the disinfection data for traceability according to local regulations.

5-39
 User Manual

MPTEE Probe
The Multi-Planar Transesophageal Echocardiography (MPTEE) probe is to be inserted into the
body.

How to Use MMPT3-7 Probe

1 2

3 4
[Figure 5.3 MMPT3-7 Probe Dials]

„„Lens Angle Adjustment

The lens angle can be adjusted to from 0° to 180° by pressing buttons 3 and 4. Button 3
rotates the lens angle counterclockwise. Button 4 rotates the lens angle clockwise.

„„Scan Head Tilting

Use dials 1 and 2. Rotate dial 1 clockwise to tilt the lens forward. Rotate the dial
counterclockwise to tilt the lens backward. Rotate dial 2 clockwise to tilt the lens
sideways.

[Figure 5.4 Scan Head Tilting]

5-40
 Chapter 5 Probes

„„Locked Mode
Makes the lens movement less natural than when left open, preventing movement of the
lens and head during use. If a red mark appears when you rotate the MMPT3-7 probe’s
silver handle, it means it is locked.

[Figure 5.5 Locked State]

5-41
 User Manual

Precautions for Using the Probe

DANGER: Do not use the product in a temperature outside the range of 25°C or lower and
42°C or higher. It may cause damage to the human body.

WARNING:
XXDo not transport the product while the MPTEE probe is placed in the probe holder. The
probe is not secured, and it may fall.
XXTo protect the patient and the probe, keep the probe in unlocked when you insert it.
XXThe image obtained with the TEE probe may differ from the image displayed on screen.
It is necessary to perform an inspection in advance to reduce the risk of difference in
images.
XXFamiliarize yourself with the use and safety instructions for the TEE probe completely
before using it.
XXOnly use the probe for its intended purpose of being inserted into the body.

When the temperature of the MPTEE probe reaches 41℃ or higher, the following warnings are
displayed:
XX41.0°C ≤ TEE Temperature < 42.0°C: Estimated surface temperature of xx.x°C.
XX42.0°C ≤ TEE Temperature < 42.5°C: Estimated surface temperature of xx.x°C. Please
reduce the power value.
XX42.5°C ≤ TEE Temperature < 43.0°C: Estimated surface temperature of xx.x°C. Please
reduce the power value. Near the thermal limit of 43.0°C.
XXTEE Temperature = 43.0°C: Surface Temperature Reached: Currently 43.0°C. The power
value has been automatically reduced.
XX43.0°C < TEE Temperature ≤ 50.0°C: Scan head temperature critical. The system has
stopped transmitting and returned to the Probe Selection dialog. When you reselect the
probe, please reduce the power value if necessary.
XX50.0°C < TEE Temperature or TEE Temperature < 5.0°C: Error condition detected. The
System has stopped transmit and returned to the Probe Selection Dialog. Please contact a
Service Representative.

5-42
 Chapter 5 Probes

For the MPTEE probe, the following warnings are displayed depending on the status of the
circuit:
XXShort circuit or open circuit: Error condition detected. The System has stopped transmit
and returned to the Probe Selection Dialog. Please contact a Service Representative.

CAUTION: The probe is intended to be inserted into the human body; always keep it clean.
Never place the probe on the floor.

NOTE:
XXWhen the probe is not in use, place it in the probe holder located on the left side of the
console. The probe holder on the right side is not suitable for the MPTEE probe.
XXIt is recommend to use pyrogen-free sheaths.

Maintenance
Proper cleaning and disinfection prevent infectious diseases. Please learn how to properly
clean and disinfect probes by referring to this user manual.

CAUTION: Do not allow the handle or the probe connector to come in contact with cleaners
or disinfectants. Clean the handle and the cable with a wet cloth; disinfect only the area
between, and including, the scan head at the end of the probe and the area marked as
100 cm.

„„Cleaning

CAUTION: Never clean the probe with methanol or ethanol. Doing so may cause serious
problems with the product.

1. Remove the parts that do not need to be cleaned, and clean the scan head and the
cable with a gauze soaked in non-irritant cleansing solution. Mix a non-irritant
cleaning agent in lukewarm water to prepare the cleansing solution; the recommended
water temperature is 26°C or lower.
2. Rinse the product with lukewarm water until the cleansing solution is completely
eliminated.

5-43
 User Manual

3. Air-dry it or use a soft cloth to remove moisture.

Cleaner Supplier Active Ingredient Concentration

Cidezyme/Enzol ASP J&J Proteolytic enzymes <5%

EMpower Metrex Proteolytic enzymes <2%

Hycolin Coventry Alkyldimethylbenzylammonium 1-10%

Chemicals chloride
Tetrasodium EDTA 1-10%
Alcohol ethoxylate 1-10%

Metrizyme Metrex Proteolytic enzymes <2%

Prolystica 2x Steris Ethanollamine 1-5%

conc. Enzymatic Protease 0.1-1%
Presoak & cleaner
Ethoxylated alcohol 1-5%
Polyalkylene glycol 1-5%
Glycerine 1-5%

T-spray Pharmaceutical N-alkyl-(C12-18)-n-N-dimethyl-N-

Innovations Inc. Benzyl-ammonium-chloride; Alkyl-
dimethyl-ethyl-benzyl-ammonium-
chloride

T-spray 2 Pharmaceutical Alkyl-dimethyl-benzyl-ammonium-

Innovations Inc. chloride; Octyl-decyl-dimethyl-
ammonium-chloride; Dioctyl-
dimethyl-ammonium-chloride;
Didecyl-dimethyl-ammonium-
chloride

5-44
 Chapter 5 Probes

„„Disinfection

WARNING: Do not use ethanol, iodine, steam, heat, or ethylene oxide for disinfection.

CAUTION:
XXDo not leave the probe in disinfectant solution for more than one hour.
XXThe probe must be rinsed immediately after disinfection.

When necessary, disinfect the MPTEE probe with a liquid disinfectant. Cidex, Cidex-OPA,
Metricide, Omnicide, and Giasept solutions are suitable for disinfecting the MPTEE probe.
For the preparation methods and required immersion periods of the different disinfectant
solutions, refer to the instructions provided by the manufacturers.
1. Immerse the clean and dry surface of the probe in the disinfectant solution. Immerse
only the portion of the probe between the scan head at the end of the probe and the
area marked as 100 cm.
2. Rinse away the disinfectant with water and dry the probe completely before storage.

Disinfectance Supplier Active Ingredient Concentration

Cidex ADS ASP J&J Gluteraldehyde 2.55%

Cidex Plus ASP J&J Gluteraldehyde 3.40%

Cidex OPA ASP J&J Ortho-phthaladehyde 0.55%

Gigasept AF Schulke und Mayr Didecyldimethylammoniumchloride 15%

Glycine, aminoalkyl derivs 6.9%
Tridecylpolyethylenglycoether 15-30%
N-(3-Aminopropyl)-N- <5%
dodecylpropane-1, 3-diamine

Gigasept FF Schulke und Mayr Formaldehyde 4.5%

Dimethoxytetrohydrofurane 3.2%
Succindialdehyde 4.5%

Korsolex extra Bode Chemie Gluteraldehyde 5-10%

Metricide Metrex Gluteraldehyde 2.60%

Metricide 28 Metrex Gluteraldehyde 2.50%

Metricide Plus 30 Metrex Gluteraldehyde 3.40%

5-45
 User Manual

Disinfectance Supplier Active Ingredient Concentration

Metricide OPA Metrex Ortho-phthaladehyde 0.60%

Plus

Omnicyde 14 N.S. Coventry Gluteraldehyde 2.60%

Chemicals

Omnicide 28 Coventry Gluteraldehyde 2.50%

Chemicals

Perasafe Dupont Sodium Perborate 40-60%

Sekusept Aktiv Ecolab Sodium Perborate monohydrate 30-50%

Critic Acid 15-20%
Fatty alcohol ethoxylate <5%

Steranios 2%, 2% Anios Gluteraldehyde 2.00%

N.G., 2% E.C.S.

TD100 & TD5 CS Medical Gluteraldehyde 2.65%

Totacide 28 Coventry Gluteraldehyde 2.00%

Chemicals

Virkon Dupont Potassium peroxymonosulphate <50%

5-46
 Chapter 5 Probes

Biopsy
A biopsy is an examination method that surgically extracts tissue from the patient for
examination. The probe and the biopsy kit are used together when conducting a biopsy with the
ultrasonographic image scanner.
The ultrasound imaging system shows the needle, which penetrates through the skin surface
and veins, along with the examined body part, minimizing the potential risks to the patient.

CAUTION:
XXUltrasonographic studies using a biopsy kit must be conducted by a physician or qualified,
experienced healthcare professional. Make sure that you comply with the preventive
safety measures and sterilization procedure in all environments.
XXDo not use the biopsy kit for purposes other than ultrasonographic studies such as human
anatomical dissection.
XXThe user will be responsible for using the biopsy kit for ultrasonographic studies.
XXPlease make sure to read the User Manual thoroughly.

5-47
 User Manual

Biopsy Kit Components

The biopsy kit consists of the adapter, needle guide, and needle. The components vary depending
on the probe type.

Needle
Guide

Needle

Biopsy Adapter

[Figure 5.6 Biopsy Kit Components]

XXAdapter: Prevents the needle guide from shaking by securing it to the probe tightly.
XXNeedle Guide: Guides the angle (direction) of the needle so that it may reach the biopsy
target accurately. It also secures the needle so that the needle does not waver.
XXNeedle: This is the needle that is inserted into the patient’s body. The biopsy kit supplied by
Samsung Medison does not contain a needle.
XXSheath: Prevents the probe and adapter from being contaminated by any unwanted
substances (blood or other bodily fluids) discharged during examinations.
XXUltrasound gel: Ensures the best quality images by filling the air space between the probe
and the sheath with the ultrasound gel.

5-48
 Chapter 5 Probes

Using Biopsy Kit

WARNING:
XXOnly use needles approved for use in your country.
XXVerify the condition of the biopsy needle before use. Do not use a bent biopsy needle.
XXThe needle and guide must be sterilized before use.
XXThe needle may bend while penetrating a tissue. Therefore, the precise location of the
needle must be checked by monitoring the echo generated from the needle.

CAUTION: For more information about conducting ultrasonographic studies using the biopsy
kit, please contact the biopsy kit manufacturer.

Before Using Biopsy Kit

WARNING:
XXBiopsy kits not supplied by Samsung Medison may not be compatible with the probes.
Always use biopsy kits supplied by Samsung Medison, since improper setup may adversely
affect the patient.
XXBe sure to read the instructions for installing a sheath and aligning the needle guide
thoroughly before performing a biopsy.
XXAlways ensure that the probe and the needle guide are secured on both the left and the
right sides.

5-49
 User Manual

Biopsy Procedure
The system generates a needle guideline through the displayed real-time ultrasound images
to indicate the anticipated path of the needle. Use this guideline to ensure that the needle or
other instrument follows the correct path.
1. Ready the patient according to the procedure appropriate for the examination objectives.
2. Install the sheath and the biopsy kit.
3. Set the system controls for the biopsy procedure. If necessary, apply acoustic gel to the
patient.
4. Scan the patient. Adjust the patient so that the location for examination fits into the
needle guideline on the screen.
5. Insert the needle into the needle guide. Perform the puncture by sliding the needle
through the groove in the guide until the needle intercepts the target.
To prevent the needle from shaking, press down on the top of the needle guide with your
index finger during examinations.
6. When the examination site is reached, take the needle out of the needle guide.
7. Detach the needle guide, adapter, and sheath from the probe.
8. Dispose of the components that are not designed for reuse.

CAUTION:
XXDispose of non-reusable components according to infectious waste regulations.
XXSterilize reusable components before disposing of them.

5-50
 Chapter 5 Probes

Needle Guide Alignment

Alignment of the needle guide displayed on the system is for the purpose of verifying
whether the needle and the needle guide are properly installed. This must be done prior to
biopsy. If the needle fails to follow an accurate path while verifying the alignment of needle
guide, stop using the product and contact Samsung Medison Customer Support Department.
Reverberation or other tissue artifacts may produce false needle images on the screen.
Ensure the needle path is along the guideline and that you are not using a false needle image
to locate the needle.

WARNING:
XXThe needle used for alignment verification must not be used for the actual procedure.
Always use a sterile needle for each biopsy procedure.
XXTo assist in accurate projection of the needle, use a straight, new needle for each
alignment procedure.
XXThe needle guideline only displays the projected path of the needle. Since the default line
may be different from the actual line, the actual location of the needle must be checked
by monitoring the echo from the needle.

1. Attach the biopsy kit.

2. Set the system depth for the procedure to be performed and select the Biopsy menu.
3. Immerse the probe into the water bath, and insert the needle into the needle guide.
4. Confirm that the needle image is on the needle guidelines. If it is, then the needle guide is
properly aligned.
5. If the needle image displayed on the screen is out of the needle guideline, check the
needle guide or the probe adapter, etc.

5-51
 User Manual

Assembling the Biopsy Kit

Stainless Steel Biopsy Kit

1. Place a sheath up to the top of the probe’s handle.

2. Mount the adapter onto the probe. If the surface of probe is fluted, mount the adapter in
accordance with it.

3. Insert the needle into the needle guide and start the exam.

5-52
 Chapter 5 Probes

Plastic Biopsy Kit

1. Mount the adapter on the probe.

2. Cover the adapter and probe completely with the sheath.

3. Install the needle guide onto the adapter.

5-53
 User Manual

4. Install the Needle Guide Clip if it is included in the components.

5. Insert the needle into the needle guide and start the exam.

Using Multi Angle

Tips!
Use the angle adjuster.

5-54
 Chapter 5 Probes

Biopsy Specifications
Biopsy
Probe Adapter Reusable/ Needle Multi Angle
Model Name Components
Material Disposable Gauge Depth

Biopsy Adapter Reusable

14, 15, 16,
Utra-Pro II Acetal 17, 18, 20, 1.5, 2.5, 4
LA4-18BD BP-KIT-069 Needle Guides Copolymer Disposable 21, 22, 23, (cm)
& CIV-Flex 8.5FR
Cover

Biopsy Adapter Reusable

14, 15, 16,
Utra-Pro II Acetal 17, 18, 20, 4, 5.5, 7
LA2-9A BP-KIT-043 Needle Guides Copolymer Disposable 21, 22, 23, (cm)
& CIV-Flex 8.5FR
Cover

Biopsy Adapter Reusable 0.591,

BP-KIT-053 Acetal 16, 18, 20,
LA3-14AD Needle Guide & 0.984, 1.575
[BP-KIT-053-NG] Copolymer Disposable 22
Probe Cover (in)

Biopsy Adapter Reusable 0.591,

BP-KIT-068 Acetal 16, 18, 20,
0.984, 1.575
[BP-KIT-068-NG] Needle Guide & Copolymer 22
Disposable (in)
Probe Cover
LA3-16A
Biopsy Adapter Reusable 0.591,
BP-KIT-055 Acetal 16, 18, 20,
Needle Guide & 0.984, 1.575
[BP-KIT-055-NG] Copolymer Disposable 22
Probe Cover (in)

Biopsy Adapter Reusable 1.969, 3.937,

BP-KIT-058 Acetal 14, 16, 18,
CA1-7AD Needle Guide & 5.906, 7.874
[BP-KIT-058-NG] Copolymer Disposable 20, 22, 25
Probe Cover (in)

Biopsy Adapter Reusable 2.362,

BP-KIT-054 Acetal 16, 18, 22,
CA2-9AD Needle Guide & 3.150, 3.937
[BP-KIT-054-NG] Copolymer Disposable 25
Probe Cover (in)

Single
BP-KIT-065 Needle Guide Stainless Reusable 16–18
Angle 2°
EA2-11B
Single
BP-KIT-066 Needle Guide Abs Disposable 16–18
Angle 2°

5-55
 User Manual

Biopsy
Probe Adapter Reusable/ Needle Multi Angle
Model Name Components
Material Disposable Gauge Depth

Single
BP-KIT-024-3 Needle Guide Stainless Reusable 16
Angle 1°
ER4-9
Single
BP-KIT-061 Needle Guide Abs Disposable 16–18
Angle 1°

Biopsy Adapter Reusable

BP-KIT-059 Acetal 14, 16, 18, 1.969, 3.937
CV1-8AD Needle Guide &
[BP-KIT-059-NG] Copolymer Disposable 20, 22, 25 (in)
Probe Cover

BP-KIT-029 Needle Guide Stainless Reusable 18 –

V5-9 Single
BP-KIT-060 Needle Guide ABS Disposable 16–18
Angle 1.8°

Acetal
BP-KIT-079 Needle Guide Disposable 16–18 2°
Copolymer

BP-KIT-080 Needle Guide Stainless Reusable 16–18 2°

EA2-11AR
Acetal
BP-KIT-081 Needle Guide Disposable 16–18 1°
Copolymer

BP-KIT-082 Needle Guide Stainless Reusable 16–18 1°

5-56
 Chapter 5 Probes

Cleaning and Disinfecting Biopsy Kits

Reusable biopsy adapters must be cleaned and disinfected after each use. Disposable biopsy
adapters and disposable biopsy kit parts must be disposed of as medical waste after each use.
Cleaning is an important procedure that must be carried out before disinfecting or sterilizing
reusable biopsy adapters. Read the biopsy kit user manual carefully before cleaning and
disinfecting.

WARNING: Always wear a protective face mask and gloves when cleaning and disinfecting
biopsy kits.

CAUTION: Disinfect to reduce pathogens to the level of 10-6.

Cleaning Biopsy Kits

1. After use, remove the biopsy kit from the probe.
2. Disassemble the biopsy kit into its component parts and discard the disposable parts in
the medical waste bin.
3. Rinse with water to remove excess dust from the device.
4. Prepare an enzymatic solution (e.g. Enzol), following the manufacturer‘s instructions for
proper dilution and immersion duration. Immerse the parts in the detergent and allow
soaking for the prescribed time.
5. Brush the parts thoroughly using a soft bristle brush. Clean the inside using an
appropriate sized brush. If any visible parts remain, continue brushing until clean.
6. Rinse the device thoroughly with water and dry the components. Dispose of the used
drying cloths appropriately according to the local medical waste regulations.

5-57
 User Manual

Disinfecting Biopsy Kits

For the correct use, storage, and disposal of the disinfectant, please refer to the user manual
for the disinfectant.

CAUTION:
XXAlways refer to the biopsy kit user manual for the latest information on the supported
methods and disinfectants.
XXA stainless steel biopsy adapter is reusable; a plastic biopsy adapter may be reusable in
some cases. In general, a plastic biopsy needle guide is disposable.
XXPlastic biopsy kits can only be disinfected by using a chemically compatible cold-
disinfectant, either manually or with a medical washer-disinfector. Do not use an
autoclave, gas or radiation.

1. Re-assemble the reusable parts of the biopsy adapter, if applicable.

2. Disinfect the biopsy adapter for the duration and at the temperature as specified in the
user instructions for the adapter.
3. After disinfection, follow the proper post-disinfection procedure for the disinfection
method used (Please refer to the user manuals for the disinfectant, disinfecting
equipment, etc.).
4. Inspect the components for damage such as cracks, rust, or breakage; and if damage
is found, stop using the device and contact Samsung Medison’s Customer Support
Department.
5. Properly pack up the disinfected adapter and label it according to local regulations.

Sterilizing Stainless Steel Biopsy Kits

1. Reassemble the reusable parts of the stainless steel biopsy adapter, if applicable.
2. Sterilize the stainless steel adapter by using steam (autoclave) or gas (Ethylene Oxide).
3. After sterilization, follow the proper post-sterilization procedure for the sterilization
method used (Please refer to the user manual for the sterilization equipment).
4. Inspect the components for damage such as cracks, rust, or breakage; and if damage
is found, stop using the device and contact Samsung Medison’s Customer Support
Department.
5. Properly pack up the sterilized adapter and label it according to local regulations.

5-58
Chapter 6 Starting Modes of
Operation

‹‹System Power.......................................... 6-3

Turning the Power On............................................. 6-3
Shutting Down the System.................................... 6-4

‹‹Probes and Applications......................... 6-5

Selecting Probes and Applications...................... 6-6
Creating UserPreset............................................... 6-6
Modifying UserPreset............................................. 6-6
Deleting UserPreset............................................... 6-6

‹‹Patient Information.................................6-7
Patient Information for Each Application..........6-11
Searching Patient Information........................... 6-18
 Chapter 6 Starting Modes of Operation

System Power
Boot up the system for use.

CAUTION:
XXInstallation and initial operation of the product must be performed by trained
professionals only.
XXAvoid pressing buttons on the control panel or make sure that none of the buttons are
being pressed while the system is booting, and connect the probe and all the peripheral
devices to be used before powering up the system.
XXIf you attempt to connect them while the system is in use, it may lead to patient injury or
irreparable damage to the product.

NOTE: Please read the safety information before using this product.

Turning the Power On

Press the On/Off button when the power is off. Booting begins, and the product logo appears on
the screen. When booting is completed, the 2D mode screen appears in End Exam status.

CAUTION: Before starting the diagnosis, you must register the patient information.

NOTE:
XXThe product should turn on about 10 seconds after the power switch at the back of the
product is turned on.
XXDuring system booting, do not press any key on the keyboard. It may cause product
malfunction.
XXIf you turn on the power after turning it off suddenly, the system may turn on and off
momentarily. This is one of the characteristics of the Intel PC main board, not a system
error.

6-3
 User Manual

Shutting Down the System

Press the On/Off button while using the system to initiate shutdown.

CAUTION:
XXWhen the system is not turned off, holding down the On/Off button for five seconds or
longer forces the product to power off.
XXIf the ultrasound system is unplugged while working or turned off by forcibly shutting
down, the files may get corrupted and it may result in system down or data loss.
XXTo ensure that the product is safely cut off from electrical power, set the power switch at
the rear of the product to Off position after using the product.

NOTE: Once turned off, please wait at least 15 seconds before turning back on.

6-4
 Chapter 6 Starting Modes of Operation

Probes and Applications

Before scanning, select a probe and an application.

CAUTION: Refer to ‘Chapter 5. Probes’ for more information on probes and applications
supported by the system.

Probe Selection Screen

Press the Probe button on the Touchscreen to load the Probe Selection screen. In this screen,
you can select/change probe or application you want to use and change the probe presets.
The Probe Selection screen is divided into four lists.
1 Probe list: Displays a list of probes currently connected to the system.
2 Application list: Displays a list of applications the selected probe supports.
3 Preset list: Displays a list of presets the selected application supports.
4 UserPreset list: Displays a list of presets you can configure according to your preferences.

1 2

[Figure 6.1 Probe Selection]

6-5
 User Manual

Selecting Probes and Applications

The selected probe, preset, or userpreset appear in the screen area of the monitor screen.
1. Select the items in the following order: Probe → Application → Preset/UserPreset.
2. When you select Preset/UserPreset, the system automatically applies your selections and
switches to Operation mode.
3. Press the Probe button to cancel.

Creating UserPreset
1. Tap + on the touchscreen to create a UserPreset.
2. The Preset Setup window will open.
3. Enter the name you want to use and tap Save. Tap Close to cancel.

Modifying UserPreset
1. Enter the Preset Setup by tapping Preset Setup on the touchscreen.
2. Select a Preset to rename and press Rename.
3. The Preset Setup window will open.
4. In the Preset Setup window, enter a new Preset name and press Save. To cancel it, tap Close.

Deleting UserPreset
1. Enter the Preset Setup by tapping Preset Setup on the touchscreen.
2. Select a Preset to delete and press Delete.
3. The Preset Setup window will open.
4. Tap Delete to delete the UserPreset. Tap Close to cancel it.

6-6
 Chapter 6 Starting Modes of Operation

Patient Information
Press the Patient button on the control panel and the Patient Information screen will appear.
In this screen, you can enter, search, or change patient information. Patient information
includes basic information such as the patient ID, name, DOB, and gender, as well as additional
information for applications.

NOTE: ID is required information.

Basic Patient Information Entry

Enter or change general patient information in General Information.
Use the trackball to move the pointer to the desired entry field. Tap a button on the
touchscreen to enter information using the touchscreen.
When you are done entering information, click OK on the screen or tap OK on the touchscreen
to save. Click Cancel or tap Cancel on the touchscreen to cancel.

6-7
 User Manual

[Figure 6.2 General Patient Information]

[Figure 6.3 General Patient Information – Touchscreen]

6-8
 Chapter 6 Starting Modes of Operation

„„Patient ID
Enter a patient ID.

„„Last Name
Enter the patient’s last name.

„„First Name
Enter the patient’s first name.

„„Middle Name
Enter the patient’s middle name.

NOTE: The name that you have entered will appear in the title area and reports.

„„Date of Birth (Age)

Enter the patient’s date of birth in the specified format.

„„Gender
Select the patient’s gender.

„„Accession Number
When viewing the worklist for a patient via the DICOM server, this information is
automatically displayed in the appropriate fields.

„„Diag. Physician
Enter the name of the physician who diagnosed the patient.

„„Ref. Physician
Enter the name of the referring physician.

„„Operator
Enter the name of the operator who scanned the patient. Up to 20 persons may be entered.

6-9
 User Manual

„„Search
Search through the information stored in the system.

„„Worklist
Perform a search by connecting to the DICOM Modality Worklist server in the hospital
network.

„„New Patient
Enter new patient information.

„„Auto ID Creation
Create temporary patient information using a temporary ID.

„„Keyboard
Use the keyboard displayed on the touchscreen to enter text.

„„Start EZ‑Exam+
This function helps you to link an exam with EZ‑Exam+ when the exam starts.

„„DICOM Destination
Sends the saved images to the DICOM server when an exam ends. Select DICOM
destination and press the Set button. You can choose a location from Group 1 to Group 10,
and change the group name as well.

„„RIS Browser
Moves you to a Web Browser.

CAUTION:
XXPlease contact a service engineer for more information about the RIS Browser URL
settings.
XXSamsung Medison shall not be responsible for any damage to the product if you have used
RIS Browser for anything other than its intended purposes (e.g., accessing inappropriate
websites).

6-10
 Chapter 6 Starting Modes of Operation

Patient Information for Each Application

In Study Information, enter additional patient information or change the existing patient
information for each application.
1. Use Application on the monitor to select an application.
2. Enter additional information required for diagnosis.

OB
Select OB from Application. Enter the additional obstetrical information.

„„LMP
Enter the last menstrual period for a patient.

„„DOC
Indicates the patient’s date of conception.

„„EDD
Indicates the patient’s expected date of delivery.

„„GA (LMP)
Indicates the gestational age of a patient.

„„Ovulation Date
Enter expected ovulation date in accordance with defined format

„„Day of Cycle
Enter length of menstrual cycle in days (Date).

6-11
 User Manual

„„Fetuses No.
Enter the number of fetuses. Up to four may be entered.

„„Gravida
Enter the number of pregnancies.

„„Para
Enter the number of deliveries.

„„Aborta
Enter the number of miscarriages.

„„Ectopic
Enter the number of ectopic pregnancies.

„„Description
Enter a description of the diagnosis.

NOTE:
XXRefer to ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’ Setup > System > Patient > User Defined List.
XXUp to 20 persons may be entered per application.

[Figure 6.4 Study Information – OB]

6-12
 Chapter 6 Starting Modes of Operation

GYN
Select GYN from Application. Enter additional information for Gyn. This is the same
information as for OB.

[Figure 6.5 Study Information – GYN]

Urology
Select Urology from Application. Enter urological information.

„„PSA
Enter the Prostate Specific Antigen (PSA) value.

„„PPSA Coefficient 1
Enter predicted PSA coefficient 1.

„„PPSA Coefficient 2
Enter predicted PSA coefficient 2.

[Figure 6.6 Study Information – Urology]

6-13
 User Manual

Vascular
Select Vascular from Application. Enter vascular-related information.

„„Left Systole
Enter left systole blood pressure.

„„Left Diastole
Enter left diastole blood pressure.

„„Right Systole
Enter right systole blood pressure.

„„Right Diastole
Enter right diastole blood pressure.

[Figure 6.7 Study Information – Vascular]

6-14
 Chapter 6 Starting Modes of Operation

Abdomen
Select Abdomen from Application.

[Figure 6.8 Study Information – Abdomen]

„„Height
Enter the patient’s height. Enter height in cm, ft, or in.

„„Weight
Enter the patient’s weight. Enter weight in kg, lb, or oz.

MSK
Select MSK from Application.

[Figure 6.9 Study Information – MSK]

6-15
 User Manual

Pediatric
Select Pediatric from Application.

[Figure 6.10 Study Information – Pediatric]

Small Parts
Select Small Parts from Application.

[Figure 6.11 Study Information – Small Parts]

6-16
 Chapter 6 Starting Modes of Operation

Cardiac
Select Cardiac in Application.

[Figure 6.12 Study Information – Cardiac]

„„Height
Enter the patient’s height in cm, ft and in.

„„Weight
Enter the patient’s body weight in kg, lb and oz.

„„BSA
When the height and weight are entered, the BSA (Body Surface Area) is automatically
calculated and displayed.

6-17
 User Manual

Searching Patient Information

Search
Search through the information stored in the system.

[Figure 6.13 Search]

1. When a search term is entered in the search field, the list of patients who match the
criteria will be displayed. Click the Search By button to search patients by condition.
2. Double click a list where a desirable patient list is selected. The selected patient
information will be applied to the system.

„„Show/Hide
Show/Hide buttons or lists in the search area.

„„Search by
User can enter a search criteria.

6-18
 Chapter 6 Starting Modes of Operation

„„Exam List
Show the exam list for a patient selected from the patient list.

[Figure 6.14 Exam List]

„„Back to Search
Return to the search area.

6-19
 User Manual

„„Review Images
Show the image of a selected exam on Review Images screen.

1
2 4 5
3

[Figure 6.15 Review Images]

1 Continue Exam: This is activated when an exam that is less than 24 hours old is
selected. The page moves to 2D image screen of the selected exam.
2 Hide Annotation: Hide any annotations made to an image.
3 View Scale: Set the image size for review. Select either the Small, Mid, or Large buttons.
4 Favorite: Add/remove a selected image from Favorites.
5 Select/Deselect All: Select/deselect all images regardless of the exam date.

6-20
 Chapter 6 Starting Modes of Operation

„„SonoView
You can review a selected exam from SonoView.

„„Review Exam
The exams that were performed more than 24 hours before present, and their images,
are displayed. When an exam is selected, the button is activated. When enabled, you can
continue to view the exam images.

„„Continue Exam
Exams that were performed more than 24 hours ago can be edited. When an exam is
selected, the button is activated. You can use this button to go to the edit exam page.

„„EzCompare
Press this button to view dual image of a selected exam image and a live scan image
currently filming.

„„Send
Send images to the DICOM server.

„„Delete
Delete the exam.

6-21
 User Manual

Worklist Search
Perform a search by connecting to the DICOM Modality Worklist server in the hospital
network.

NOTE: A worklist search is available only when DICOM is enabled. You can select the worklist
server in Setup > Connectivity > DICOM. Refer to the ‘DICOM Settings’ section of ‘Chapter 3.
Utilities’

1. Select Worklist from Patient on the monitor or touchscreen.

2. After entering at least one item out of Patient ID, Last Name, Worklist Number (Accession
Number), Procedure ID, Exam Date, and/or name of the equipment being used for exam
(AE Title), click Search. The list of patients who match the criteria will be displayed.

XXClicking items such as Date/Time or Patient Name sorts entries into alphabetical or
Tips! numerical order for the selected criteria.
XXSelect Today, Last Week, Last Month, or Manual as Exam Date.
XXAfter running a search, the date of the last update is displayed in the bottom right corner.

3. Double click on the desired patient list. This applies the selected patient information to
the system.

[Figure 6.16 Search – Worklist]

6-22
Chapter 7 Modes of
Operation

‹‹Information...............................................7-3
Types of Modes.........................................................7-3
Basic Use....................................................................7-5

‹‹Basic Mode................................................7-8
2D Mode.................................................................... 7-8
S-Detect.................................................................. 7-24
M Mode................................................................... 7-34
Color Doppler Mode...............................................7-37
Power Doppler Mode............................................ 7-42
PW Spectral Doppler Mode.................................. 7-44
CW Spectral Doppler Mode.................................. 7-50
TDI Mode................................................................. 7-52
TDW Mode............................................................... 7-53
ElastoScan Mode................................................... 7-54

‹‹Combined Mode......................................7-62
2D/C/PW Mode...................................................... 7-62
2D/PD/PW Mode.................................................... 7-62
2D/C/CW Mode...................................................... 7-62
2D/C/M Mode......................................................... 7-62
2D/TDI/TDW Mode................................................ 7-63
Dual Live Mode...................................................... 7-63
Chapter 7
‹‹Multi-Image Mode................................. 7-64
Dual Mode............................................................... 7-64
Quad Mode............................................................. 7-65

‹‹3D/4D Mode........................................... 7-66

3D Stand By.............................................................7-74
3D View – MPR........................................................7-78
Orientation Dot...................................................... 7-88
Render Setup.......................................................... 7-88
VOCAL...................................................................... 7-92
3D XI........................................................................ 7-99
XI VOCAL............................................................... 7-109
XI STIC..................................................................... 7-116
3D MXI....................................................................7-120
Realistic Vue.......................................................... 7-131
Crystal Vue............................................................7-132
Chroma...................................................................7-134
Preset.....................................................................7-135
5D NT......................................................................7-136
5D Follicle..............................................................7-139
5D Heart Color......................................................7-142
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Information

Types of Modes
This product supports a variety of Operation modes including Basic Mode, Combined Mode,
Multi-Image Mode, and 3D/4D Mode.
XXBasic Mode: Consists of different modes, each of which has a specific usage and function.
By default, 2D Mode is applied together with another mode.
XXCombined Mode: For an image, two or three Basic Modes are applied at the same time.
By default, 2D Mode is applied together with another mode. An image is viewed in a single
screen.
XXMulti-Image Mode: The screen is divided into two (dual) or four (quad) sub screens, each of
which is used to view an image. Since each sub screen can display a different image, it can be
a very useful feature, allowing multilateral views of an organ.
XX3D/4D Mode: 3D and 4D images can be obtained.

7-3
 User Manual

The types of Operation mode that are available with the product are shown below:

Mode Type

2D Mode
Color Doppler Mode
Power Doppler Mode
M Mode
Basic Mode PW Spectral Doppler Mode
CW Spectral Doppler Mode
TDI (Tissue Doppler Imaging) Mode
TDW (Tissue Doppler Wave) Mode
ElastoScan Mode

2D/C/PW Mode
2D/PD/PW Mode
2D/C/CW Mode
Combined Mode 2D/PD/CW Mode
2D/C/M Mode
2D/TDI/TDW Mode
Dual Live Mode

Dual Mode
Multi-Image Mode
Quad Mode

Freehand 3D Mode
3D/4D Mode 3D Mode
4D Mode

NOTE: The functionalities for each mode may be restricted by the selected probe.

7-4
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Basic Use
The items that are commonly used in each Operation mode are shown below:

Using the Control Panel

The items that can be used in each Operation mode are provided as menu items. You can
change the image format or optimize an image to facilitate your diagnosis.

„„Gain
Use the dial-button on the control panel. The Gain button appears differently depending
on the Operation mode, but it is usually in the form of a dial-button used to select an
Operation mode.
You can adjust the brightness of an image. If you rotate the Gain dial-button clockwise, its
value increases.

„„TGC (Time Gain Compensation)

Tap the TGC button on the touchscreen to open the TGC window for use.
In general, ultrasound penetration gets weaker with depth. TGC can be used to
compensate for this effect.
The product provides eight TGC sliders for varying depths, allowing you to adjust Gain by
area. Among the eight sliders, the top slider represents the shallowest area, while the
lower sliders represent the deeper ones.
Move the slider to the right to increase Gain, brightening the image.
When the TGC preset is selected, the TGC preset is applied to the system and then the
system is switched to Operation mode. The user can adjust TGC as needed, and press Save
to save it for use.

„„Focus
Use the Focus switch on the control panel to adjust the location of the focus.

„„Depth
Use the Depth switch on the control panel to adjust the image scanning depth.
The allowable range for adjustment varies depending on the probe type.

7-5
 User Manual

„„Zoom
Use the Zoom dial-button on the control panel.
You can magnify an image. An image can be magnified by either Read Zoom or Write Zoom.
XXRead Zoom: This function is used for zooming in on images that are stored on the hard
disk.
1. Rotate the Zoom dial-button on the control panel.
2. Adjust the position of the zoomed-in screen with the trackball.
3. Observe the magnified image.
XXWrite Zoom: This function allows you to magnify and scan an image in real time.
1. Press the Zoom dial-button on the control panel. The Write Zoom box will appear on
the screen.
2. Use the Change button to move and resize the Zoom box.
3. To finish Zoom mode, press the Zoom dial-button once again. Or press the Exit
button on the control panel.

„„Quick Scan
Use the Q Scan button on the control panel. The ‘Q Scan’ mark will appear at the top of
an image.
In 2D Mode, it is used to optimize the contrast and brightness of an image by adjusting
Gain and TGC automatically. In PW Spectral Doppler Mode, it is used to optimize the
spectrum by adjusting Scale and Baseline automatically.
To finish QuickScan mode, press the Exit button on the control panel.

NOTE: The Quick Scan function is available in all probes' applications.

7-6
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Using Touchscreen Menus

The items that can be used in each Operation mode are provided as touchscreen menu items.
You can change the image format or optimize an image to facilitate your diagnosis.
1. In Operation modes, the menu for the Operation mode currently being used is displayed
on the touchscreen.
In a combined mode that uses more than one Operation mode, tap the relevant tab on the
touchscreen to specify settings for each mode.
2. Select a value by pressing a button or by rotating the dial-button on the control panel.

7-7
 User Manual

Basic Mode

2D Mode
This basic mode, also referred to as B Mode (Brightness mode), provides scan planes of organs.
This is used to display two-dimensional anatomy images in the direction of scanning in real time.

Entering 2D Mode
Press the 2D dial-button on the control panel. If you press the 2D dial-button in other
Operation modes, it will switch to the basic 2D Mode.

NOTE: Because 2D Mode is applied by default for all Operation modes, it cannot be
terminated.

2D Mode Menu

[Figure 7.1 2D Mode – Touchscreen]

7-8
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Harmonic
Turn this function on or off by tapping Harmonic on the touchscreen. The image
information will show the ‘Har’ mark . This product provides the OHI (Optimal Harmonic
Imaging) high frequency function to optimize images.

NOTE: The Harmonic function only works with certain probes.

„„Frequency
Tap Frequency on the touchscreen. This enables you to configure the probe’s frequency.
The selected frequency is displayed in the image area of the monitor, allowing you to
easily determine the state of the current frequency.
XXRes2 (Resolution): The highest frequency
XXRes1 (Resolution): High frequency
XXGen (General): General frequency
XXPen1 (Penetration): Low frequency
XXPen2 (Penetration): The lowest frequency

„„Line Density
Tap Line Density on the touchscreen. Set the scan line density. Select Low, Med, or High by
tapping the button.
Selecting High increases the number of scan lines and improves the image resolution.
However, the frame rate is reduced.

„„L/R Flip (Left/Right Flip)

Tap L/R Flip on the touchscreen.
Pressing this button flips the image horizontally (Left/Right Flip). The direction marker on
the top of the image indicates the orientation of the current image.

7-9
 User Manual

„„S-Harmonic
Turn this function on or off by tapping S-Harmonic on the touchscreen. The ‘S-HAR’ mark
will be displayed in the Image Information.
Tap the S-Harmonic button on the touchscreen. S-Harmonic inverts the pulses to sharpen
the displayed image. If it is On, the phrase ‘S-Harmonic’ will be shown in the image
information.

NOTE:
XXThe Harmonic and S-Harmonic functions are only available for specific probes.
XXS-Harmonic function may show lines in the near field of certain probes when non-scan
mode is used. This is due to the technical features that improve the sensitivity and
resolution of the ultrasound images and does not cause any problems in scan mode.

„„ClearVision
Tap ClearVision on the touchscreen. When turned on, ClearVision removes noise from the
image and enhances outlines to help show the image more clearly. The ‘ClearVision’ mark
will be displayed in the Image Information.
Tap the touchscreen button to select an Index from 1 to 5. Select Off to turn off the feature.

„„HQ Vision
Press HQ Vision on the touchscreen to turn it on or off. The HQ Vision mark will be
displayed in the Image Information. HQ Vision improves the definition and quality of
images.
Select an Index using the button on the touchscreen.

NOTE:
XXHQ Vision is an optional feature of the HS60/XH60.
XXHQ Vision is available in 2D Mode and 2D/C Mode, and also in Write Zoom state.

7-10
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Biopsy Guide
Tap Biopsy Guide on the touchscreen.

NOTE: Make sure to adjust the biopsy guideline before using the biopsy feature.

[Figure 7.2 Biopsy Guide]

Setting the Biopsy Guideline

Tips!

NOTE:
XXIf the system is rebooted, the biopsy guideline settings are restored to
the default.
XXMake sure to adjust the biopsy guideline before using the biopsy feature.

XXSupport for Multiple Guidelines

If the probe supports multiple biopsy angles, the user may select the biopsy guide angle
as desired.
XXStarting and Finishing a Biopsy
1. Tap Biopsy Guide on the touchscreen.
2. Insert the needle along the guideline. And then perform the biopsy as desired.
3. When all procedures are complete, tap Biopsy Guide again to turn this Off. Biopsy will
end.

7-11
 User Manual

Biopsy Guide Edit Mode

Tips!

NOTE:
XXOnly available in 2D mode and Single mode.
XXNot available in Dual Live or Freeze state.
XXNot available in Write Zoom or Read Zoom state.

XXStarting and Ending Biopsy Guide Edit Mode

1. Tap Biopsy Guide on the touchscreen.
2. Use the Angle dial-button on the control panel to enter Biopsy Guide Edit mode.
3. When you enter Biopsy Guide Edit mode, Angle Offset appears.
4. Rotate the Angle dial-button to select Angle Offset or Lateral Offset.
–– Angle Offset: This is the angle for the currently selected biopsy guide; the
maximum adjustable offset is the guideline’s outer line angle. Adjustments can be
made in 0.1° increments.
–– Lateral Offset: This is the lateral direction for the currently selected biopsy guide.
Adjustments can be made in 0.1 mm increments.
5. Press the Angle dial-button to exit Biopsy Guide Edit mode.

„„U/D Flip (Up/Down Flip)

Tap U/D Flip on the touchscreen.
Each press of the button flips the image vertically.

„„Dual Live
Tap Dual Live on the touchscreen and select On or Off.
View the 2D/Color Doppler images of the scanned area simultaneously in real time.
When viewing Cine images in Dual Live mode, various settings are applied only to the Cine
image on the right side, allowing you to compare it with the unaffected Cine image on the
left side.

7-12
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„MultiVision
Tap MultiVision on the touchscreen. MultiVision uses a multi-beam to improve the image
quality displayed on the screen. When this feature is turned on, the ‘MultiVision’
mark will be displayed in the image information. Tap the button on the touchscreen to
set MultiVision to Low, Med, or High. Note that MultiVision can only be set to Low in 2D/C
Mode. Select Off to turn off the feature.

NOTE: This feature only works with certain probes. For more information, refer to ‘Probe List’
in ‘Chapter 5. Probes’.

„„Trapezoid
Tap Trapezoidal on the touchscreen to turn it on or off.
The rectangular frame provided by a Linear Probe is changed to a trapezoidal shape. This
allows a wider view of an image.

NOTE: Trapezoid function only works with Linear probes.

„„2D NT
You can use the ROI box to measure the NT more easily.
Press the 2D NT button on the touchscreen to select On or Off.
Press the Switch button to adjust the size of the ROI box, and then use the trackball to
move the ROI box.
At a desired position, press the Set button on the control panel to display the
measurement value on the left side of the screen.
If you want to measure a different location after an initial measurement, press the Set
button on the control panel to finish the current measurement and then press the Set
button again.
Press the Reset button on the touchscreen to remeasure the NT.
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen or press it on the control panel, or press the 2D
button on the control panel to exit 2D NT.

7-13
 User Manual

NOTE:
XX2D NT is enabled under the following conditions:
–– 2D Freeze Mode
–– Measurement Item: OB
XXWhile conducting 2D NT, changing the image, such as by using Zoom, is not possible.
XXThe 2D NT measurements will be saved and displayed in the report.

CAUTION: The measurement value may have a margin of error of ±5%.

„„Rotation
Tap Rotation on the touchscreen to rotate a 2D image. Select a rotation angle to among
0°, 90°, 180°, and 270°.

„„ElastoScan
Tap ElastoScan on the touchscreen. For more information, please refer to ‘ElastoScan
Mode’ in this chapter.

NOTE:
XXElastoScan is an optional feature of this product.
XXThis feature only works with certain probes. For more information, refer to ‘Probe List’ in
‘Chapter 5. Probes’.

„„Panoramic
Tap Panoramic on the touchscreen. For more information, please refer to ‘Panoramic’ in
this chapter.

NOTE:
XXPanoramic is an optional feature of this product.
XXThis feature only works with certain probes. For more information, refer to ‘Probe List’ in
‘Chapter 5. Probes’.

7-14
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„NeedleMate+
Tap NeedleMate+ on the touchscreen. NeedleMate+ is a feature that helps visualize the
biopsy needle clearly in an ultrasound image. Choose the direction to optimize the image
between From Left and From Right. Select Off to turn off the feature.

From Left From Right

From the upper left to lower right or From the upper right to lower left or
Description
from the lower right to upper left. from the lower left to upper right.

Select this if the needle is being Select this if the needle is being
inserted from the upper left to lower inserted from the upper right to lower
Purpose
right or from the lower right to upper left or from the lower left to upper
left. right.

When turned on, Needle Enhance and Needle Angle are enabled.

NOTE:
XXNeedleMate+ is an optional feature of this product.
XXThis feature only works with certain probes. For more information, refer to ‘Probe List’ in
‘Chapter 5. Probes’.

„„Needle Enhance
This feature only works when NeedleMate+ is on. Select 1, 2, 3, or 4 by tapping the button
on the touchscreen to select the degree of needle enhancement.
XX1: The needle is thin with weak enhancement.
XX2: The needle is thin with strong enhancement.
XX3: The needle is thick with weak enhancement.
XX4: The needle is thick with strong enhancement.

„„Needle Angle
Sets the entry angle of the biopsy needle in images. Tap this button on the touchscreen to
select Shallow, Medium, or Steep.

7-15
 User Manual

„„DR (Dynamic Range)

Select a value from 30 to 256 by using the DR dial-button on the touchscreen. TheDynamic
Range function adjusts contrast by changing the ratio of the minimum and maximum
values of the input signals. When this value increases, the image is displayed more
smoothly.

„„Frame Average
Tap the Frame Average dial-button on the touchscreen. Select a value from 0 to 9 by using
the dial-button on the touchscreen. Use this to minimize the appearance of speckles in
updated images when the same location is scanned repeatedly.

„„Focus Number
Change the number of focus points at the target location you wish to study. Select a value
from 1 to 4 by using the dial-button on the touchscreen.

„„Reject
Use the Reject dial-button on the touchscreen to select a value from 0 to 30. This function
is used to eliminate noise or low level echo for clearer signals.

„„Image Size
Select a value from 70 to 100 by tapping the Image Size button on the touchscreen.
Used to specify 2D image size.

„„Gray Map
Select a value from 1 to 12 by tapping the Gray Map dial-button on the touchscreen.
This changes the 2D Post Curve.

„„Chroma Map
Use the Chroma Map dial-button on the touchscreen to select either Off or a value from
1 to 11.

7-16
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Edge Enhance
Allows you to view more accurate images of organ or tissue boundaries. A higher value
provides more accurate images of boundaries.
Select a value from -3 to 3 by tapping the touchscreen button or using the Soft Menu dial-
button on the control panel.

„„Power
Use the Power dial-button on the touchscreen to select a value from 2 to 100 for the power
of the ultrasound output.

„„Scan Area
Use the Scan Area dial-button on the touchscreen to select a value from 40 to 100 as the
image width (%). Increasing the image width reduces the frame rate. You may also press
the Change button on the control panel to change the trackball state to ROI Size and then
use the trackball to adjust the view area.

„„Steer Angle
You can adjust the angle of the ultrasound beam without moving the probe by using the
Steer Angle dial-button.

NOTE: The Steer function only appears on the soft menu when a linear probe is used.

„„Free Angle Plane

You can adjust the ScanHead of the 3D probe to a desired angle by using the dial-button.

7-17
 User Manual

CEUS+
This mode is used for imaging the contrasting effect within blood vessels by infusing an
ultrasound contrast agent.

NOTE:
XXCEUS+ is supported in all countries except the USA.
XXCEUS+ is an optional feature of HS60/XH60.

[Figure 7.3 CEUS+ – Touchscreen]

Tap CEUS+ on the touchscreen to select on or off. When ‘On’ is selected, the touchscreen is
switched to the CEUS+ screen.

CEUS+ Mode
Tips!
XXCEUS stands for Contrast Enhanced Ultrasound, and aids the diagnosis by enhancing the
contrast on the ultrasound image.
XXWhen entering CEUS+ mode, Dual mode is displayed by default.
XXFunctions such as Harmonic and S-Harmonic are not available.

7-18
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Timer 1/Timer 2
Starts or resets the timer.
Press the button to start the timer. When the button is re-tapped, the timer stops and the
time is reset. If you don’t tap the button again, the timer will keep running even when the
CEUS+ On/Off state is changed.

„„Dual Live
Tap Dual Live on the touchscreen and select On or Off. When ‘On’ is selected, Dual Live
mode is activated to display both Contrast and 2D images side-by-side. When ‘Off’ is
selected, Single mode is activated.

„„Ref. Line
This option displays the Ref. Line on an image. Select On or Off by tapping Ref. Line on the
touchscreen. The Ref. Line in CEUS+ mode is used to indicate the same location on the
Agent and Tissue images in Dual Live mode.

„„Contrast
Select a CEUS+ type. Tap the button on the touchscreen to select either Contrast or 2D.
XXContrast: It displays contrast-applied images.
XX2D: Displays image in 2D Mode.

„„Flash
Tap the button on the touchscreen and select On or Off. For the defined frames in Frame,
brighter images are produced.

„„Flash Frame
Set a value from 3 to 100 frames to specify the period of time during which the Flash
function will operate.

„„MI Control
Select a value for the mechanical index by tapping the touchscreen button or by using the
Soft Menu dial-button on the control panel.

7-19
 User Manual

„„Frame Average
Frame Avg averages the present image and the previous image when an image is updated.
Select a value from 0 to 9 by tapping the touchscreen button or using the Soft Menu dial-
button on the control panel.

„„Reject
This function reduces noises or echoes from an image in order to make the image clearer.
Select a value from 0 to 30 by tapping a button on the touchscreen or using the dial-
button.

„„Cine Play
Play or stop Cine images.

„„Trim Start
After specifying the position of the first frame by rotating the dial-button or using the
trackball, tap the dial-button to save it.

„„Trim End
After specifying the position of the last frame by rotating the dial-button or using the
trackball, press the dial-button to save it.

„„Cine Speed
Rotate the dial-button to adjust the auto playback speed.

„„Frame Limit
Select the total frame rate. Press the button on the touchscreen or use the Soft Menu dial-
button on the control panel to select a value from 2 to the maximum frame rate for the
current scan mode.

NOTE: For more information on other touchscreen items, refer to the ‘2D Mode’. (The setting
values may vary depending on the selected probe type, application, and other settings.)

7-20
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Panoramic
Panoramic Imaging is the function that acquires images over a wider range by using
continuous ultrasonographic images. Up to 1,000 frames can be used.

NOTE: This feature only works with certain probes. For more information, refer to ‘Probe List’
in ‘Chapter 5. Probes’.

„„Acquiring a Panoramic Image

1. Tap Panoramic on the touchscreen. The touchscreen will be switched to the Panoramic
Ready screen.
2. Tap Start/Stop on the touchscreen. The system will begin to acquire a panoramic
image.
3. Press Start/Stop to finish acquiring the panoramic image. The touchscreen will switch
to the Panoramic Review screen.

Things to remember when acquiring a Panoramic image

Tips!
XXWhen scanning a curved surface, ensure that the scan surface and the contact surface of
the probe are always at right angles.
XXMoving in the opposite direction while acquiring an image erases the previously saved
frames and saves new frames.
XXThe image quality may deteriorate if the contact surface of the probe loses contact with
the scan surface.
XXIf the scan speed is fast or the angle of the contact surface of the probe changes, artifacts
may occur.

7-21
 User Manual

„„Reviewing a Panoramic Image

NOTE: L/R Flip, U/D Flip, and Zoom are available only when the Layout is set to Full Screen.

[Figure 7.4 Panoramic Review – Touchscreen]

XXL/R Flip: Flip the panoramic image horizontally.

XXU/D Flip: Flip the panoramic image vertically.
XXRuler: Press this button to turn this option on or off. When turned on, a ruler is
displayed on the panoramic image.
XXLayout: Specify how the panoramic image will be displayed on the screen.
–– Full Screen: Display the panoramic image in full screen mode.
–– Up/Down: Display the 2D and panoramic images at the top and bottom of the
screen, respectively.
–– Side by side: Display the 2D and panoramic images on the left and right of the
screen, respectively.
XXReturn: Return to the Panoramic Ready screen.
XXTap the Panoramic button again on the touchscreen to exit Panoramic Imaging.

7-22
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

BiometryAssist
This obstetric diagnosis function helps you measure fetal growth indices (Measurement
items: BPD, HC, AC, and FL).

NOTE: BiometryAssist can only be executed in 2D Mode.

„„Executing BiometryAssist
When selecting BPD, HC, AC, or FL in 2D Mode, position the Caliper on the section of the
screen that appears to correspond to the measurement position. Then the measured
value will be displayed on the screen. Press the Set button to confirm the measured value
displayed on the screen.
Follow the BiometryAssist Operation Guideline to determine measurement positions
more accurately.

BiometryAssist Operation Guideline

Tips!
XXPosition the target at the center of the screen using Image Panning, not Rotation or Left/
Right Flip.
XXTo determine measurement positions more easily, resize the target using Image Size or
Zoom so that it takes up 40% to 80% of the screen, and then take a measurement.

NOTE: You can configure the relevant settings in Setup > Measurement > Additional Options.
XXSelect a measurement item from BPD, HC, AC, and FL to display the selected item on the
screen.
XXThe measurement standard for the BPD Method can be set to either Outer-Inner or
Outer-Outer.

7-23
 User Manual

S-Detect
S-Detect for Breast is the function to help ultrasound breast exams. It includes functionalities
for selecting a lesion, dividing the area of a lesion, describing the characteristics of a lesion, and
recommending the benignity and malignity of a lesion, which assist in the diagnosis process.

NOTE:
XXS-Detect for Breast is an optional feature of HS60/XH60.
XXS-Detect for Breast is not supported in Canada.

Run S-Detect for Breast

Acquire an image in 2D Mode and press the Freeze button on the control panel. Press
S-Detect on the touchscreen to open S-Detect for Breast.

„„S-Detect for Breast Execution Conditions

To execute S-Detect for Breast, the following conditions need to be met:
XXPreset: Breast
XXOperation mode: 2D (Freeze state)
XXImage Mode: Single Mode
XXPatient information has been entered

Cases when S-Detect for Breast Cannot be Executed

Tips!
S-Detect for Breast cannot be executed in the following cases:
XXZoom is currently on;
XXYou have panned the image (2D Image Panning).

7-24
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

S-Detect for Breast Screen

The S-Detect for Breast screen is divided into the following four areas:

1 3

[Figure 7.5 S-Detect for Breast]

1 Ultrasound image area

Shows the study image that has been acquired in 2D Mode.
2 Position information area
This displays information about the position of the test area and lesion size. The user
can manually enter Position and Left/Right before or after taking measurements; Depth,
Height, Width, and Area are automatically calculated when the contour of the lesion is
extracted.
XXPosition: Use the mouse to drag the point located in the center of the coordinates and
specify the location on the breast from which the image has been acquired.
XXLeft/Right: Choose the left or right breast.
XXDistance: Shows the distance from the center of the breast.
XXAngle: Shows the clockwise angle from the center of the breast.
XXDepth: Shows the depth from the skin surface to the location of the lesion.
XXWidth: Shows the horizontal length of the lesion.
XXHeight: Shows the vertical length of the lesion.
XXArea: Shows the area of the lesion.

7-25
 User Manual

3 BI-RADS® Lexicon Classification Area

This area provides the BI-RADS® Lexicon Classification for the lesion finally selected by the
user. The auto determination result is displayed in blue and text will appear in yellow with
an asterisk (*) if the user modifies the classification result.
4 BI-RADS® Assessment Category Score
S-Detect for Breast recommends the benignity or malignity of the lesion selected by the
user; the user makes a final decision on the BI-RADS® Assessment Category Score.
Based on the determined BI-RADS® Assessment Category Score, S-Detect for Breast
provides the call text.

Call Text
Tips!
You can choose not to display the call text on the screen to protect the patient. For more
information, refer to Setup > Imaging > S-Detect in ‘Chapter 3. Utilities.’

S-Detect for Breast Measurement

Use either Target Point or Target Ellipse to specify the area of the suspected lesion. Use the
trackball and Set button on the control panel.

NOTE: Target Point and Target Ellipse are not supported in China.

„„Target Point
Analyze the area of the suspected lesion based on the point specified by the user.

„„Target Ellipse
Analyze the area of the suspected lesion based on the ellipse specified by the user. The
ellipse size can be adjusted by using the convert button on the control panel.

„„Manual Contour
Analyze the area of the suspected lesion by arbitrarily selecting a point.

7-26
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Hide Contour
Turns On or Off Hide Contour button on the touchscreen. When On is selected, the user
defined area is not displayed on the screen.

„„Distance
Shows the length of a specific area that is included in the study image.

„„Annotation
You can enter text in the study image.

„„Initialize
Reset all results and re-specify the Seed Point or Seed Ellipse.

„„Point Edit Contour

Modifies the area of the suspected lesion based on the point specified by the user.

„„Line Edit Contour

Modifies the area of the suspected lesion based on the line specified by the user.

NOTE: Length and annotation may be used before and after extracting the contour of the
lesion.

7-27
 User Manual

S-Detect for Breast Analysis

„„Extracting the Area of the Lesion

The contour of the area of the suspected lesion is extracted and up to 6 candidates are
shown on the touchscreen. Each image shows the Shape, Orientation, and Risk of the
lesion. The user may select one of the candidates as the final area of the lesion.

NOTE: The area of the lesion is extracted differently depending on the Seed Point or Seed
Ellipse entered by the user; in some circumstances, no area of lesion may be extracted.

[Figure 7.6 S-Detect – Extracting Suspected Lesion]

7-28
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Classification (BI-RADS® Lexicon Classification)

The area of the lesion selected by the user is analyzed and then the analysis items are
displayed. Two types, BIRADS® 2003 and BIRADS® 2013, are provided, and each item is
divided as follows:

Lexicon Classification Description Note

Shape Oval, Round, Irregular

Orientation Parallel, Not Parallel

Circumscribed, Indistinct, Angular,

Margin
Microlobulated, Spiculated

Lesion
Abrupt Interface, Echogenic Halo
Boundary

Posterior No Posterior Findings, Enhancement,

Feature Shadowing, Combined Pattern

Anechoic, Hyperechoic, Complex

BIRADS® Echo Pattern
Echogenicity, Hypoechoic, Isoechoic
2003
Macrocalcifications, Micro. Out of Mass,
Calcification
Micro. In Mass

Duct Changes, Cooper Ligament Chg.,

Surrounding
Edema, Architectural Distortion, Skin
Tissue
Thickening, Skin Retraction Recommended
None, In Lesion, Adjacent To Lesion, Functions Excluded
Vascularity
Diffuse Vascularity

Clustered Microcysts, Complicated Cyst,

Special Case Mass in or on Skin, Foreign Body, Intrama.
Lymph Node, Axillay Lymph Node

7-29
 User Manual

Lexicon Classification Description Note

Shape Oval, Round, Irregular

Orientation Parallel, Not Parallel

Circumscribed, Not Circumscribed,

Margin Indistinct, Angular, Microlobulated,
Spiculated

Posterior No Posterior Features, Enhancement,

Feature Shadowing, Combined Pattern

Anechoic, Hyperechoic, Complex cystic

Echo Pattern and solid, Hypoechoic, Isoechoic,
Heterogeneous
BIRADS®
2013 Calcification In Mass, Outside Of Mass, Intraductal

Architectural Distortion, Duct Changes,

Skin Thickening, Skin Retraction, Edema,
Associated
Vascularity, Absent, Internal Vascularity,
Features
Vessels In Rim, Elasticity Assessment, Soft,
Intermediate, Hard Recommended
Functions Excluded
Clustered Microcysts, Complicated
Cyst, Mass in or on Skin, Foreign Body +
Implants, Intrama. Lymph Nodes, Axillay
Special Cases
Lymph Nodes, Simple Cyst, Vascular
Abnormalities, AVMs, Mondor Disease,
Post-surg. Fluid Coll., Fat Necrosis

7-30
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„BI-RADS® Assessment Category Score

Recommends the benignity or malignity of the area of the lesion selected by the user.
When the user selects a BI-RADS® Assessment Category Score, call text is provided
accordingly.

BI-RADS® Assessment
Description
Category Score

0 Analysis not possible (Unknown)

1 Negative
Possibility of
2 Benign
Benignancy
3 Probably benign

4a Low suspicion of Malignancy

4b Intermediate suspicion of malignancy

Possibility of
4c Moderate concern, but not classic for malignancy
Malignancy
5 Highly suggestive of malignancy

6 Known biopsy – proven malignancy

NOTE:
XXClassification items and BI-RADS® Score functionality may be applied differently in
certain regions.
XXIn the USA, Lexicon Classification is supported by an automatic recommendation feature
for the Shape and Orientation items, which can also be directly entered by the user. The
other items under Lexicon Classification and the Assessment Category Score must be
entered by users only.
XXIn the United States, Canada, and China, the recommendation feature for the benignity or
malignancy of a lesion is not supported.

Modification of BI-RADS® Lexicon Classification and BI-RADS® Assessment Category Score

Tips!
The user may manually modify the BI-RADS® Lexicon Classification items and the BI-RADS®
Assessment Category Score.
XXModification of BI-RADS® Lexicon Classification
Select the title of each item on the monitor screen. Or press Classification on the
touchscreen and select Classification for the item.
XXModification of BI-RADS® Assessment Category Score
The BI-RADS Assessment Category Score at the bottom of the monitor is changed. When
the Category Score is changed, the verdict also changes accordingly.

7-31
 User Manual

S-Detect for Breast Sensitivity Setting

This allows users to adjust the sensitivity and specificity levels for lesion analysis. This option
can be selected in Setup > Imaging > S-Detect > S-Detect for Breast > Sensitivity Setting.
XXHigh Sensitivity: Increases the chance of detecting malignancy as its sensitivity is higher
than that of the default mode (High Accuracy).
XXHigh Accuracy: This is the default mode. It can distinguish between benignity and
malignancy more accurately than the High Sensitivity and High Specificity modes.
XXHigh Specificity: Increases the chance of detecting benignity as its specificity is higher
than that of the default mode (High Accuracy).

NOTE: The Sensitivity Setting is not supported in the USA, Canada, and China.

Displaying S-Detect for Breast Reports

Once the area of the lesion selected by the user has been analyzed, press Assign on the
touchscreen. Then, the analysis result is displayed as a patient report.
The S-Detect for Breast analysis result is categorized as an S-Detect for Breast Report, which
is a separate category in the report; the information included in the report is as follows:
XXPatient Information: The patient information entered by the user when the exam began
XXPosition Information: Position, Distance, Angle, Depth, Height, Width, Area
XXBI-RADS® Lexicon Version Information
XXBI-RADS® Lexicon Classification
XXBI-RADS® Score
XXS-Detect for Breast Screen Image

NOTE:
XXWhen displaying a report, the S-Detect for Breast screen image is automatically
displayed. Once the area of the lesion selected by the user has been analyzed, press
Assign on the touchscreen to display up to 10 reports (5 on the left and 5 on the right).
XXIn each image, you can enter the location information (Left/Right) and description.

7-32
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

[Figure 7.7 S-Detect for Breast Report]

Closing S-Detect for Breast

Press the Close button on the touchscreen to exit S-Detect. You may also exit S-Detect by
disabling Freeze or by pressing the 2D Mode button on the control panel.

7-33
 User Manual

M Mode
The M Mode is used to specify an observation area in a 2D image with the M Line, and display
changes over time.
This mode is appropriate for the observation of organs with a lot of movement, such as
cardiac valves. The 2D Mode image is also shown, allowing the marking and adjustment of an
observation area within the entire image.

[Figure 7.8 M Mode – Touchscreen]

7-34
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Entering & Exiting M Mode

„„Entering M Mode
1. Press the M dial-button on the control panel.
2. Configure settings relating to M image acquisition on the touchscreen.
3. Press the M dial-button again to enter M Mode and display the M image on the screen.

„„Exiting M Mode
Press the M dial-button while the M image is being displayed. You can also press the 2D
dial-button to exit M Mode.

M Mode Screen

„„M Line
Use the trackball on the control panel to move the line to the right or left. The M Line
indicates the relative position of the M Mode image in the 2D image. Therefore, you can
move the M Line to change the observation area.

M Mode Menu

„„Anatomical M
Tap the Anatomical M dial-button on the touchscreen to turn it on or off. If it is ‘On’,
position and angle of AMM Line can be adjusted.
XXAMM Angle: Use the touchscreen dial-button to rotate the cursor line for Anatomical M.
You can select an angle from 0 to 179.

NOTE: Available only with the phased array probe or the cardiac application.

7-35
 User Manual

„„Sweep Speed
Tap Sweep Speed on the touchscreen. Allows the user to adjust the sweep speed so that
he can view various spectrums in a screen.

„„Display Format
Tap Display Format on the touchscreen. Select either Up/Down, Side by Side, or M Only
using the touchscreen button.

„„Display Size
Size can be selected among 30/70, 40/60, 50/50, 60/40 and 70/30 by pressing a
corresponding button on the touchscreen. This option is not enabled if Display Format is
set to M Only.

„„M Mode Map

Used to configure the post curve in M. Select a value from 1 to 12 by using the dial-button.

„„Steer Angle
Adjust the angle of the ultrasound beam. Steered M line can be selected by rotating Steer
Angle dial-button.

NOTE: The Steer function appears on the soft menu only when a linear probe is used.

NOTE: For more information on other soft menu options and functions, refer to the ‘2D Mode’
section.

7-36
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Color Doppler Mode

This mode displays the colored blood flow pattern of the ROI (Region of Interest) within the 2D
image.
It is appropriate for examining the presence of blood flow, its average speed, and its direction.
The 2D Mode image is also shown, allowing the marking and adjustment of the ROI within the
entire image.

[Figure 7.9 Color Doppler Mode – Touchscreen]

Entering & Exiting C Mode

Press the Color dial-button on the control panel. Press this button again to exit Color Doppler
mode and return to 2D mode.

7-37
 User Manual

C Mode Screen

„„ROI Box
ROI stands for Region of Interest. The ROI Box outlines the area of the 2D image where
color (blood flow) information is displayed in Color Doppler Mode.
Use the Change button to reposition or resize the ROI box. Each time you press the Change
button, the current state of the ROI box is displayed in the lower middle of the screen.
XXROI Position: In this state, the position of the ROI box can be changed. Use the trackball
to move and position the ROI Box.
XXROI Size: In this state, the size of the ROI box can be changed. Use the trackball to move
the ROI Box and specify its size.

„„Color Bar
In Color Doppler mode, the color bar indicates the direction and speed of blood flow. Based
on the Baseline at the middle, red indicates the direction and speed of blood flow toward
the probe. By contrast, the blue color indicates the direction and speed of blood flow away
from the probe.
Adjusting the color bar baseline: Use the Baseline dial-button on the touchscreen. If you
rotate the Baseline dial-button clockwise, the baseline on the color bar rises.

C Mode Menu

„„Hide Color
Select C mode to use. If you tap Hide Color on the touchscreen, the Color mode image will
not be displayed in the Color ROI area, and only the B mode image will be displayed. Tap
this button again to cancel the selection and return to Color + B/W mode.

„„Frequency
Tap Frequency on the touchscreen. This enables you to configure the probe’s frequency.
The selected frequency is displayed in the title area, allowing you to determine the state of
the current frequency easily.

7-38
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Line Density
Select the density of the scan line. Select Low, Med, or High by tapping the button on the
touchscreen or using the dial-button.
Selecting High increases the number of scan lines and improves the image resolution.
However, the frame rate is reduced.

„„Invert
Tap Invert on the touchscreen. The color bar is inverted each time this button is tapped.
When the color bar is inverted, the color displayed on the image is also inverted.

„„Vel + Var
Tap Vel + Var on the touchscreen to turn it on or off. It expresses the blood flow velocity in
green on the Color Bar. Vel and Var stand for Velocity and Variance respectively.

NOTE: Vel + Var feature is available in the following applications and presets:
XXCardiac - Adult Echo, Ped Echo, Arotic Arch
XXOB - Fetal Heart
XXVascular - Carotid, Arterial, Venous

„„TDI
Change to TDI mode. TDI stands for Tissue Doppler Imaging.

NOTE:
XXThis can only be used when the cardiac application is selected in Phased Array Probe.
XXFor more information on TDI, refer to ‘TDI Mode’.

„„Auto Gain
Tap Auto Gain on the touchscreen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, the brightness of an
image will be adjusted automatically.

NOTE: Auto Gain is applied only when the mode is live for the Carotid and Arterial presets of
the linear probe.

7-39
 User Manual

„„Steer Invert
Tap Steer Invert on the touchscreen. Pressing the button inverts the angle of the ROI.

NOTE: Steer Invert is only enabled when using a linear probe.

„„Scale
Use by rotating the Scale dial-button on the touchscreen. Rotating Scale dial-button
clockwise increases the scale, extending the range of blood flow speed. Rotating the dial-
button in the counter-clockwise decreases the scale, displaying a narrower range of blood
flow speed.

„„Sensitivity
It enhances sensitivity and accuracy or frame rate of color images. Adjust the Sensitivity
value from 0 to 5 by using the Sensitivity dial-button on the touchscreen.

„„Filter
Select Filter on the touchscreen or use the dial-button on the control panel to select a
value from 1 to 4.
This is an electric filter to remove the low-frequency doppler signals generated by the
movement of blood vessel walls. Adjust the Cutoff Frequency to remove doppler signals
whose frequency is lower than the cutoff frequency.

„„Baseline
Rotating the dial-button clockwise increases the Baseline. In Color Doppler mode, the
color bar indicates the direction and speed of blood flow. Based on the Baseline at the
middle, red indicates the direction and speed of blood flow toward the probe. By contrast,
the blue color indicates the direction and speed of blood flow away from the probe.

7-40
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Color Map
Used to configure the post curve in a color image. Select a value from 1 to 12 by using the
Color Map dial-button on the touchscreen. This can help to display blood flow with greater
clarity.

„„Steer Angle
Adjust the angle of the ultrasound beam. Loss of color information resulting from the
angle of the ultrasound beam is minimized. You can adjust the angle of the ultrasound
beam by using the Steer Angle dial-button on the touchscreen.

NOTE: The Steer function only appears on the soft menu when a linear probe is used.

„„Balance
Select a balance value from 0 to 16 by using the Balance dial-button on the touchscreen.
The range of a color image is adjusted by comparing the gray levels of 2D images with
the doppler signal values of color images. When the Balance value increases, the color
image also appears in the part where the gray level of a 2D image is high (the bright part),
increasing the range of the color image.

„„Smoothing (Spatial Filter)

Select a smoothing value from 0 to 5 by using the Smoothing dial-button. This allows
smoother display of color images.

NOTE: For more information on other touchscreen items, refer to the ‘2D Mode’. (Different
values can be selected.)

„„Alpha Blending
Superimposes a color image over a 2D image in the color image area.

7-41
 User Manual

Power Doppler Mode

This mode displays the color intensity of blood flow within the ROI in the 2D image.
It is appropriate for examining the presence and amount of blood flow. The 2D Mode image is
also shown, allowing the marking and adjustment of the ROI within the entire image.

[Figure 7.10 Power Doppler Mode – Touchscreen]

Entering & Exiting PD Mode

Press the PD button on the control panel to enter PD mode. Press this button again. PD Mode
will be terminated and the mode will switch to 2D.

7-42
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

PD Mode Screen

„„Color Bar
In PD mode, the color bar displayed varies depending on the Power Doppler mode display
method that is in use. The color bar indicates the presence of blood flow and its amount.
The top of the color bar is the brightest section, where the amount of blood flow is at its
highest.

„„ROI Box
The ROI (Region of Interest) outlines the area of the 2D image where color (blood flow)
information is displayed in Power Doppler Mode.

PD Mode Menu

„„S-Flow
Tap S-Flow on the touchscreen. The direction of the blood flow will be displayed.

„„Auto Gain
Tap Auto Gain on the touchscreen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, the brightness of an
image will be adjusted automatically.

NOTE: Auto Gain is applied only when the mode is in live for the Carotid and Arterial presets
of the linear probe.

NOTE: The description of touchscreen menu items is the same as for 'Color Doppler Mode'.

„„DR
Shows the difference between the maximum volume and minimum volume that can be
played for each image.

7-43
 User Manual

PW Spectral Doppler Mode

PW stands for Pulse Wave. This mode displays the blood flow speed at a specific blood vessel
location within a specific time frame. Distance (depth) information can also be obtained by
transmitting pulses over particular time frames.
This mode is useful for measuring low-speed blood flow, such as in the abdomen and peripheral
vessels. The 2D Mode image is also shown, allowing the marking and adjustment of an
observation area within the entire image.

[Figure 7.11 PW Spectral Doppler Mode – Touchscreen]

Entering & Exiting PW Spectral Doppler Mode

„„Entering PW Spectral Doppler Mode

1. Press the PW button on the control panel to enter PW Spectral Doppler Mode.
2. Configure settings relating to Doppler image acquisition on the touchscreen.
3. Press the PW dial-button again to enter PW Spectral Doppler Mode and display the
Doppler image on the screen.

7-44
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Exiting PW Spectral Doppler Mode

Press the PW dial-button while the Doppler image is being displayed. You can also press
the 2D dial-button to exit PW Spectral Doppler Mode.
Press the Set button on the control panel to acquire a spectral doppler image.

NOTE: The doppler image can only be obtained in the D Only or Simultaneous states.

„„PW Spectral Doppler Mode Screen Sample Volume

The doppler spectrum is displayed when the Sample Volume is located above the blood
flow on the 2D image. The size of the Sample Volume is displayed in mm units. Use the
trackball to adjust the position of the Sample Volume.
XXMoving Sample Volume: Use the trackball on the control panel.
XXResizing Sample Volume: Using the touchscreen: Select the SV Size dial-button on the
touchscreen.
XXAdjusting Sample Volume Angle: Rotate the Angle dial-button on the control panel to
select a value from -80 to 80 degrees. Press the Angle dial-button to select either -60,
0, or 60 degrees.

„„Adjusting Doppler Baseline

Adjust the Baseline by rotating the dial-button on the touchscreen.

7-45
 User Manual

„„HPRF (High PRF) Function

Adjust the blood flow above the speed limit at a specific depth. The scale is increased; this
can only be used in PW Spectral Doppler mode (D Only).

NOTE: Setup > Imaging > Common > HPRF

XXActivating HPRF
Increasing the scale at a specific depth to a certain point automatically activates HPRF.
The Phantom Gate will appear on the D Line at a position higher than the sample
volume. Once HPRF starts, PRF does not increase even if you increase the scale value.
XXFinishing HPRF
While HPRF is in use, decrease the scale value by one step to finish HPRF. Here, the PRF
value becomes the maximum value in the current PW Spectral Doppler mode.
XXMoving Sample Volume
To move the Sample Volume position in the D Only state, the system calculates PRF
values and the Phantom Gate position, and updates them on the PW Spectral Doppler
image. HPRF is terminated when HPRF cannot be activated.
When Sample Volume is moved in the 2D Only state, the PRF values don’t change.

CAUTION:
XXThe Phantom Gate position can be located outside the 2D image area in Zoom Mode.
XXMake sure that sample volume and Phantom Gate are not placed together in the
measuring area. If more than two Sample Volumes are located in the vessels, all Doppler
components will appear in the spectrum, causing noise.

7-46
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

PW Spectral Doppler Mode Menu

„„Simultaneous
Tap Simultaneous on the touchscreen. Each time you tap the button, the Simultaneous
function turns on or off. If the Simultaneous option is turned on, you can view real-time
2D and spectral Doppler images at the same time. If the option is not turned on, however,
you will only be able to view the image from one of the modes. The Simultaneous function
decreases Doppler PRF, thus decreasing the measurable speed range.

„„Invert
Tap Invert on the touchscreen. Each time the button is tapped, the speed indicator (+/–)
for a spectrum is inverted.

„„Steer Invert
Press Steer Invert on the touchscreen. Pressing the button inverts the angle of the sample
volume.

NOTE: The Steer Invert button is only enabled when using a linear probe.

„„Auto Calc
Tap Auto Calc on the touchscreen to select Off, Live, or Frozen.
XXLive setting: The PS, ED, MD, PI, RI, PS/ED, ED/PS, HR, TAmax, and TAmean are
calculated after acquiring the Doppler Trace.
XXFrozen setting: The PS, ED, MD, PI, RI, PS/ED, ED/PS, HR, TAmax, and TAmean are
calculated when the image is frozen.
Values that are displayed on screen are selected at Setup > Measurement > AutoCalc.
For selecting displayed values, refer to the measurement settings in ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’.

CAUTION: The measurements carried out by Auto Trace under Measure and Real Time
Automatic Doppler Trace (Automatic Calculator) may be different from each other. This is
because the algorithms for these two methods are different. It is recommended that you use
Auto Trace under Measure for more accurate measurement.

7-47
 User Manual

Things to Consider when using Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace

Tips!
1. Aliasing occurs because PRF is too low in comparison to the image speed, or the
spectrum is clustered around the baseline because PRF is too high.
2. Peak is indistinctive or intermittent such as in Spectral waveforms for veins.
3. Meaningful spectrum distinction becomes difficult because Doppler Gain is set too high
or too low.
4. An index is displayed during the transition time after Sample Volume is moved with the
trackball.
5. The major spectral signals are cut off because Doppler Wall Filter is set too high.
6. Peak Trace is interrupted due to abnormal Doppler noise or artifact, and the heart rate is
above approximately 140 bpm.
If any of the above apply, Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace may not produce an accurate
trace or results. In addition, during auto calculation, results will not be displayed if the Freeze
function is run against inaccurate values.

„„Sensitivity
Specify the minimum range of Sensitivity. It can be adjusted from 1 to 5 by using the
touchscreen button.

Sensitivity
Tips!
Sensitivity is a function to adjust Trace Line in the Auto Trace or Limited Trace. Increase the
value to capture a wider area, use a smaller value to make the waveform clearer.

„„Trace Method
Tap Trace Method on the touchscreen. Max or Mean Trace for the selected spectrum is
performed. It will not be performed if set to Off.

„„Trace Direction
Tap Trace Direction on the touchscreen. Select the part of the spectrum to calculate with
AutoCalc from Both, Above, or Below.

„„Sound
Adjusts the doppler volume. Select a value from 0 to 100 by rotating the Sound dial-
button.

7-48
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Display Format
Tap Display Format on the touchscreen. Select either Up/Down, Side by Side, or Doppler
Only by using the button on the touchscreen.

„„Doppler Map
Used to configure the post curve in doppler mode. Select a value from 1 to 12 by using the
Doppler Map dial-button on the touchscreen.

„„TDW
Switches to TDW Mode. TDW stands for Tissue Doppler Wave.
For more information on TDW, refer to ‘TDW Mode’.

NOTE: This can only be used when the cardiac application is selected in Phased Array Probe.

NOTE: For more information on other touchscreen menu items, refer to ‘2D Mode’ and ‘Color
Doppler Mode’ sections.

7-49
 User Manual

CW Spectral Doppler Mode

CW stands for Continuous Wave. This mode displays the blood flow speed and direction at a
specific blood vessel location within a specific time frame. Unlike PW Spectral Doppler Mode, it
does not provide Sample Volume.

NOTE:
XXCW Spectral Doppler mode is an optional feature of this product.
XXThis dial-button can be used with the Phased Array or Static CW probes.

„„Steered CW Spectral Doppler Mode

This mode can only be used if the Phased Array probe is used. The 2D Mode image is also
shown, allowing the marking and adjusting of an observation area within the entire image.

„„Static CW Spectral Doppler Mode

This mode is only available with a Static CW Probe. The 2D image is not displayed.

Entering & Exiting CW Spectral Doppler Mode

„„Entering CW Spectral Doppler Mode

1. Press the CW button on the control panel to enter CW Spectral Doppler Mode.
2. Configure settings relating to Doppler image acquisition on the touchscreen.
3. Press the CW dial-button again to enter CW Spectral Doppler Mode and display the
Doppler image on the screen.

„„Exiting CW Spectral Doppler Mode

Press the CW dial-button while the Doppler image is being displayed. You can also press
the 2D dial-button to exit CW Spectral Doppler Mode.

7-50
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

CW Spectral Doppler Mode Menu

[Figure 7.12 CW Spectral Doppler Mode – Touchscreen]

NOTE: The menu for CW Spectral Doppler Mode is identical to that of PW Spectral Doppler
Mode.

7-51
 User Manual

TDI Mode
TDI stands for Tissue Doppler Imaging. It visualizes the movement of rapidly moving tissues
such as the heart. It is available in Color Doppler Mode. In Color Doppler Mode, TDI provides color
information for cardiac tissues.

NOTE: Appears on the Soft Menu only when using the phased array probe and the cardiac
application.

Starting and Ending TDI Mode

In Color Doppler Mode, tap TDI on the touchscreen. Pressing the button once more switches
the mode from TDI to C.

NOTE: For information about the touchscreen menu, refer to ‘Color Doppler Mode’.

7-52
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

TDW Mode
TDW stands for Tissue Doppler Wave. It visualizes the movement of rapidly moving tissues such
as the heart. TDW Mode is available in the PW Spectral Doppler Mode. If it is used in Spectral
Doppler Mode along with Color Doppler mode, changes in cardiac tissues over time can be
observed.

NOTE: This can only be used when the cardiac application is selected in Phased Array Probe.

Starting and Ending TDW Mode

Tap TDW on the touchscreen in PW Spectral Doppler Mode to run it. Pressing the button once
more switches the mode from TDW to PW Spectral Doppler.

NOTE: For information about the touchscreen menu, refer to the ‘PW Spectral Mode’ section.

7-53
 User Manual

ElastoScan Mode
The elasticity of ROI in a 2D image is shown in color. The 2D Mode image is also shown, allowing
the marking and adjustment of the ROI within the scanned image.

NOTE:
XXElastoScan mode is an optional feature of this product.
XXThe probes, applications, and presets that support ElastoScan are as follows:

Probe Application Preset

MSK General
LA3-14AD
Small Parts Breast, Thyroid

MSK General
LA4-18BD
Small Parts Breast, Thyroid

GYN Uterus, Adnexa

EA2-11B
Urology Prostate

GYN Uterus, Adnexa

ER4-9
Urology Prostate

GYN Uterus, Adnexa

V5-9
Urology Prostate

MSK General
LA3-16A
Small Parts Breast, Thyroid

GYN Uterus, Adnexa

VR5-9
Urology Prostate

GYN Uterus, Adnexa

EVN4-9
Urology Prostate

GYN Uterus, Adnexa

EA2-11AR
Urology Prostate

XXThis function is not available in E mode. Angle, View Area, ECG

7-54
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

ElastoScan
Tips!
XXAn elastogram is the elasticity imaging of an object, based on continuous ultrasound
images. The function that measures the elasticity of an object and converts it to images is
called ElastoScan. ElastoScan visualizes the presence of a solid mass or stiffness in tissue.
XXIt is already well known that lesions such as tumors are different from healthy tissue in
terms of their stiffness. Up until now, palpation has been used for examination, but this
method has certain depth limitations.

„„E Dual Mode

In this mode, the elastogram and the 2D image are displayed together on the screen. It can
be selected by tapping Single on the control panel and Dual on the touchscreen.
To facilitate comparative observation, the 2D image is shown on the left and an E image is
shown on the right.

NOTE:
XXFor ElastoScan, Wide Dual View is set as default.
XXFor details about Wide Dual View setting, refer to Setup > Imaging > Display Settings in
the ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’.

[Figure 7.13 E Dual Mode]

7-55
 User Manual

„„E Single Mode

In E Single Mode, only an E image is displayed in the screen. It can be selected by pressing
the Single button on the control panel.

[Figure 7.14 E Single Mode]

7-56
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„ROI Mode
ROI stands for Region of Interest. In E Mode, the ROI Box represents the area where
elasticity information is processed and shown. Tap ROI Mode on the touchscreen to turn
ROI Mode on or off.
It is important that only the effective tissues are included in ROI by avoiding ineffective
components such as bone and air to obtain a good elasticity image. If a ratio of effective
image is insufficient, no elasticity image can be displayed even when tissues are
pressured. To scan the breast, it is best to set as wide as possible in the lateral direction
and to include subcutaneous layer and muscle in the axial direction to obtain a good-
quality elasticity image, but it can be flexible to adjust the real situation.
You can adjust the position and size of the ROI box by using the Change button on the
control panel. Each time the Change button is pressed, the current status of the ROI Box is
shown in the User Information area of the screen.
XXROI Position: The position of the ROI Box can be changed. Move the ROI Box with the
trackball to confirm the new position.
XXROI Size: The size of the ROI Box can be changed. Resize the ROI Box with the trackball
and press the Change button to confirm the new size.

[Figure 7.15 ROI Mode]

NOTE: ROI Mode is available in E Single Mode as well as in E Dual Mode.

7-57
 User Manual

Starting and Closing E Mode

In 2D Mode, tap ElastoScan on the touchscreen. Press the button again to return to 2D Mode.

E Mode Screen

„„Color Bar
In E Mode, the color bar indicates the stiffness of a tissue. Regardless of the
color, the lower section of the bar indicates that the target area is stiffer than
the surrounding tissues and the upper section indicates that the target area is
less stiff than the surrounding tissues.

„„Compression Guide Bar

The strength and status of compression are shown in different number of
blocks and colors from Step 0 to 7. All blocks are empty at Step 0 which
appears when the probe is almost stationary, the ROI has insufficient region,
or matching between images is poor. Step 1 – Step 2 (in grey) mean inadequate
compression and from Step 3 to 7 (in blue or green) mean adequate
compression; the number of blocks filled represents the number of step level.

Performing a Scan
When using E mode, place a probe onto the surface of an area to observe and position the
ROI appropriately on a lesion to observe. Then use the probe to periodically compress the
region. When the compression guide is supported, refer to this guide to adjust the size
of the compression. If the region being examined is quite deep, it is best to increase the
compression.

Precautions for Scanning

Tips!
XXTo closely observe the location of the lesion, minimize the movement of tissues.
XXA breast is a complex organ which consists of lactiferous ducts, lactiferous glands, fatty
tissue, fibrous tissue, and chest muscles. An axial movement of the probe may cause an
unintended movement of the tissues.
XXThe prostate and the thyroid consist of tissues that are simpler than those of a breast and
there are relatively fewer unintended movements.

7-58
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

E Mode Menu

[Figure 7.16 ElastoScan Mode – Touchscreen]

„„Invert
Tap this button on the touchscreen to invert the Color Bar. Inverting the color bar also
inverts the color displayed on the image.

„„Dual Live
The elastogram and the 2D image are displayed together on the screen. Pressing Single on
the control panel displays the E image only on the screen.

„„E Gain
Adjust the brightness of the elastogram image. Use the dial-button to select a setting
from 0 to 100%.

„„Persistence Level
Specify the speed of change between frames. Use the dial-button to select a setting from
0 to 100%. Selecting a higher value increases the rate of frame change.

7-59
 User Manual

„„Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the elastogram. Use the dial-button to select a setting from 0 to
100%.

„„Color Map
Select the color of the elastogram. Select a value from 1 to 6 by using the dial-button on
the touchscreen. If you change the Color Map, the color bar will also change accordingly.

„„Blending Level
Adjust the blending level between a color image over a 2D image. Change the 2D image
ratio using the knob.

„„Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement of the image. Use the dial-button to select a setting from 0 to
100%. A higher setting provides more clearly defined boundaries, at the expense of
increased noise.

7-60
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

E-Strain
This is the function for breast lesion exam. It calculates the strain ratio between the area of
the suspected lesion (ROI) and normal breast fat and displays the results.

NOTE:
XXE-Strain is an optional feature of this product.
XXE-Strain is supported in countries except the USA and Canada.
XXThe E-Strain button is only activated on the touchscreen when the following conditions
are satisfied:
–– Application: Breast, Thyroid
–– Freeze state

„„E-Strain
1. Press the Freeze button on the control panel and then press the E-Strain button.
2. Specify the position and size of the ROI in the area of suspected lesion.
XXMake sure that the fat tissue is visible at the same level as, or above, the ROI.
XXAdjust the size of the ROI by using the trackball and the Change button.
3. Press the Set button. The calculation is automatically performed and the results will be
displayed on the screen.
XXTarget Strain: Mean strain value inside the ROI (Supported in all countries except
the USA and Canada)
XXRef. Strain: Mean strain value of areas considered normal outside the ROI
(supported in all countries except the U.S.A. and Canada).
XXStrain Ratio: Ratio of Strain values (Target Strain/Ref. Strain)

„„E- Strain Reset

When you tap this button on the touchscreen, the E-Strain measurements will be reset.

7-61
 User Manual

Combined Mode
In Combined Mode, three different modes are combined, including the default 2D Mode. Note
that, in 2D/C Live Mode, only two modes are combined: 2D and Color Doppler Modes.

2D/C/PW Mode
Color Doppler Mode and PW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously.
In Color Doppler Mode, press the PW dial-button on the control panel. Or, in PW Spectral Doppler
Mode, press the C dial-button on the control panel.

2D/PD/PW Mode
Power Doppler Mode and PW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously.
In Power Doppler Mode, press the PW dial-button on the control panel. Or, in PW Spectral
Doppler Mode, press the PD button on the control panel.

2D/C/CW Mode
Color Doppler Mode and CW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. This mode is
available only with certain probes.
In Color Doppler Mode, press the CW dial-button on the control panel. Or, in CW Spectral Doppler
Mode, press the C/Z dial-button on the control panel.

2D/C/M Mode
Color Doppler Mode and M Mode are displayed simultaneously.

7-62
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

2D/TDI/TDW Mode

NOTE: This can only be used when the cardiac application is selected in Phased Array Probe.

TDI Mode and TDW Mode are displayed simultaneously. In PD mode or Color Doppler mode, press
the TDI, and then press the PW dial-button.

Dual Live Mode

2D Mode and Color Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. In either 2D mode or C mode,
select Dual Live on the touchscreen.

Changing Combined Mode Format

„„Changing Trackball State

In Combined Mode, more than two image modes are used at the same time.
Depending on the trackball’s state, you can change the position or size of: ROI on the
active image; the Sample Volume; M line, etc. Press the Change button on the control
panel to change the state of the trackball.
Note that when frozen, you can press the Change button to select the type of Cine image.

„„Changing the Menu

You can change the menu and touchscreen menu items without changing the active image
mode. The functions of the buttons on the control panel vary depending on the active
image mode.
For example, when the touchscreen menu for 2D mode is displayed on the screen in 2D/C/
PW mode, you can select another mode from the touchscreen menu to switch to that
mode.

NOTE: For information on optimizing an image in Combined Mode, please refer to ‘Basic
Mode’.

7-63
 User Manual

Multi-Image Mode
The product supports Dual Mode and Quad Mode.
In Multi-Image Mode, an image can be displayed in different combined modes. Button operations
in an active area are the same as in Combined Mode.

Dual Mode
Press the L or R button on the control panel.
You can compare two independent images with each other. Each time you press the L or R
button, one of the two images is selected. The currently active image mode is indicated by a blue
marker at the top of the image. The buttons and menu operate according to the image mode that
is currently in use.
To exit from Dual mode, press the 2D dial-button.

[Figure 7.17 Dual Mode]

7-64
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Quad Mode
Press the Quad button on the control panel to enter Quad Mode.
You can compare four different images at the same time. Each time you tap the Quad or Set
button, one of the four images is selected. The currently active image mode is indicated by a blue
marker at the top of the image. The buttons and menu operate according to the image mode that
is currently in use.
To exit Quad mode, press the Single button or the 2D dial-button on the control panel.

1 2

3 4

[Figure 7.18 Quad Mode]

Multi-Image Mode Screen Layout

Tips!
In Multi-Image Mode, recent Cine images are displayed on the screen by default.
XXDual Mode
Press the L or R button on the control panel to display the current Cine image and the
most recent Cine image in order of 1 → 2.
XXQuad Mode
Press the Quad button on the control panel to display the current Cine image and the
three most recent Cine images on the screen. You can specify the method of displaying
images in Setup > Imaging > Common > Quad: Active Window Sequence.
–– Zigzag: Set in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.
–– Clockwise: Set in the order of 1 → 2 → 4 → 3.

NOTE: For information on optimizing an image in Multi-image mode, please refer to ‘Basic
Mode’.

7-65
 User Manual

3D/4D Mode
These modes show 3D images of the region being examined.

NOTE: 3D Mode and 4D Mode provide additional options per product.

HS50 XX4D: SFVI, FAD, VSI, Smooth Cut, Volume Compounding

XH50 XX3D XI: Multi Slice View, Oblique View, Multi OVIX, XI Vocal
XX4D: SFVI, FAD, VSI, Smooth Cut, Volume Compounding
HS60
XX3D XI: Multi Slice View, Oblique View, Multi OVIX, XI Vocal
XH60
XX3D MXI: Volume Slice, Mirror View

3D Mode
This product can be used with 3D probes, and provides 3D Mode and XI STIC Mode.

[Figure 7.19 3D Mode]

7-66
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„3D
This mode uses a 3D probe to acquire 3D images.

Freehand 3D Mode
Tips!
XXA 3D mode where 3D probes are used is referred to as Static 3D Mode, while a mode
where general probes are used is called Freehand 3D Mode.
XXThat is, a mode where general probes, not 3D probes, are used is referred to as Freehand
3D Mode. Please note the following: Only applicable to Convex and Linear probes.

Probe Preset

CA1-7AD OB, Abdomen

LA3-14AD Small Part, Vascular (TCD excluded)

XXAvailable in MPR Mode only.

XXCannot be used with 2D Steer, Trapezoid, or Write Zoom.

„„XI STIC
In this mode, fetal cardiac cycle and STIC volume data can be obtained with 3D probes.
For more information, please refer to 'XI STIC' in this chapter.

NOTE: XI STIC is an optional feature of this product.

Entering and Exiting 3D/4D Mode

Press the 3D/4D button on the control panel. Press the button again to exit 3D/4D mode and
return to 2D mode.

7-67
 User Manual

3D/4D Mode Screen

„„ROI Box
In 3D/4D mode, the ROI box is also referred to as the volume box. The box is used to
indicate 3D/4D conversion areas.
You can adjust the position and size of the ROI box by using the Change button on
the control panel. Each time the Change button is pressed, the state of the ROI box is
displayed in the lower middle part of the screen as follows:
XXROI Position: In this state, the position of the ROI box can be changed. You can move
the ROI box by using the trackball.
XXROI Size: In this state, the size of the ROI box can be changed. After resizing the ROI box
with the trackball, press the Change button to confirm the new size.

3D Cine
The 3D images saved temporarily in the system can be reviewed. The 3D Cine Define screen is
displayed on the touchscreen.

3D Cine Define
Specify the settings needed for creation of a Cine image.

„„Rotate Angle
Set the overall rotation angle by tapping the corresponding button on the touchscreen.
Select a value from 30, 45, 60, 90, 180 or 360°.

„„Step Angle
Set the rotation angle for a single step in an image by tapping the corresponding button
on the touchscreen. Select a value from 1, 3, 5, or 15°.

The Difference between Rotate Angle and Step Angle

Tips!
A Cine image rotates to the angle specified under Rotate Angle. During this process, each
rotational step is equivalent to the angle specified under Step Angle. For example, if Rotate
Angle is set to 360˚ and Step Angle is set to 15˚, a 3D Cine image rotates to 360˚ in 25 steps,
each of which involves a rotation of 15˚.

7-68
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Rotate Axis
Set the rotational axis by tapping the corresponding button on the touchscreen.

„„Generate
Cine images are generated by applying the current settings. Once images are generated,
the touchscreen switches to Cine Review.

„„Review
Review previously generated Cine images. The touchscreen switches to Cine Review.

„„Start Angle
Use the dial-button to set the start angle of a Cine image. When Start Angle is set, Rotate
Angle is cancelled.

„„End Angle
Use the dial-button to set the end angle of a Cine image. When End Angle is set, Rotate
Angle is cancelled.

[Figure 7.20 3D Cine Define – Touchscreen]

7-69
 User Manual

Cine Review
Specify the settings needed for review of a Cine image.

[Figure 7.21 Cine Review]

„„Play Mode
Select the play mode for Cine images. Select from Loop or Yoyo by using knob button.
XXLoop: Repeats playback in one direction.
XXYoyo: Plays until the end in one direction, and then plays in the reverse direction.

„„Cine Play
Tap this button on the touchscreen to turn this feature on or off. Cine images are played
when this is on. If it is turned off, Cine Frame will appear on the touchscreen.

„„New Cine
Clears the current Cine image and creates a new one. The system switches to the 3D Cine
Define screen.

„„Speed
Use the dial-button to select the playback speed of a Cine image. Select from Very Slow,
Slow, Normal, Fast, or Fastest.

7-70
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Trim Start
After specifying the position of the first frame by using the dial-button, tap the dial-button
to save it.

„„Trim End
After specifying the position of the last frame by using the dial-button, tap the dial-button
to save it.

„„Cine Frame
Select a Cine frame to review. Use the dial-button or move the trackball left or right to
select.

NOTE: This option is available when Play is turned off. It can be adjusted by as many as the
total number of Cine frames by using the knob button with the ‘current Cine frame number’
being shown on the monitor screen.

7-71
 User Manual

4D Mode
In 4D Mode, 3D images can be obtained in real time with 3D probes. This mode is also called
Live 3D Mode.

Smart 4D
Tips!
Smart 4D collectively refers to the 4D, 3D XI, and 3D MXI functions.

[Figure 7.22 4D Mode]

4D Mode Screen
Press the Freeze button on the control panel to switch to the 4D Cine screen.

NOTE: In 4D, only MPR, MSV, and Oblique View Modes are available. For more information,
please refer to 3D View-MPR and 3D XI.

7-72
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

4D Cine
The 4D images saved temporarily in the system can be reviewed. The 4D Cine screen is
displayed on the touchscreen.

NOTE: You can also press the Freeze button in 4D Mode to execute 4D Cine.

„„Play Mode
Select the play mode for Cine images. Use the touchscreen to select either Loop or Yoyo.
XXLoop: Repeats playback in one direction.
XXYoyo: Plays until the end in one direction, and then plays in the reverse direction.

„„Cine Type
Select the Cine image type by tapping the corresponding button on the touchscreen.
XXVolume: This button appears when Cine images are played. The MPR, MSV, or Oblique
buttons are enabled, depending on the state before the 4D Cine was started. Cine
images can be played by changing Display Format, etc.
XXImage: This is the general Cine playing method.

„„Cine Play
XXVolume: Tap the Play button on the touchscreen to play; tap the Freeze button to
freeze.
XXImage: Tap the Play button on the touchscreen to play; tap Play again to freeze.

„„Cine Speed
Set the speed at which Cine images are played. Use the dial-button to select Very Slow,
Slow, Normal, Fast, or Fastest.

„„Vol.Index
Move the trackball or use the dial-button to select an Index. ‘The current volume data
number/total number of volume data’ is displayed.

7-73
 User Manual

3D Stand By
This screen is displayed on the touchscreen when 3D/4D Modes are entered. Set the required
parameters to specify how 3D images are acquired.

[Figure 7.23 3D StandBy – Touchscreen]

Menu Tab
Select a tab for 3D/4D Modes. Different tabs are displayed on the touchscreen depending on
the probe currently being used.

Adjusting 2D Images in 3D/4D Modes

Tips!
XXTap the 2D Menu tab on the touchscreen to optimize a 2D image before acquiring the
corresponding 3D image.
XXOnce the 2D image is optimized, tap 3D Menu on the touchscreen to return to 3D StandBy
mode.

View Mode
Select a view mode to use after 3D images are acquired.

„„3D View
The standard view mode for 3D image review. Press MPR to select.

7-74
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Rendering Preset
Selects a Preset for 3D images. For more information, refer to the preset information
contained in the ‘3D View - MPR Mode’ section.

Curved ROI
Press the Curved ROI button to turn it On or Off. If set to On, adjust the ROI Line in the form of
a curve to select the rendering area.

NOTE:
XXIt cannot be used concurrently when OH (Orientation Help) is on.
XXIt is supported when the Render Direction value is ‘C+.’
XXIt is supported in Dual and Quad modes.

Breech Sweep
You can also scan a breech baby from its head to abdomen without changing the probe
direction.

Scan Quality
Selects the quality of 3D images. Select Low, Med, or High by tapping the button on the
touchscreen or using the dial-button.
XXHigh: Image quality is high, but the speed of capturing (or rendering) 3D image is low.
XXMed2: Provides better image capturing speed and lower image quality than the High
setting.
XXMed1: Provides better image capturing speed and lower image quality than the Med2
setting.
XXLow: Provides the highest 3D image capturing speed and the lowest image quality.

NOTE: Scan Quality is not available in the XI STIC menu tab.

7-75
 User Manual

Volume Angle
Set the scan angle by tapping the touchscreen or using the dial-button. The setting range
varies depending on the selected probe.

NOTE: In XI STIC, set the scan angle from 10° to 60°.

Scan Time
Set the image acquisition time. Select a value from 7s to 15s by clicking the corresponding
button or using the dial-button on the touchscreen. The button is enabled in XI STIC only.

NOTE: For more information, please refer to the ‘XI STIC’ section.

Trimester
Set the pregnancy trimester. Select from 1st, 2nd, and 3rd by clicking the corresponding
button or using the dial-button on the touchscreen. The button is enabled in XI STIC only.

NOTE: For more information, please refer to the ‘XI STIC’ section.

7-76
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Acquiring 3D/4D Images

1. Specify the location and size of the ROI Box as desired.
2. Configure various settings in the 3D Stand By screen on the touchscreen.
Select a menu tab, and then configure settings in order of View Mode → Rendering Preset
→ Soft Menu.
3. Press the Freeze or Set button on the control panel. The system will begin acquiring 3D
images. To cancel the acquisition of a 3D image in progress, press the Exit button.
4. Once 3D images are acquired, the 3D View or 3D XI screen is displayed depending on the
setting.
If a left/right-reversed 3D image is obtained, the image will also be shown left/right
reversed in 3D View or 3D XI.
5. You can perform diagnosis by optimizing images. Press the 3D/4D button to acquire 3D
images again.

How to Acquire High Quality 3D Images

Tips!
XXConsider the direction, size and section of the viewpoint as well as the visibility of an
object.
XXBefore acquiring 3D images, adjust the contrast in 2D Mode.
XXThe bigger the ROI box, the slower the rendering speed. Therefore, set an appropriate ROI
box size.
XXTo see the 3D image of a fetus in frontal view, position the fetal head in the direction
of the Direction Mark, putting it in the coronal plane. Then scan the fetus from back to
abdomen.
XXThe 3D image of a fetal face can be more easily located in the coronal plane than in the
existing sagittal plane.
XXTo determine the surface contour for lesions that do not generate echoes, such as
amniotic fluid, make sure that they are surrounded by hypoechoic tissues.
XXAfter acquiring a 3D image, you can adjust the low-threshold level to clean up the image.
In general, it is recommended that you leave the High Threshold value at the maximum
value of 255 rather than adjusting it.

7-77
 User Manual

3D View – MPR
This view mode is enabled upon acquisition of images when MPR is selected in 3D StandBy.
You can optimize 3D images, perform diagnosis, and take measurements.

Changing View Mode

Tips!
Select the 3D Menu tab on the touchscreen to change the view mode.

Basic Operating Instructions

„„Zooming In to/Out of Images

Turn the Zoom dial-button on the control panel to zoom in to/out of images. The current
zoom factor appears on the bottom side of the screen.

„„VCT Zoom
After tapping VCT Zoom on the touchscreen, press the Zoom dial-button on the control
panel to convert it to VCT Zoom function. Turn the dial-button to zoom in to/out of VCT
images. The current VCT Zoom factor appears at the bottom of the screen.

NOTE: This option is available with VCT.

„„Post Gain
You can adjust the value using the 2D knob button. Works independently from 2D Gain,
with a separate value. The initial value is 0, but this value can be set to any value from -255
to 255. In 4D mode, Post Gain works during Freeze.

„„Rotating Image Around X Axis

Use the M/x dial-button on the control panel.

„„Rotating Image Around Y Axis

Use the PW/y dial-button on the control panel.

7-78
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Rotating Image Around Z Axis

Use the Color/z dial-button on the control panel.

„„Ref. Slice
Use the Marker/Ref dial-button on the control panel. It moves the Reference Slice in a
straight line horizontally.

„„Calculations by Application
Press the Calculator button on the control panel. The measurement methods are same as
application measurement and 5D NT of ‘Chapter 8. Measurements’.

NOTE:
XXIn the 4D mode, measurements of XI STIC and VOCAL are not available.
XXIn MSV mode, measurement is not available if the display format is 2x3 or higher.

„„Basic Measurement
Press the Calculator button on the control panel. For more information, refer to ‘Basic
Measurement’ in ‘Chapter 8. Measurements’.
Tap Save on the touchscreen to finish saving. To cancel it, press the Exit button on the
control panel.

„„Entering Text
Press the Text button. With the Quick Text function enabled, pressing any key on the
keyboard immediately switches the mode to Text Mode. For more information, please refer
to the ‘Entering Text’ section of ‘Chapter 9. Image Management.’

„„Entering Arrows
Press the Text button and then the Arrow button on the touchscreen. For more
information, please refer to the ‘Entering Arrows’ section of ‘Chapter 9. Image
Management.’

7-79
 User Manual

„„Saving Images

NOTE: If volume data contains both 4D and 3D Cine images, choose either 4D or 3D for
saving.

1. Press the Store/Print mapping button on the control panel. The touchscreen will show
the 3D Data Save screen.
2. Specify settings such as Data Type, Save Item, and Volume Format.
3. Tap Save on the touchscreen to finish saving. To cancel it, press the Exit button on the
control panel.

Volume Data
Tips!
XXIf volume data contains a Cine image, it is saved at the same time.
XXIf images are saved with volume data, they can be converted to new 3D rendering images
with SonoView.

„„Printing Images
Go to Setup > Customize > Buttons and customize U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, and U6 buttons as
you want.

7-80
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Basics of 3D View

„„Screen Layout

1 2

3 4

[Figure 7.24 3D View]

1 A Plane: The slice image of the axial section.

2 B Plane: The slice image of the sagittal section.
3 C Plane: The slice image of the coronal section.
4 3D Image
5 Trackball state indication: The current state of the trackball is displayed at the bottom
of the monitor screen. You can select Pointer, Move, or ROI for trackball. Press the
Change button on the control panel to change the trackball state. The trackball state
changes sequentially each time the button is pressed.
XXPointer: Re-adjusts the position of ROI Box. Pressing the Pointer button on the
control panel switches to Pointer state. You can rotate the ROI box around the
image axis by using the pointer while pressing the Set button. Press the Change
button again to switch to another state.
XXMove: Moves the 3D image with the trackball. The acquired 3D image moves as you
move the trackball.
XXROI: You can resize the ROI box with the trackball. The ROI box on the 3D image is
resized as you move the trackball.

7-81
 User Manual

„„Touchscreen Layout
Only those buttons that are available in the current mode are enabled. Use the arrow
buttons to navigate between pages.

[Figure 7.25 3D View Menu]

7-82
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Mode
Select the display format in which 3D images are presented.

„„Render
Axial, Sagittal, or Coronal plane images are displayed together with the 3D image.

„„2D
Axial, Sagittal and Coronal plane images, along with OH (Orientation Help), are displayed
on the screen. OH indicates the relative position of the currently selected plane in regard
to volume data.

Tips! Tap Single on the touchscreen for a more detailed view.

„„VCT
Axial, Sagittal and Coronal plane images and combinations of them are displayed. Each
plane is displayed with a different colored frame. VCT is an abbreviation for Volume CT.

NOTE: Accept ROI is available in Render. Tap the touchscreen to turn it on or off. If it is turned
on, ROI is not shown.

Display Format
You can change the display format by using the touchscreen. The display format varies for
each mode.
XXSingle: Switches to Full screen.
XXDual: Switches to 2D/3D screen.
XXQuad: Switches to ROI 3D screen.

NOTE: In 2D or VCT mode, only Single or Quad Format can be used.

7-83
 User Manual

Ref. Image
Tap the corresponding button on the touchscreen to select a reference image from among A,
B, and C. The selected image will be highlighted with blue borders.
XXA: Axial Section
XXB: Sagittal Section
XXC: Coronal Section
XXOH (Orientation Help): Tap the corresponding button on the touchscreen to turn it on or
off. If it is turned on, a 3D image will be displayed along with OH.

NOTE: This option may be used in 2D and Render.

„„ClearVision
ClearVision removes noise from the image and enhances outlines to help show the image
more clearly. You can select off or adjust the index from 1 to 5 by tapping the touchscreen.

3D Rotation
Select -90°, 90°, or 180° by tapping the button on the touchscreen. The coordinate system
rotates based on the current 3D image.

NOTE: Mix, Th.Low, and Transparency are available in Render mode.

Init
When you tap the touchscreen, the position information of the 3D image is initialized.

FAD
This automatically detects the face of the fetus and removes the images of any limbs that
obscure the face. FAD stands for Fetal Face Auto Detection.

7-84
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

VSI
It displays a realistic image by using the Depth and Intensity values. When Surface or Surface
Smooth is enabled in Render Mode 1, Shading is enabled in Render Mode 2.
VSI stands for Volume Shading Imaging.

Accept ROI
Press this button on the touchscreen to turn it On or Off. If this is turned On, no ROI will be
displayed.

NOTE: Available in Render and Mirror View.

Mix
Configure the mix of Render modes 1 and 2. Use the dial-button to select a ratio between
0:100(%) and 100:0(%).

NOTE: For details on Render mode, refer to ‘Render Setup’ in ‘3D Utility Menu’.

Th. Low
Specify the minimum range of Threshold. Use the dial-button to select a value from 0 to 254.

Threshold
Tips!
This option allows you to adjust the threshold value in order to eliminate unnecessary data
from images. As the number increases, cyst elements become more apparent. As the number
decreases, bone elements become more apparent.

Select
Select Post Curve. Use the dial-button to select 2D, 3D, 2D Color, or 3D Color.

7-85
 User Manual

Position
Set the position of the post curve selected under Select. Use the dial-button to select a value
from 0 to 100.

Bias
Set the bias of the post curve selected under Select. Use the dial-button to select a value from
-100 to 100.

Transparency
Set the transparency of a 3D image. Use the dial-button to select a value from 20 to 250.
The lowest value (20) is for complete transparency, and the highest value (250) is for
complete opacity.

ClearVision
You can obtain a clearer image by eliminating noise and enhancing boundaries. Five
predefined indices are available.

NOTE: For more information on ClearVision and ClearVision Index, please refer to the 2D
Mode Menu section of ‘Chapter 7. Modes of Operation.’

HDVI
Filters 3D images to express outlines more vividly and improve images. Five predefined
indices are available.

NOTE: HDVI is an optional feature of this product.

HDVI Index
Tap HDVI Index on the touchscreen. Select an index from 1 to 5 by tapping the button on the
touchscreen.

7-86
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

HDVI Type
Tap the touchscreen button or use the dial-button to select the part to measure among Face,
Brain, Early OB, Heart, Spine, Gyn, Breast, Thyroid, Carotid, Abdomen, Kidney, and Surface and
adjust the image.

NOTE: The ClearVision and HDVI options are enabled in MPR, MSV, Oblique View mode.

NOTE: The following are enable MPR mode: Crystal Vue, MagiCut, Realistic Vue, 3D Cine, 4D
Cine, Render Setup, Preset, Post Processing, Curved ROI, Chroma.

Geometry
Move, magnify, or rotate an image rendered in 3D Mode.
XXRotation: Use the X/Y/Z button to rotate the rendered image.
XXMagnification: Use the Zoom button to magnify the rendered image.
XXMove: Use the trackball to move the rendered image.

7-87
 User Manual

Orientation Dot
Tap the corresponding button on the touchscreen to turn the Orientation Dot on or off. When this
is on, a dot appears at the center of the reference image.

Render Setup
The Render Setup screen appears on the touchscreen. You can specify the image rendering
method.
After selecting the Render Mode tab on the touchscreen, configure the required settings
including Render Direction and Render Mode. The specified settings will be displayed in the
image information area.
This product provides four Render modes: Gray, Inversion, Color, and SeeThru.

NOTE: In Oblique View Mode, this option is available only when OVIX is On.

[Figure 7.26 Render Setup – Touchscreen]

7-88
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Gray
Specify how volume data acquired with the gray method should be rendered into 3D images.

„„Render Direction
Set the rendering direction by clicking the corresponding button on the touchscreen.

„„Render Mode 1, 2
Enter Render Modes 1 and 2 by tapping the corresponding buttons on the touchscreen.
XXSurface: Represents 3D images in the Ray-Casting method, which shows the shell of an
image with curved surfaces.
XXSmooth: Represents 3D images that are smoother than those created by the Surface
method.
XXMax: Represents 3D images at maximum intensity. It can be useful for the observation
of bone structures in a human body.
XXMin: Represents 3D images at minimum intensity. It can be useful for observation of
vessels or hollow parts in a human body.
XXLight: Represents the depth of 3D images in terms of brightness.
XXX-Ray: Represents 3D images in terms of average intensity. This shows images that are
similar to X-ray images.

NOTE: For descriptions of other menu items, see 'Render Setup'.

„„Mix
Configure the mix of Render modes 1 and 2. Use the dial-button to select a value from 0 to
100.

„„Th.High
Used to specify the maximum threshold range. Use the dial-button to select a value from 1
to 255.

7-89
 User Manual

„„Th.Low
Specify the minimum threshold range. Use the dial-button to select a value from 0 to 254.

Threshold
Tips!
This option allows you to adjust the threshold value in order to eliminate unnecessary data
from images. As the number increases, cyst elements become more apparent. As the number
decreases, bone elements become more apparent.

„„Th.Power
Specify the color threshold. Select a value from 0 to 255 by using the dial-button. As this
value increases, more color is removed from an image.

Color
Specify how the volume data acquired with the Angio/CFM method are rendered into 3D
images. Other settings are configured in the same way as Gray Render Mode.

See Thru
Set the method for rendering the data from Gray+Angio, Gray+CFM combinations as a 3D
image. Settings other than Render Mode 1 and 2 are configured in the same way as Gray
Render Mode.

„„Transparent-Transparent
Adjust the transparencies of both Gray and Color data, so that the Color data inside the
Gray data may be studied. The parts that are obscured by the Gray data are displayed
slightly darker.

„„Transparent-Surface
Adjust the transparency of Gray data, so that the Color data inside the Gray data may be
studied. The parts that are obscured by the Gray data are displayed slightly darker.

„„Max-Transparent
Set Gray data to ‘Max’, and Color data to ‘Transp’, to study Color data. The parts that are
obscured by the Gray data are displayed slightly lighter.

7-90
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Max-Surface
Set Gray data to ‘Max’, and Color data to ‘Surface’, to study Color data. The parts that are
obscured by the Gray data are displayed slightly lighter.

„„Inversion
This option shows inverted images when the volume data acquired by the gray method
is rendered into 3D images. Other settings can be specified in the same way as with Gray
Render Mode.

7-91
 User Manual

VOCAL
Measure the volume of tissues within the human body. VOCAL is an abbreviation for Virtual
Organ Computer Aided anaLysis.
VOCAL can be performed in the following order: VOCAL Define → VOCAL Edit → VOCAL

[Figure 7.27 VOCAL]

VOCAL Define
Specify the settings required for VOCAL execution.

Contour Type
Select the contour line type. A contour line is automatically created for all types except
Manual.

„„Solid
Used for object data with many echoes.

„„General
Draw a contour line based on a typical object. This is faster than other automatic contour
types but less accurate.

7-92
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Prostate
Used for prostate data.

„„Cystic
Used for object data with fewer echoes.

„„Sphere
After creating a spherical object, edit its contour to make it into the desired shape.

„„Manual
Create the desired shape of an object manually.

Ref. Image
Tap the corresponding button on the touchscreen to select a reference image from among A,
B, and C. The selected image will be highlighted with blue borders.

Step Angle
Set the rotation angle. Select 12, 18 or 30 by tapping the corresponding button on the
touchscreen.

Pole Point Move Using Trackball

Set the range to perform VOCAL in a reference image. In a reference image, Pole 1 indicates
the position of the upper arrow and Pole 2 indicates the position of the lower arrow. Adjust
by using either the trackball and Set button on the control panel or the dial-button on the
touchscreen.

Init
When you tap the touchscreen, the position information of the 3D image is initialized.

7-93
 User Manual

Next
Tap the touchscreen to begin creation of VOCAL data.

When Contour Type is Set to Manual

Tips!
1. Tap Next on the touchscreen. The Image Position screen will be displayed on the
touchscreen.
2. After tapping the Set button over an image, move the trackball to contour.
XXTap Next to move to the next frame.
XXTap Previous to move to the previous frame.
3. Tap Done on the touchscreen. Start VOCAL.
If you tap Done without contouring, VOCAL is performed over a sphere.

[Figure 7.28 VOCAL Define – Touchscreen]

7-94
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

VOCAL Edit
Once VOCAL data is created, volume information will be displayed on the screen. In VOCAL Edit
Mode, you can modify or redo the existing contour lines.

Shell Mode
Set the shell of an object based on its contour line.

„„Off
Do not use Shell Mode. The created contour and the shell overlap.

„„Inside
The shell is drawn inside the contour generated by the Shell Thick. specified.

„„Outside
The shell is drawn outside the contour generated by the Shell Thick. specified.

„„Symmetric
Half the shell is drawn inside the contour and the other half of the shell is drawn outside
the contour, with each drawn at half of the Shell Thick. specified.

Shell Thick.
Set the shell thickness of an object. Use the dial-button to select a value from 1 to 20mm. This
option appears on the touchscreen only when Shell Mode is used.

Image Position
Review contour lines for each frame. Use Previous and Next to move through frames.

7-95
 User Manual

Multi Edit
Modify more than one contour line at once. Tap this button on the touchscreen to turn this
feature on or off. If it is turned on, up to 6 contour lines can be displayed simultaneously on
the screen. When there are more than 6 lines, use the MEV Page dial-button to navigate
through pages. MEV is an abbreviation for Multi Edit View.
Use Pole 1 and Pole 2 to edit contour lines. You can also use the trackball and the Set button
on the control panel to edit contour lines. Once editing is complete, tap Exit Multi Edit again
to turn it off.

Clear Contour
When you tap this button on the touchscreen, the VOCAL data are deleted, the settings are
maintained, and the system returns to the VOCAL Define step.

New Contour
Tap the button on the touchscreen to move from VOCAL Manual page to VOCAL Setup page.
This button only appears if Contour Type is set to Manual.

Accept Contour
Tap the button on the touchscreen to apply changes. The screen will switch to the VOCAL data
review screen.

[Figure 7.29 VOCAL Edit – Touchscreen]

7-96
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

VOCAL
Optimizes VOCAL data for review.

VOCAL Mode
Specify how VOCAL data are presented.

„„ROI 3D
Shows images in the Axial, Sagittal and Coronal planes, together with VOCAL data.

„„Fixed 3D
Shows images in the Axial, Sagittal and Coronal planes, together with 3D images for
VOCAL data.

„„VCT
Shows actual combinations of images in the Axial, Sagittal and Coronal planes and VOCAL
data. Use the VCT Type dial-button to select one from Type 1-Type 8.

Display Format
When you tap this button on the touchscreen and select Single or Quad, the VOCAL data are
displayed in full screen. This can be used in every mode. When you press this button again,
the display returns to the previous screen.

Ref. Image
Tap the corresponding button on the touchscreen to select a reference image from among A,
B, and C. The selected image will be highlighted with blue borders

7-97
 User Manual

VOCAL Edit
Tap the corresponding button on the touchscreen to return to the VOCAL Edit stage.

Init
When you tap the touchscreen, the position information of the 3D image is initialized.

Mode
Specify how the surface of VOCAL data is presented. Use the dial-button to select Surface or
Wireframe.
XXSurface: VOCAL data are represented using the method of expressing the exterior of
images by curves.
XXWireframe: VOCAL data are represented by dots and lines.

NOTE: This option is available with ROI 3D.

[Figure 7.30 VOCAL – Touchscreen]

7-98
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

3D XI
This is the view mode used to review 3D XI images. Select MSV or Oblique View.

NOTE:
XX3D XI (MSV, Oblique View, Multi OVIX, and XI Vocal) is an optional feature of this product.
XX3D XI is only available when 3D probes are used.

This view mode is enabled if 3D image acquisition is completed when MSV or Oblique View is
selected in 3D StandBy. An image can be viewed in multiple slices.

MSV
An image can be viewed in multiple slices. MSV is an abbreviation for Multi-Slice View.

[Figure 7.31 Multi Slice View]

NOTE: Available options are Calculator, Caliper, Text and Arrow.

7-99
 User Manual

MSV Screen
The images sliced at the thickness set in Slice Thick. are displayed on the screen. Slice
Number/Total Number of Slices is shown at the bottom of each slice image. The currently
selected slice image is indicated by an blue contour.
The image information displays the current mode, Ref. Image, and Slice Thick.

„„Rotating Image
Rotating the reference plane affects all other planes.
XXX-axis Rotation: Use the M/X dial-button on the control panel. If the trackball is
in Pointer mode, place the Pointer near the X-axis in an image and then move the
trackball while pressing the Set button.
XXY-axis Rotation: Use the PW/Y dial-button on the control panel. If the trackball is
in Pointer mode, place the Pointer near the Y-axis in an image and then move the
trackball while pressing the Set button.
XXZ-axis Rotation: Use the Color/Z dial-button on the control panel. If the trackball
is in Pointer mode, place the Pointer near the Z-axis in an image and then move the
trackball while pressing the Set button.

„„Moving Image
Set the trackball in Move Mode, and then move it up/down/left/right. The image will move
along the X and Y axes.

[Figure 7.32 Multi Slice View – Touchscreen]

7-100
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Display Format
Set the layout of slice images. Select from 1x1, 2x1, 2x2, 3x2, 3x3 or 4x3 by tapping the
corresponding button on the touchscreen. The number of indices that can be displayed
simultaneously on the screen varies depending on this setting. If the layout is changed, the
selected slice image moves to the first position on the screen.

Ref. Image
Tap the corresponding button on the touchscreen to select a reference image from among A,
B, and C.

„„MSV OH
Tap the ON button on the touchscreen button to turn it on or off. If this function is turned
on, the A, B, and C planes of the selected slice image will be displayed on the screen. The
selected slice and reference images will be highlighted with blue borders.

„„ClearVision
ClearVision removes noise from the image and enhances outlines to help show the image
more clearly. You can select off or adjust the index from 1 to 5 by tapping the touchscreen.

Page
Change the page on the screen. This option can be useful when the total number of slice
images exceeds what is specified in Display Format. Select a page by tapping the Previous
and Next buttons on the touchscreen.

Selected Slice
Select a slice image to observe. Use the dial-button to select an Index. The selected index will
be highlighted with blue borders.

7-101
 User Manual

Slice Thick.
Set the cut depth of images. Use the dial-button to select 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, or 10.0mm.
Depending on your selection, the number of indices and pages will vary.

NOTE: The Slice Thick. represents the slice width in volume data, rather than the actual
anatomical position.

Position
Set the position of the post curve. Use the dial-button to select a value from 0 to 100.

Bias
Set the bias of the post curve. Use the dial-button to select a value from -100 to 100.

Ruler
Set the position of the ruler. Use the dial-button to select None, Right, Left, Top, Bottom or
All.

Select
Select Post Curve. Use the dial-button to select 2D or 2D Color.

NOTE:
XXThe following 3D Utility Menu items are enabled in MSV mode: Orientation Dot, Chroma,
4D Cine, Post Processing, Preset.
XXFor more information on 3D Utility, see ‘3D Utility Menu’.

7-102
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Oblique View
After drawing a straight or curved line in the selected image in MSV Mode, you can study the
related oblique image. To do this, follow the procedure below:
1. Select Display Format and then specify the number of oblique images to study.
2. Set the Cut Type.
3. Draw a straight or curved line in a reference image by using the trackball and the Set button.
An oblique image will appear with the start (S) and end (E) points shown.
If the trackball is in Move state, the position of the line can be changed.
4. Optimize the image for observation by using other buttons on the touchscreen.

NOTE:
XXFunctions such as Text and Arrow can be used.
XXWhen Display Format is 2x1, measurement functions such as Calculator and Caliper can
be used.

[Figure 7.33 Oblique View]

7-103
 User Manual

Oblique View Screen

The reference image that is selected in MSV Mode is displayed on the screen. The reference
image is highlighted with blue borders and always placed in the top left corner of the screen.
When more than one line is used for observation, each line is indicated by a different color
and number.
The image information displays the current mode, Ref.Image, Oblique Cut Type, and Plumb
Size (or Slice Thick.).

NOTE: When OVIX is used, the image information also displays OVIX Line Offset, Mix,
Threshold Low, and Render Mode 1, 2.

Direction of View of Oblique Image

Tips!
The observer is located perpendicular to the section of a reference image. Please see the view
direction below:

View Direction

End point Start point

Start point End point View Direction

Display Format
Set the layout of oblique images. Select 2x1, 3x2 or 3x3 by tapping the corresponding button
on the touchscreen. Depending on this setting, the number of oblique images and the Oblique
Cut Type will vary.

7-104
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Cut Type
Specify how images are cut by tapping the corresponding button on the touchscreen.

„„Line
The oblique image of a straight line can be studied.

„„Contour
The oblique image of a curved line or contour line can be studied.

Multi Line & Multi Contour

Tips!
If Display Format is set to 3x2 or 3x3, enable Auto Increment to draw more than one line.

„„Parallel
The oblique image of a straight line and its parallel lines can be studied. If a straight line is
drawn, its parallel lines are automatically shown on the screen.

NOTE: This cannot be used when Display Format is 2x1.

„„Plumb
The oblique image of a straight line and its perpendicular lines can be observed. If a
straight line is drawn, its perpendicular lines are automatically shown on the screen.

NOTE: This cannot be used when Display Format is 2x1.

„„ClearVision
ClearVision removes noise from the image and enhances outlines to help show the image
more clearly. You can select off or adjust the index from 1 to 5 by tapping the touchscreen.

7-105
 User Manual

Image Rotation
Specify the direction of an oblique image. Select 90°, 180° or -90°, by tapping the button on
the screen. Select the oblique image that you wish to change the direction of from Selected
Slice.

Clear Line
Tap the touchscreen to delete an oblique image.

Selected Slice
Use the dial-button to select a line. The oblique image of the selected line is indicated by
white contour.

NOTE: This cannot be used when Display Format is 2x1.

Plumb Size
Use the dial-button to adjust the length of the perpendicular line. The length of the
centermost line may be adjusted by 1mm; its current length is displayed in image
information.

NOTE: This is used only when Cut Type is Plumb.

Slice Thick.
Use the dial-button to adjust the interval between the perpendicular lines. The length
of the centermost line may be adjusted by 1mm; its current length is displayed in image
information.

NOTE: This is used only when Oblique Cut Type is Parallel.

7-106
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Rotate Line
Use the dial-button to rotate a line. When the line is rotated, the oblique image is also
changed accordingly.

NOTE: This cannot be used when:

XXCut Type is Contour; or
XXWhen the Selected Slice is Selected Slice Select All.

OVIX
OVIX is the abbreviation for Oblique View eXtended, which sets the cross-sectional thickness
of an oblique image and shows the image in 3D.
Tap the corresponding button on the touchscreen to turn it on or off. When this is on, an OVIX
Line appears in the reference image, which indicates the cross-sectional thickness of the
oblique image of the reference image.
The thickness of the OVIX Line can be adjusted with OVIX Thick. To change the 3D image
settings, select and adjust Setting or OVIX Post Curve from the 3D Utility Menu.

NOTE: This cannot be used when Cut Type is Contour.

Multi Ovlx
Tips!
This means that the OVIX function is enabled when the Layout value is set to 3×2 or higher in
Oblique View.

OVIX Thick.
Use the dial-button to adjust the thickness of OVIX. The 3D image for the set thickness
appears.

Select
Select Post Curve. Use the dial-button to select 2D, OVIX, 2D Color, or OVIX Color.

7-107
 User Manual

Init
Tap the touchscreen to delete the Oblique image and reset the position information for Ref.
Image.

NOTE:
XXThe following 3D utility menu items are enabled in Oblique View mode:
Orientation Dot, 4D Cine, Post Processing, Render Setup, Chroma, Preset
XXFor more information on 3D Utility, refer to ‘3D Utility Menu’.

[Figure 7.34 Oblique View – Touchscreen]

7-108
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

XI VOCAL
Measure the volume of tissues in 3D XI Mode.

NOTE: XI VOCAL is one of the 3D XI features. It is available as an optional feature of this

product.

[Figure 7.35 XI VOCAL]

VOCAL vs XI VOCAL
Tips!
XXVOCAL: Measures the volume of an object in a general 3D image. Uses rotating slices.
XXXI VOCAL: Measures the volume of an object in the selected reference image in MSV
Mode by using parallel slices. Uses parallel slices. Calculates the volume of an object by
cutting it into multiple slices.

XI VOCAL is performed in the following order: XI VOCAL Define → XI VOCAL Edit → XI VOCAL

7-109
 User Manual

XI VOCAL Define
Specify how slice and contour lines are extracted.
Reference images and slice lines are displayed on the left side of the screen. Slice images with
the start (S) and end (E) points of a slice line are displayed on the right side of the screen.

[Figure 7.36 XI VOCAL Define]

7-110
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Contour Type
Select the contour line type. A contour line is automatically created for all types except
Manual.

„„Solid
Used for object data with many echoes.

„„Cystic
Used for object data with fewer echoes.

„„General
Draw a contour line based on a typical object. This is faster than other automatic contour
types but less accurate.

„„Manual
Create the desired shape of an object manually. A contour line can be specified in the XI
VOCAL Edit screen.

Ref. Image
Tap the corresponding button on the touchscreen to select a reference image from among A,
B, and C. The selected image will be highlighted with blue borders.

„„Ref. Contour
Tap this button on the touchscreen to turn this feature on or off. If it is turned on, a contour
line can be drawn by using the trackball and the Set button.

Slice Direction
Set the direction of a slice line. Select from Vertical or Horizontal by tapping the
corresponding button on the touchscreen. Changing the direction of a slice line also changes
the slice image displayed on the screen.

7-111
 User Manual

Init
When you tap the touchscreen, the position information of the 3D image is initialized.

Next
Tap the touchscreen to switch to the XI VOCAL Edit screen.

NOTE: If Contour Type is set to Manual, the system switches to the XI VOCAL screen when
Next is pressed.

# of Slices
Specify the number of slice images. Use the dial-button to select 5, 10, 15, or 20. Depending on
the selected number of images, the interval between slices will vary.

[Figure 7.37 XI VOCAL Define – Touchscreen]

7-112
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

XI VOCAL Edit
Specify the contour extraction range or run XI VOCAL.
Based on slice lines, slice images and pole points will be displayed on the screen. A pole point is
a reference point against which an object contour is extracted. Two pole points appear in each
slice image.
The selected slice image is highlighted with blue borders. ‘The image number/the total number
of slice images’ is shown at the bottom of each image.

Reference Image and Slice Line

Tips!
These always appear in the bottom right corner of the XI VOCAL Edit screen. They can be
useful when the position of a slice image needs to be considered.

[Figure 7.38 XI VOCAL Edit]

Ref. Page
Use the dial-button to change the screen page.

New Contour
Tap the corresponding button on the touchscreen to delete the current data and return to the
XI VOCAL Define stage.

7-113
 User Manual

Accept Contour
Tap the button on the touchscreen to apply changes and run XI VOCAL. The system will switch
to the XI VOCAL screen.

When Contour Type is Set to Manual

Tips!
Use the Set button and the trackball to draw a contour line before pressing Accept Contour.
If you press Accept Contour without drawing a contour line, a general type contour line will
be extracted.

[Figure 7.39 XI VOCAL Edit – Touchscreen]

7-114
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

XI VOCAL
Optimize XI VOCAL data for review.
Slice images with their contour line shown and 3D reference images are displayed. The 3D
reference image is highlighted with blue borders, and the calculated volume is shown at the
bottom of the image.

3D Reference Image
Tips!
Use XI VOCAL to display an object for which volume has been obtained in 3D. Use the Zoom,
M/x, PW/y or Color/z dial-buttons on the control panel to zoom or rotate for observation.

View All Slices

Tap this button on the touchscreen to turn this feature on or off. If it is turned on, all XI
VOCAL data – including reference image, slice line and slice image – will be displayed
simultaneously on the screen.

Edit Contour
Tap the touchscreen to return to the XI VOCAL Edit screen. You can edit the contour line by
using the trackball and the Set button.

[Figure 7.40 XI VOCAL – Touchscreen]

7-115
 User Manual

XI STIC
This option can be used to obtain the fetal cardiac cycle with volume data on the fetal cardiac
area, and to recompile the volume data for display. STIC is an abbreviation for Spatio-Temporal
Image Correlation.

NOTE:
XXXI STIC is an optional feature of this product.
XXXI STIC is only available when 3D probes are used.
XXThis only appears when the Application is set to OB.
XXWhen you enter 3D Standby in Fetal Heart Preset, the system will automatically switch to
STIC.

[Figure 7.41 XI STIC]

7-116
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Acquiring XI STIC Images

1. Select the XI STIC tab in the 3D Stand By screen on the touchscreen.
2. Set the various parameters as you would for acquisition of standard 3D images.
3. Press the Freeze or Set button on the control panel. The system will begin acquiring 3D
images.
4. When image acquisition is complete, XI STIC is displayed on the monitor screen and the XI
STIC Confirm screen appears on the touchscreen. Check the fetal cardiac cycle calculated.
5. Tap Yes on the touchscreen to continue. Tap No to cancel and acquire the images again.
6. You can perform diagnosis by optimizing images.

NOTE: If the motion artifacting is severe, data does not contain the cardiac cycle, or the heart
rate cannot be calculated for any other reason, you will be returned to the XI STIC image
preparation screen.

To Obtain Superior STIC Volume Data

Tips!
XXVolume Angle: If the size of the fetal heart is small, use a smaller Volume Angle.
XXROI Position: Adjust the scan position so that the center of the Volume Angle and the
fetal heart are aligned properly.
XXROI Box: Adjust the size of the volume box so that it nearly fits the size of the fetal heart.

Volume Angle
Set the scan angle. Select a value from 10 to 60 by using the dial-button.

Scan Time
Set the image acquisition time. Use the dial-button to select from 7 to 15 seconds.

7-117
 User Manual

Trimester
Set the pregnancy trimester. Use the dial-button to select 1st, 2nd, or 3rd.

Trimester
Tips!
If 1st-3rd are selected, the recommended scan time and STIC angle are automatically set for
the specified trimester. Please see the following table:

Trimester 1st 2nd 3rd

Scan Time 10 seconds 12 seconds 15 seconds

Volume Angle 20˚ 25˚ 30˚

If a scan time and Volume Angle other than those in the above table are set, the trimester is
displayed as User Set.

NOTE: For information on other usage, please refer to ‘3D Stand By’ section.

Reviewing XI STIC Image

XI STIC image is played as a Volume Cine; on the left side of the screen XI STIC information
including HR, Scan Time, Img. Angle, Vol. Angle, and Volume Index are displayed.

NOTE: During Volume Cine, only MPR, MSV, and Oblique View Modes are available.

Press the Freeze button on the control panel to stop Volume Cine playback.

Speed
Select the playback speed for XI STIC images. Use the dial-button to select Very Slow, Slow,
Normal, Fast, or Fastest. This rate is based on the fetal heart rate (100%).

7-118
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Vol. Index
Use the dial-button to select an Index.

NOTE:
XXThis option is only available when Freeze is enabled.
XXRefer to 3D View-MPR and 3D XI for further information on its use.

[Figure 7.42 XI STIC – Touchscreen]

7-119
 User Manual

3D MXI
NOTE:
XX3D MXI (Mirror View, Volume Slice) is an optional feature of HS60/XH60.
XX3D MXI is only available when 3D probes are used.

Mirror View
3D images can be viewed in multiple directions. The Mirror View screen appears on the
touchscreen.

NOTE: If you press Mirror View in modes other than Render Mode, Mirror View will start after
the mode switches to Render Mode. Therefore, the settings configured in Render Mode will
be applied to Mirror View images.

„„Mirror View Screen

The front, top, left and right sides of a 3D image are displayed on the screen. In addition, a
reference image appears in the upper right corner of the screen, indicating the direction of
images.
1 Reference image for Mirror View
2 Image that views the reference image from the left side
3 Image that views the reference image from the top
4 Image that views the reference image from the right side
5 Reference image indicating the direction of each image

7-120
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

5
3

2 4

[Figure 7.43 Mirror View]

„„Trackball State
The current state of the trackball is displayed at the bottom of the monitor screen. You can
use the trackball's features by selecting Pointer, Move, or ROI. Press the Change button on
the control panel to change the trackball state. The trackball state changes sequentially
each time the button is pressed.
XXMove: You can move a 3D image with the trackball. The acquired 3D image moves as
you move the trackball.
XXROI: You can resize the ROI box with the trackball. The ROI box on the 3D image is
resized as you move the trackball.
XXPointer: You can re-adjust the position of the ROI box. Pressing the Pointer button on
the control panel switches to the Pointer state. You can resize an image or the ROI box
in this state. Press the Change button again to switch to another state.

7-121
 User Manual

„„Center View
Select an image by pressing the button on the touchscreen. The selected image will be
displayed as the front image. Select Top, Left, or Right.

„„Display Format
When you press this button on the touchscreen, the front image is displayed in full screen.

NOTE: ‘Center View’ cannot be changed when Display Format is set to Single.

„„Position
Set the position of the post curve. Select a value from 0 to 100 by pressing the button on
the touchscreen or using the dial-button.

„„Bias
Set the bias of the post curve. Select a value from -100 to 100 by pressing a button on the
touchscreen or using the dial-button.

„„Transparency
Set the transparency of a 3D image. Select a value from 20 to 250 by pressing the button
on the touchscreen or using the dial-button.
The lowest value (20) is for complete transparency, and the highest value (250) is for
complete opacity.

„„Mix
Configure the mix of Render modes 1 and 2. Select a value from 0:100 to 100:0(%) by
pressing the button on the touchscreen or using the dial-button.

„„Th.Low
Specify the minimum threshold range. Select a value from 0 to 254 by pressing the button
on the touchscreen or using the dial-button.
When you press this button on the touchscreen, the front image is displayed in full screen.

7-122
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Init
Resets the position information of the image.

NOTE: To reset the settings except for the position information, press Preset and then
Default.

Performing Mirror View Again

Tips!
To perform Mirror View again based on a certain Mirror View image:
1. While the trackball is in Pointer mode, use the trackball and the Set button to select a
Mirror View image.
2. Double-click the selected Mirror View image. Mirror View will be performed again based
on the selected image. The selected image will be displayed as the front image.

[Figure 7.44 Mirror View – Touchscreen]

7-123
 User Manual

Volume Slice
Volume data can be viewed in multiple slices. The Volume Slice screen appears on the
touchscreen.

NOTE: If you press Volume Slice in modes other than Render Mode, Volume Slice will start
after the mode switches to Render Mode. Therefore, the settings configured in Render Mode
will be applied to Volume Slice images.

MSV vs. Volume Slice

Tips!
MSV allows you to divide a 3D image into multiple slices that can then be viewed in 2D
images. On the other hand, Volume Slice lets you view slice images in 3D. Volume Slice also
allows you to adjust the settings of each slice image separately.

„„Volume Slice Screen

Nine images are displayed on the screen. In the center row, reference images are displayed
in order of 2D, 3D, and OH. In the remaining rows, Volume Slice images created based on
those reference images are displayed.
On the 3D reference image and the Volume Slice images, the ROI position and slice
numbers are displayed. On the 2D reference image, the ROI box and slice line are
displayed.

[Figure 7.45 Volume Slice]

Slice Number
Tips!
Because three slice images are created before and after each reference image, the slices are
numbered from -3 to 3.

7-124
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Ref. Image
Press the button on the touchscreen to select a reference image among A, B, and C. The
selected image is displayed in 2D Image.
XXA: Axial Section
XXB: Sagittal Section
XXC: Coronal Section

„„3D Rotation
Set the orientation of a Volume Slice image. Select -90, 90, or 180 by pressing the button
on the touchscreen.

„„Slice Thick.
Specify the slice line thickness. Make a selection by pressing the button on the
touchscreen or using the dial-button. The Volume Slice images are updated according to
the setting.

7-125
 User Manual

„„Selected Slice
Select a slice line. Select a value from -3 to 3 by pressing the button on the touchscreen or
using the dial-button. The selected slice line can also be found on the 2D reference image.
In addition, the Volume Slice image corresponding to the selected slice line is highlighted
with an orange border.

NOTE: For more information on other menu items, please refer to the menu in ‘3D Mode’
section.

Performing Volume Slice Again

Tips!
To perform Volume Slice again based on a certain Volume Slice image:
1. While the trackball is in Pointer Mode, use the trackball and the Set button to select a
Volume Slice image.
2. Double-click the selected Volume Slice image. Volume Slice will be performed again
based on the selected image. The selected image will appear as the reference image.

[Figure 7.46 Volume Slice – Touchscreen]

7-126
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Post Processing
The Post Processing screen is displayed on the touchscreen.

[Figure 7.47 Post Processing – Touchscreen]

„„Gradient Mask
Adjust the brightness of a specific area in an image. Make a selection by tapping the
corresponding button on the touchscreen.

„„Flip Image
Inverts the position of an image.

NOTE: This option is only available in MSV Mode.

Tap the image on the touchscreen and flip the image left and right or up and down.

„„Clear SFVI
Press the button on the touchscreen to turn this On or Off. The touchscreen switches to
the Post Processing screen. Turning it on reduces noise.
SFVI stands for Smart Filter Volume Imaging.

7-127
 User Manual

„„Detailed SFVI
Press the button on the touchscreen to turn this on or off. The touchscreen switches to the
Post Processing screen. When this is turned On, select a value from 0 to 100 by using the
Strength dial-button on the touchscreen.

„„VC
Press the VC button to turn this on or off. When this is turned on, use the dial-button to
select a value from 1 to 5. VC stands for Volume Compound.

„„Negative
Tap this button on the touchscreen to turn this feature on or off. If it is turned on, the
brightness of an image will be inverted.

„„Auto Contrast
Tap this button on the touchscreen to turn this feature on or off. If it is turned on, the
contrast of an image will be adjusted automatically.

„„Threshold
Tap this button on the touchscreen to turn this feature on or off. If it is turned on, the
Th.Low or Th.High dial-buttons can be used to adjust the threshold.

„„Sharpen
Tap this button on the touchscreen to turn this feature on or off. If it is turned on, the
boundary of an image will become more apparent. Select a value from 100 to 400 by using
the Sharpen dial-button.

„„3D CI
Tap this button on the touchscreen to turn this feature on or off. 3D CI is an abbreviation
for 3D Compound Imaging.
If set to On, images are compounded to reduce noise and enhance image quality. Use the
3D CI Offset dial-button to select a value from 1 to 10 as the distance between images used
for 3D CI.

7-128
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

MagiCut
The MagiCut screen is displayed on the touchscreen. You can cut the parts that are not
relevant to diagnosis away from 3D images. Set the area to cut by using the trackball and the
Set button.

NOTE:
XXSelect this in MPR mode.
XXIf MagiCut is enabled, Accept ROI is turned on automatically.
XXAfter MagiCut is enabled, if the system is switched to a mode other than MPR Mode,
MagiCut is disabled.

„„Mode
Set how parts are cut by tapping the corresponding button on the touchscreen.
XXInside Contour: Cuts the inside of the selected area.
XXOutside Contour: Cuts the outside of the selected area.
XXInside Box: Cuts the inside of the box.
XXOutside Box: Cuts the outside of the box.
XXSmall Eraser: Cuts the selected contour line.
XXBig Eraser: Cuts the selected contour line. This uses a thicker contour line than Small
Eraser.

„„Full Depth
Tap the corresponding button on the touchscreen to turn Full Depth on or off. If it is turned
on, the entire area will be cut. If it is turned off, Depth will appear on the touchscreen.

„„Depth
Set the cut depth. Use the dial-button to select a value from 1 to 100.

7-129
 User Manual

„„Undo
Cancel the previous task(s).
XXUndo: Cancel the last task.
XXUndo All: Cancel all tasks that have been done so far.

„„SmoothCut Mode
XXErase Small: Erases areas clicked and dragged with the trackball.
XXErase Big: Erases a larger area.
XXRecovery Small: Restores the volume image in a desired area.
XXRecovery Big: Restores the image in a larger area.

„„Mix
Configure the mix of Render modes 1 and 2. Use the dial-button to select a ratio from
0:100(%) to 100:0(%).

„„Th.Low
Specify the minimum range of Threshold. Use the dial-button to select a value from
0 to 254.

[Figure 7.48 MagiCut – Touchscreen]

7-130
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Realistic Vue
Semi-translucent rendering is used for a realistic display of fetal images. When you press the
Realistic Vue button, Clear SFVI, HDVI, and VC are turned on.

NOTE:
XXRealistic Vue is an optional feature of this product.
XXHDVI is an optional feature of this product and only available for HS60/XH60.

„„Light Direction
Use the touchscreen or the trackball to reposition the direction of the light that is applied
to volume.

NOTE: You need to press the Move Light button to enter trackball mode.

„„Set Color
Use the dial-button to select the Set Color applied to Realistic Vue.

NOTE: You can set color by using the Hue, Saturation, and Lightness dial-buttons

[Figure 7.49 Realistic Vue Setup – Touchscreen]

7-131
 User Manual

Crystal Vue
It renders the context information on the user-defined area.

NOTE:
XXCrystal Vue is an optional feature of HS60/XH60.
XXAvailable in MPR Mode only.
XXIt is available in the Gray Mode tab in the Render Setup screen ((Render Mode1: Surface,
Render Mode2: Surface Smooth) and (Render Mode1: Surface, Render Mode2: VSI)).
It is available in the Inversion Mode tab in the Render Setup screen ((Render Mode1:
Surface, Render Mode2: Surface Smooth) and (Render Mode1: Surface, Render Mode2:
VSI)).
XXRealistic Vue Setup can be executed in Crystal Vue.

„„Crystal Vue Set up

Press the button on the touchscreen to select this option.

„„Context
Renders the volume data of the selected context for regions such as heart, spine, ventricle,
umbilical cord, liver, long bone, and follicle.

„„ROI Contour
The context information is displayed as rendered images for the user-defined areas only;
for other areas, only the surface information is displayed.

„„ROI Circle
The user selects a circular area for which the context information should be displayed. The
context information is displayed as rendered images for the user-defined circular area
only; for the other areas, only the surface information is displayed.

„„Strength
Select a Strength value from 0 to 100 by pressing the touchscreen or using the dial-button.
At higher Strength values, the context information becomes clearly visible and turns
opaque. At higher Strength values, the image has a wider range of complexity.

7-132
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Complexity
Select a Complexity value from 0 to 600 by pressing the touchscreen or using the dial-
button. If the Complexity value is 0, only the surface information is displayed; at higher
Complexity values, however, the context information is shown as rendered images.

„„Crystal Vue Transparency

Select a value from 20 to 250 by pressing the button on the touchscreen or using the dial-
button. The lowest value (20) is for complete transparency, and the highest value (250) is
for complete opacity.

„„Circle Type
In this mode, select ROI Circle and resize the circular area for which the context
information should be displayed. Use the dial-button to select Small, Medium, or Large.

[Figure 7.50 Crystal Vue Setup – Touchscreen]

7-133
 User Manual

Chroma
The Chroma Map screen is displayed on the touchscreen. Set the color of 2D and 3D images by
tapping the corresponding button on the touchscreen.

[Figure 7.51 Chroma Map – Touchscreen]

7-134
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Preset
The Preset screen appears on the touchscreen. You can set the currently selected Preset or
rename the Rendering Preset. Default is the default value of the system.

[Figure 7.52 Preset – Touchscreen]

„„Default
Use the default setting (General Preset) for the probe.

„„Load
When you tap this button on the touchscreen, the currently selected Preset is applied to
the system. Then the Preset screen is closed.

„„Save
Tap Save. When you tap this button on the touchscreen, the current Preset is saved.

„„Rename
Change the name of the selected Rendering Preset. When you tap this button on the
touchscreen, the Name screen appears. After changing the name, tap Save to save the
changed name. Tap Close to cancel the change.

„„Reset
When you tap this button on the touchscreen, the Preset is reset to its default value.

7-135
 User Manual

5D NT
This feature locates the Mid-Sagittal View and measures the thickness of the nuchal
translucency (NT) of the fetus. The 5D NT window appears on the touchscreen.
Use the trackball to place NT Seed in NT area, and press the Set button to display the NT
measurement on the A Plane.

NOTE:
XX5D NT is an optional feature of this product.
XXThese options are only available in MPR mode.

How To get good results

Tips!
XXYou can get better results when the Sagittal View of the fetus is captured as accurately as
possible.
XXThe higher the contrast between the fetus's palate and nasal bone, the better.
XXIt is preferable to have the lateral direction of the probe be parallel to the body
orientation of the fetus.
XXIt is preferable to have the probe's angle to the fetus's nasal bone as close to 30 degrees
as possible.

7-136
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„NT Caliper Placement

Tap the touchscreen to select the NT measurement type.
XXOn to On: Measure by placing the cursor on the NT’s inner-inner.

Cursor

XXOn to Max Brightness: One side of the cursor is placed on the outside of the NT, and
measurement is taken with inner-outer. This method is used when Harmonic is used
and one side of the nuchal translucency is blurred.

Cursor

XXIn to In: Similar to On to On, this method takes measurement with inner-inner, albeit
with a narrower cursor interval.

Cursor

„„Items
XXNT: The acquired A, B, and C plane images and the automatically measured NT are
displayed in the 3D View screen.
XXIT: Locates mid-sagittal view and tests the fetus for spina bifida.

7-137
 User Manual

„„Assign
Tap the touchscreen to include the selected items in the OB report.

„„5D NT
This function helps the user to easily see the NT measurement process. This assigns a
certain thickness to A, B and C sections of the image and displays 3D Rendering image.

„„Init
The image’s position information is reset.

„„Hide All
Pressing this button will hide the marker and the measurements for NT and IT from the
screen.

„„Auto
Tap the corresponding button on the touchscreen to turn this feature on or off. If set to On,
automatically locates Mid-Sagittal View. To calculate NT, place the cursor on NT area and
press the Set button on the control panel.

„„Edit
Edit markers for each item that is displayed as a result.
If the trackball’s state is Cursor, move the cursor near a + marker.
Press the Set button and move the trackball to edit the marker as desired.

„„ROI Height
Use the dial-button to adjust the ROI Line’s Height to define the scope of the application.
The ROI Height may be adjusted while measurements are being taken or in Edit mode.

„„Marker Size
Tap on the touchscreen or use the dial-button to select Small, Medium, or Large.

7-138
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

5D Follicle

NOTE: 5D Follicle is an optional feature of this product.

This feature assists with diagnosis by estimating the size and volume of a follicle in the ovary.
Tap this button on the touchscreen to switch to the 5D Follicle screen. Press Exit to finish 5D
Follicle.
Run 5D Follicle, and the touchscreen will switch to the 5D Follicle screen.
1. Specify the position of scanning. Use the Position dial-button on the touchscreen to select
between Left Ovary and Right Ovary.
2. Select a measurement method.
XXAuto: The follicle is located and measured automatically.
XXManual: The user manually locates and measures the follicle.
3. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen. The scanned parts are
color-coded and numbered.

[Figure 7.53 5D Follicle]

7-139
 User Manual

Editing Results
Edit the results of measurement. Tap Edit on the touchscreen to turn on or off. Select a task
you need to perform by pressing the Change button on the control panel or by tapping the
button on the touchscreen.
In Edit Mode, the Single and Quad options of Display Format will be disabled.

„„Slice Review
An image can be viewed in multiple slices. You can search for follicles that have not been
found yet.

„„Delete
Delete the detected target.
1. Select Delete by pressing the Change button on the control panel or by tapping the
button on the touchscreen.
2. Use the Set button to click the target.
3. The selected target will be deleted from the image and the results table.

„„Add Seed
A measurement target will be added based on the seed positions entered by the user. Use
this if you find an undetected follicle.
1. Select Add Seed by pressing the Change button on the control panel or by tapping the
button on the touchscreen.
2. Click the discovered target by using the Set button and then use Growth to specify its
size.
3. The specified size will be calculated again and displayed in the results table.

7-140
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

„„Add Contour
A measurement target will be added based on the Contours entered by the user. Use this if
you find an undetected follicle.
1. Select Add Contour by pressing the Change button on the control panel or by tapping
the button on the touchscreen.
2. Using the Set button, specify the contour for the detected target.
3. The specified size will be calculated again and displayed in the results table.

„„Growth
Specify the size of the target to measure. Tap the Increase ( ) or Decrease ( ) button on
the touchscreen to adjust the size.
In Edit Mode, the button will be enabled only when an additional Follicle is manually
detected using Add Seed or Add Contour.

„„Assign
Measurement results will be saved to the report.

[Figure 7.54 5D Follicle Edit – Touchscreen]

7-141
 User Manual

5D Heart Color
This feature assists with diagnosis of fetal heart conditions by using the STIC data of the fetus.

NOTE:
XX5D Heart Color is an optional feature of HS60/XH60.
XX5D Heart is only available in the following circumstances.
–– 3D probe
–– Application: OB

Acquiring 5D Heart Color Images

NOTE: If the motion artifact is severe or the heart rate cannot be calculated due to reasons
such as missing cardiac cycle data, you will be returned to the initial 5D Heart screen.

1. Select the 5D Heart tab on the 3D Stand By screen on the touchscreen.

2. Configure various parameters on the touchscreen.
XXRendering Preset: Select a preset for 3D images. For more information, please refer to
‘Preset’ in the ‘3D View-MPR Mode’ section.

Rendering Preset
Tips!
The selected preset will be maintained in XI STIC. However, the preset will be reset if you
move to the 3D or 4D tab.
You cannot change the preset after acquiring a 3D image.

NOTE: For information on the remaining items, please refer to ‘XI STIC’.

3. Specify the location where you will acquire images.

STIC Volume Data

Tips!
The standard view acquired using 5D Heart Color is affected by the quality of obtained STIC
data. Follow the guide displayed on the left side of the screen to adjust the location where
you will acquire images.

7-142
 Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

4. Press the Freeze or Set button on the control panel. The system will begin acquiring 3D
images.
XXBreech Sweep: You can also scan a breech baby from its head to abdomen without
changing the probe direction.
5. Since a fetus moves frequently, if it is in an ideal position during a cardiac scan, you can
choose to resume scanning immediately after saving data in order to obtain as much data
as possible. Users can press the following buttons on the touchscreen:
XX5D Heart Color Acquisition
–– Save: Saves acquired data and returns to 3D Stand by Mode.
–– Discard: Returns to 3D Stand by Mode without saving invalid data resulted from the
fetus movement.
–– Process: After saving acquired data, enters 5D Heart Mode with the scanned data.

NOTE: If no Patient ID has been created, pressing the Save or Process button will open
the Patient screen. In this case, selecting the Cancel button will not delete the data; it will
function like the Process button.

7-143
Chapter 8
Measurements

‹‹Measurement Accuracy.......................... 8-3

Causes of Measurement Errors............................. 8-3
Optimization of Measurement Accuracy............. 8-5
Measurement Accuracy Table............................... 8-7

‹‹Basic Measurements............................... 8-9

Distance Measurement........................................ 8-13
Circumference and Area Measurement.............8-23
Volume Measurement.......................................... 8-26

‹‹Measurements by Application............. 8-29

Things to Note........................................................8-29
Common Measurement Methods.......................8-33
OB Measurements ................................................ 8-37
Fetal Heart Measurements..................................8-46
Gynecology Measurements.................................8-49
Cardiac Measurements......................................... 8-52
Abdomen Measurements....................................8-66
Pediatric Hips Measurements.............................8-68
Urology Measurements........................................ 8-70
Small Parts Measurements..................................8-71
Musculoskeletal Measurements........................ 8-75
Vascular Measurements....................................... 8-76
Chapter 8
‹‹Reports...................................................8-85
Viewing Reports ...................................................8-85
Report Preview......................................................8-86
Editing Report (Worksheet)................................8-89
Adding Comments................................................8-92
Print Reports..........................................................8-94
Saving Reports.......................................................8-94
Store SR...................................................................8-95
Images.....................................................................8-95
OB Graph................................................................. 8-97
Description........................................................... 8-102
Closing Reports...................................................8-104
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Accuracy
Measurement values can vary depending on the nature of the ultrasound wave, the body’s
response to ultrasound waves, the measurement tools, algorithms, product settings, probe type,
and the actions performed by the user.
Before using this product, make sure to read and understand the following information
regarding the causes of measurement errors, and measurement optimization.

Causes of Measurement Errors

Image Resolution
The resolution of an ultrasound image may be limited by spatial causes.
XXErrors caused by signal range may be minimized by adjusting the focus settings.
Optimizing the focus settings increases the resolution of the measurement area.
XXIn general, the lateral resolution is lower than the axial resolution. Therefore,
measurements should be performed along the axis of the ultrasound beam to obtain
accurate values.
XXGain has a direct impact on the resolution. Gain can be adjusted by using the Gain button
for each mode.
XXIn general, increasing the frequency of ultrasound enhances resolution.

Pixel Size
XXThis product’s ultrasound images consist of pixels.
XXSince a single pixel represents the basic unit of an image, a measurement error may result
in the displacement of approximately ±1 pixel when compared to the original image size.
XXHowever, this error becomes significant only when a narrow area in an image is measured.

8-3
 User Manual

Ultrasound Velocity
XXThe average velocity of ultrasound used for measurement is usually 1,540 m/s.
XXThe velocity of ultrasound used varies depending on the cell type.
XXThe possible range of error is approximately 2-5% depending on the structure of cells
(about 2% for typical cells and about 5% for fatty cells).

Doppler Signal Adjustment

XXDuring velocity measurement, an error may occur, depending on the cosine angle between
the blood flow and the ultrasound beam.
XXFor Doppler velocity measurements, the most accurate results can be ensured by aligning
the ultrasound beam in parallel with the blood flow.
XXIf that is not possible, the angle between them should be adjusted by using the Angle
option.

Aliasing
XXPW Spectral Doppler Mode uses a signal sampling technique to calculate the frequency (or
velocity) spectrum.
XXAdjust the baseline or the velocity scale to minimize aliasing. A lower frequency probe can
also be used to reduce aliasing.

Calculation Equation
XXSome of the calculation equations used for clinical purposes originate from hypotheses
and approximation.
XXAll calculation equations are based on medical reports and articles.

Human Error
XXHuman error may occur due to inappropriate use or lack of experience.
XXThis can be minimized through compliance with and thorough understanding of the
manuals.

8-4
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Optimization of Measurement Accuracy

2D Mode
XXResolution is in proportion to the frequency of the probe.
XXPenetration is inversely proportional to the frequency of the probe.
XXThe highest resolution can be obtained at the focus of the probe where the ultrasound
beam is narrowest.
XXThe most accurate measurements can be obtained at the focus depth. As the distance
from the focus increases, the beam width increases, which results in lower accuracy.
XXUsing the zoom function or minimizing the depth display makes distance or area
measurements more accurate.

M Mode
XXThe accuracy of time measurements can be increased by setting the sweep velocity and
the display format to higher values.
XXThe accuracy of distance measurements can be increased by setting the display format to
a higher value.

Doppler Mode
XXUsing lower frequency ultrasound is recommended for measurement of faster blood flows.
XXThe size of the sample volume is limited by the axial direction of the ultrasound.
XXUsing lower frequency ultrasound increases penetration.
XXThe accuracy of time measurements can be increased when the sweep velocity is
increased.
XXThe accuracy of velocity measurements can be increased when the vertical scale is set to
smaller values.
XXIt is most important to use an optimal Doppler angle to enhance the accuracy of velocity
measurements.

8-5
 User Manual

Color/Power Doppler Mode

XXA protocol has not been specified for images in Color Doppler Mode or Power Doppler
Mode. Therefore, the same limitations imposed on measurements taken in B/W images
also apply to the accuracy of measurements taken in Color Doppler and Power Doppler
Modes.
XXUsing Color/Power Doppler Mode images to measure accurate blood flow velocity is not
recommended.
XXThe amount of blood flow is calculated based on the average velocity rather than the peak
velocity.
XXIn all applications, the amount of blood flow is measured in PW Spectral Doppler mode.

Cursor Position
XXAll measurements are affected by input data.
XXAdjust the images on the screen so that they are displayed at maximum granularity.
XXUse the front edge or boundary point of a probe to make the start and end points of a
measurement object more distinct.
XXMake sure that the probe direction remains aligned during measurement.

8-6
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Accuracy Table

The following tables show the accuracy of the measurements that can be taken using this
product. Ensure that the results of measurement accuracy checks are kept within the ranges
specified in the table. Except for certain applications or probes, the following accuracy ranges
should be maintained for measurement of distance on a straight line.

NOTE: In case of doubt in the measurements, please contact your local Samsung Medison
Service Department for an accuracy test.

2D Mode
Accuracy Test Accuracy
Measurements Range
(Whichever is Greater) Methodology Based on

Axial Distance < ± 4% or 1 mm Phantom Acquisition Full Screen

Lateral Distance < ± 4% or 2 mm Phantom Acquisition Full Screen

Area < ± 8% or 4 mm2 Measurement Equation Full Screen

Volume < ± 12% or 8 mm3 Measurement Equation Full Screen

Angle < ± 4% or 1° Measurement Equation Full Screen

M Mode
Accuracy Test Accuracy
Measurements Range
(Whichever is Greater) Methodology Based on

Time < ± 5% or 1 ms Signal Generator Acquisition 0.01 – 11.3 sec

Slope < ± 8% or 4 mm/ms Measurement Equation Full Screen

8-7
 User Manual

PW/CW Spectral Doppler Mode

Doppler Accuracy Test Accuracy
Test Range
Measurements (Whichever is Greater) Methodology Based on

PW: 30, 50, 70, 90 cm/sec

Velocity < ± 15% Phantom Acquisition
CW: 110 cm/sec

Signal
Time < ± 5% Acquisition 10 ms – 9.44 s
Generator

Heart Rate < ± 5% or 1 bpm Measurement Equation 1 – 43,200 bpm

Tips! Accuracy of ±1 least significant displayed digit (e.g. XX.X will be ±0.1mm, XX% will be ±1%)

8-8
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Basic Measurements
Press the Caliper button on the control panel.

NOTE: Take basic measurements of distance and area regardless of the application. For
information on measurements for each application, please refer to the ‘Measurements by
Application’ section of this chapter.

The available measurement methods vary depending on the current Operation modes. Please
refer to the following table:

Measurement Category Operation Modes Measurement Method

Distance
Trace Length
Open Spline
2D, M, D
3 Points Angle
2 Lines Angle
%Stenosis(D)

Distance(M)
Slope
M
HR(M)
Time(M)

Distance measurement Velocity

Accel
RI
Manual Trace
Limited Trace
HR(D)
D
VolumeFlow(D)
VolumeFlow(A)
Time(D)
Auto Trace
S/D Ratio
D/S Ratio

8-9
 User Manual

Measurement Category Operation Modes Measurement Method

Ellipse
Circumference and Area Trace
2D, M, D
measurement Closed Spline
%Stenosis(A)

1 Dist. Volume
2 Dist. Volume
3 Dist. Volume
Volume measurement 2D, M, D
Ellipse Volume
Ellipse + Dist.Vol
Disk Volume

[Table 8.1 Basic Measurements by Operation Modes]

Basic Measurement Operations

The following is the information on common button operations for basic measurements:

„„Selecting/Changing Measurement Method

Select a measurement method using the touchscreen. The menu items that can be
selected on the touchscreen vary according to the Operation modes. The selected
measurement method is displayed in the User Information area.

„„Adjusting Font Size

Go to Setup > Measurement > General > Result > Font Size and either enter the font size
to be used in the measurement results, or use the ‘Font Size’ knob button to select a
desirable size from 8 to 20.

8-10
 Chapter 8 Measurements

„„Canceling Measurement Results

Delete Last: Tap Delete Last on the touchscreen to delete the last measurement taken.
The value displayed on the corresponding application report will also be deleted.

„„Specifying the Measurement Result Position

Place the pointer over the measurement and press the Set button. Use the trackball to
move the measurement to the desired location, and press the Set button to place the
movement at that location.

„„Resetting Measurement Result Position

Go to Setup > Measurement > General Page, and change the value for Position on 2D Mode
or Position On M/D in Result to reset the position of the measurement results as desired.

NOTE: You may select Left-Top, Left-Bottom, Right-Bottom, Right-Top, or Custom.

„„Deleting Measurement Results

Clear: Tap Clear on the control panel or the touchscreen to delete the measurement.

„„Printing Measurement Results

Press the established U Key with the Store/Print button on the control panel.

NOTE: Go to Setup > Customize > Buttons and choose a button to set as Store/Print from the
U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 and U6 buttons.

8-11
 User Manual

„„Exiting Basic Measurement

After completing (or canceling) all in-progress measurements, press the Exit button on
the control panel.

NOTE: To change measurement units and other settings, select Setup > Measurement >
General on the keyboard. For more information, refer to ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’ in this manual.

[Figure 8.1 Caliper]

8-12
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Distance Measurement

Distance
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Specify two points on a
2D image and measure the length of the straight line between the points.
1. Select Distance on the monitor or touchscreen. Use the trackball and the Set button on the
control panel to specify the end points of the measurement.
Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and then press the Set button.

Repositioning a Point
Tips!
Instead of pressing the Set button to confirm the point position, you can press the Change
button to reset it.

2. Specify both end points and then the distance between them will be measured.
3. When the distance has been measured, the result is shown on the screen.

Trace Length
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Specify a point on a 2D
image and trace a curve from that point to measure its length.
1. Select Trace Length on the monitor or touchscreen. Use the trackball and the Set button
on the control panel to specify the start point of the measurement.
Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and then press the Set button.
2. Use the trackball to draw the desired curve and then press the Set button to set the end
point.
3. Specify both end points and then the length of the curve will be measured.

Editing Curves
Tips!
Before specifying the end point by pressing the Set button, you can delete part of the curve
being traced by rotating the soft menu dial-button 5 counter-clockwise. To restore the
deleted curve, rotate the dial-button clockwise.

8-13
 User Manual

Open Spline
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Specify mulle points on
a 2D image to measure the length of the resulting Open Spline curve.
1. Select Open Spline on the monitor or touchscreen. Use the trackball and the Set button
on the control panel to specify as many points as desired. After specifying the last point of
the Open Spline, press the Set button twice to finish measuring the Open Spline.
At least two points must be specified before the Open Spline can be measured.
2. The length of the Open Spline curve created with the points you have specified will be
calculated and displayed on screen.

3 Points Angle
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Place three points on a
2D image and measure the angle formed by the points.
1. Tap 3 Points Angle on the touchscreen.
2. Specify three points.
3. The angle formed by the three points will be calculated and displayed on the screen.

2 Lines Angle
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Specify two straight
lines on a 2D image to measure the angle between the two lines.
1. Tap 2 Lines Angle on the touchscreen.
2. Draw two straight lines. Refer to ‘Distance’ for instructions on how to draw a straight line.
3. The angle between two lines will be calculated and displayed on the screen.
When two angles are calculated, the smaller angle is displayed.

8-14
 Chapter 8 Measurements

%Stenosis(D)
StD stands for Stenosis Distance, which is a basic measurement available in all Operation
modes. The diameter of a blood vessel is measured on a 2D image to calculate its stenosis
ratio (%).
1. Select %Stenosis(D) on the monitor or touchscreen.
2. Measure the total diameter of a blood vessel using the Distance measurement method.
3. When the second cursor appears, measure the diameter of the vessel’s inner wall under
stenosis.
4. Calculate %StD using the following equation:
%Stenosis(D) = (Outer Distance – Inner Distance) / Outer Distance x 100

Distance(M)
This is a basic measurement that is only available in M mode. Specify two points on an M
image, and measure the distance between the two points
1. Select Distance(M) on the monitor or touchscreen. Specify two points and measure the
length of the straight line between the points. This measurement is taken in the same way
as ‘Distance’.
2. When the distance has been measured, the result is shown on the screen.

Slope
This is a basic measurement that is only available in M mode. Specify two points on an M
image, and measure the velocity between the two points
1. Select Slope on the monitor or touchscreen.
2. Specify two points and measure the length of the straight line between the points. This
measurement is taken in the same way as ‘Distance’.
3. When the distance has been measured, the result is shown on the screen.

8-15
 User Manual

HR(M)
This is a basic measurement that is only available in M mode. Specify two bars on an image
and measure the heart rate between the two bars.
1. Select HR(M) on the monitor or touchscreen.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to select two bars.
3. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.

Time(M)
This is a basic measurement that is only available in M mode. Specify two bars on an M image
and measure the time between the two bars.
1. Select Time(M) on the monitor or touchscreen.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to select two bars.
3. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.

Velocity
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. Specify one point
on a Spectral Doppler image to measure the velocity.

NOTE: In a Spectral Doppler image, the X- and Y-axes represent time and velocity,
respectively.

1. Select Velocity on the monitor or touchscreen.

2. Specify a point.
3. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.

8-16
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Accel
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. Specify two
points on a Spectral Doppler image and measure the velocity at each point to calculate the
time and acceleration.
1. Select Accel on the monitor or touchscreen.
2. Specify two points and measure the length of the straight line between the points. This
measurement is taken in the same way as ‘Distance’.
3. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.
The following equation is used for Accel measurement:

XX

RI
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. Specify two
points on a Spectral Doppler image and measure the velocity at each point to calculate the
Resistivity Index (RI).
1. Tap RI on the touchscreen.
2. Specify two points on a Spectral Doppler image, and measure the velocity at each point.
3. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.
The equations used for D RI measurement are as follows:

XX

8-17
 User Manual

Manual Trace
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. You can specify
a point on a Spectral Doppler image and trace a curve from that point to calculate the blood
flow velocity, mean velocity, RI and Pulsatility Index(PI).
1. Select Manual Trace on the monitor or touchscreen.
2. Trace the curve. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the
screen. The measurement results displayed will vary, depending on the settings you have
selected in Setup > Measurement > Library > Caliper > D > Manual Trace.
XXPS: Peak Systolic Velocity XXPI: Pulsatility Index
XXMD: Min Diastolic Velocity XXRI: Resistivity Index
XXED: End Diastolic Velocity XXPS/ED: PS ED Ratio
XXTAmax: Time Averaged Max Velocity XXED/PS: ED PS Ratio

The equations used for Trace measurement are as follows:

VTI
XXV mean =
Duration of flow

XXRI =
PS − ED
PS

XXPI
PS − ED
=
Vmean

8-18
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Limited Trace
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. Specify two
bars on a Spectral Doppler image to calculate the mean velocity between the bars, RI and
Pulsatility Index(PI).
1. Select Limited Trace on the monitor or touchscreen. Use the trackball and the Set button
on the control panel to select two bars.
2. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.
XXPS: Peak Systolic Velocity XXPI: Pulsatility Index
XXMD: Min Diastolic Velocity XXRI: Resistivity Index
XXED: End Diastolic Velocity XXPS/ED: PS ED Ratio
XXTAmax: Time Averaged Max Velocity XXED/PS: ED PS Ratio
XXTAMEAN: Time Average Mean Velocity XXHR

The equations used for D Limited Trace measurement are as follows:

VTI
XXV mean =
Duration of flow

PS − ED
XXRI =
PS

PS − ED
XXPI =
Vmean

V1
XXV1 / V2 =
V2

8-19
 User Manual

VolumeFlow(D)
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode and 2D Image
Mode. Specify two bars on a Spectral Doppler image, and specify two points in 2D Image
mode, to calculate the VolumeFlow.
1. Select VolumeFlow(D) on the monitor or touchscreen.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to select two bars. This
measurement is taken in the same way as ‘M Time’. This can only be done in the Loop area.
3. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to select two points. 2D Image
Mode will activate automatically so that you can measure the distance. This measurement
is taken in the same way as ‘Distance’.
4. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.

Time(D)
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. Place two bars
on a Spectral Doppler image to calculate the time between the bars.
1. Tap D Time on the touchscreen.
2. Set two bars on the spectrum with the trackball and the Set button.
3. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.

HR(D)
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. Place two bars
on an image and measure the heart rate between the two bars.
1. Select HR(D) on the monitor or touchscreen.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to select two bars.
3. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.

8-20
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Auto Trace
Spectrum is traced automatically. This can be enabled in the measurement menu in Spectral
Doppler mode.
1. Press Auto Trace in the Measurement menu.
2. The system traces the spectrum automatically.
3. When the Trace is complete, the measurement results are displayed on the screen.

Things to Consider when using Doppler Spectrum Auto Trace

Tips!
The state of a Doppler Spectrum may affect the measurement results. Please pay attention to
the following:
XXCauses for Trace Failure
–– If the Gain is changed while a Doppler image is in Freeze state, Contour Trace and
Peak Trace will not work.
–– If there is little or no noise in an image without a spectrum, Contour Trace will not
work.
–– If there is severe noise in an image, Contour Trace will not work.
–– If the Clutter Filter is set too high, Auto Trace and Limited Trace may not work.
XXPossible Causes of Inaccurate Peak Trace
–– If the PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency) is lower than the velocity at the site being
examined, aliasing may occur. If the original signals are separated from aliasing, a
Trace can be carried out, but the peak measurement may not be accurate.
–– If the peak of a spectral waveform is not clear or occurs intermittently, a Trace can be
carried out, but the peak measurement may not be accurate.
–– If the Doppler Gain is set too high or too low, it becomes difficult to distinguish
spectra. This may result in measurement error.
–– If the Wall Filter is set too high, the spectrum will only be partially displayed. In this
case, a Trace can be carried out, but Peak measurement may not be accurate.
–– If abnormal noise or artifacts occurs, a Trace can be carried out, but Peak
measurement may not be accurate.
XXOther
–– Use of the CW Probe may result in measurement error(s).
–– Limited Trace is supported only for two-peak spectrums, such as Mitral Valve Inflow
and Tricuspid Valve Inflow in the cardiology application.

8-21
 User Manual

S/D Ratio, D/S Ratio

This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. After designating
two points in a Spectral Doppler image, calculate the velocity ratio by measuring the velocity
at each point.

NOTE: In a Spectral Doppler image, the X- and Y-axes represent time and velocity,
respectively.

1. Tap the S/D button on the touchscreen.

2. After designating two points, measure the velocity at each point. The measurement
method is same as ‘RI’.
3. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.

8-22
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Circumference and Area Measurement

Ellipse
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Measure the
circumference and area of circle (ellipse)-shaped objects on a 2D image.
1. Click Ellipse on the monitor or tap Ellipse on the touchscreen.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify the diameter (axis) of
the measurement area.
Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and then press the Set button.

Repositioning Point
Tips!
Before pressing the Set button to confirm the position, you can press the Change button to
reset the position of the point.

3. Specify the size of the circle (ellipse).

Adjust the size using the trackball and then press the Set button.
4. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.
The following equation is used for Ellipse measurement:

XX , (a: Half Long axis, b: Half Short axis)

XXArea = , (a, b: Axis)

8-23
 User Manual

Trace
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Measure the
circumference and area of an irregularly shaped object on a 2D image.
1. Select Trace on the monitor or touchscreen.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify the start point for
tracing over the contour of the measurement area.
Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and then press the Set button.
3. Trace the curve so that the measurement cursor returns to the start point, and then press
the Set button.

NOTE: The Trace Line must be a closed curve. If you press the Set button before tracing is
complete, a straight line will be traced between the current position and the start point,
resulting in a significant error.

4. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.
The equations used for Trace measurement are as follows:

XX , (N = 1, 2… last point)

XX , (N = 1, 2… last point)

Editing Curves
Tips!
Before specifying the end point by pressing the Set button, you can delete part of the curve
being traced by rotating the soft menu dial-button 5 clockwise. To restore the deleted curve,
rotate it counter-clockwise.

8-24
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Closed Spline
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Specify multiple points
on a 2D image to measure the circumference and area of the resulting closed spline.
1. Select Closed Spline on the monitor or touchscreen. Use the trackball and the Set button
on the control panel to specify as many points as desired. After specifying the last point of
the Spline, press the Set button twice to finish measuring the Spline.
At least three points must be specified before spline can be measured.
2. The circumference and area of the closed spline created with the points you have specified
will be calculated and displayed on screen.

%Stenosis(A)
StA stands for Stenosis Area, which is a basic measurement available in all Operation modes.
The area of a blood vessel is measured on a 2D image to calculate its stenosis ratio (%).
1. Select %Stenosis(A) on the monitor or touchscreen. Measure the area of the vessel outer
wall using the ‘Ellipse’ measurement method.
2. When the second cursor appears, measure the area of the stenosed vessel’s inner wall.
This measurement is taken in the same way as ‘Trace’.
3. Calculate %Stenosis(A) with the following equation:
%Stenosis(A) = (Outer Area – Inner Area) / Outer Area x 100

VolumeFlow(A)
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode and 2D Image
mode. Specify two bars on a Spectral Doppler image and specify an ellipse in 2D Image mode
to calculate the VolumeFlow.
1. Select VolumeFlow(A) on the monitor or touchscreen. Use the trackball and the Set button
on the control panel to select two bars. This measurement is taken in the same way as ‘M
Time’. This can only be done in the Loop area.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to select an ellipse. 2D Image
Mode will activate automatically so that you can measure the ellipse. This measurement is
taken in the same way as ‘Ellipse’.
3. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.

8-25
 User Manual

Volume Measurement

NOTE: Since Dual Mode simultaneously displays two images on the screen, you don’t have to
return to the Operation modes to measure volume in Dual Mode.

1 Distance Volume
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Measure the volume of
an object by using only one straight line on a 2D image.
1. Select 1 Distance Volume on the monitor or touchscreen. Specify two points and measure
the length of the straight line between the points. This measurement is taken in the same
way as ‘Distance’.
2. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen. The volume
(Vol.) will be calculated along with the length of the line.
The equations used for 1 Distance measurement are as follows:

XX , (D: distance)

2 Distance Volume
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Measure the volume of
an object by using two straight lines on a 2D image.
1. Select 2 Distance Volume on the monitor or touchscreen. Specify two points and measure
the length of the straight line between the points. This measurement is taken in the same
way as ‘Distance’.
2. Measure the length of the last remaining straight line using the same method as above.
3. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen. The volume
(Vol.) will be calculated along with the length of each line.
The equations used for 2 Distance measurement are as follows:

XXD1 > D2, Vol =

π
⋅ D 1 ⋅ D 2 2 , (D: distance)
6

8-26
 Chapter 8 Measurements

3 Distance Volume
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Measure the volume of
an object by using three straight lines on a 2D image.
1. Select 3 Distance Volume on the monitor or touchscreen. Specify two points and measure
the length of the straight line between the points. This measurement is taken in the same
way as ‘Distance’.
2. Measure the length of the remaining two straight lines using the same method as above.
3. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen. The volume
(Vol.) will be calculated along with the length of each line.
The equations used for 3 Distance measurement are as follows:

XX , (D: distance)

Ellipse Volume
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Measure the volume of a
cone-shaped object by using one circle (ellipse) on a 2D image.
1. Tap Ellipse Volume on the touchscreen. Specify the size of the circle (ellipse). This
measurement is taken in the same way as ‘Ellipse’.
2. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.
The following equation is used for Ellipse measurement:

XX

8-27
 User Manual

Ellipse+Dist Vol.
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Measure the volume of
an object by using one straight line and one circle (ellipse) on a 2D image.
1. Tap Ellipse+Dist Vol. on the touchscreen. Specify the size of the circle (ellipse). This
measurement is taken in the same way as ‘Ellipse’.
2. Specify two points and measure the length of the straight line between the points. This
measurement is taken in the same way as ‘Distance’.
3. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.
The equation for measuring Ellipse+Dist Vol. is as follows:

XX ,

Disk Volume
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Calculate the volume
of an irregularly shaped object by measuring the area and the length of its long axis on a 2D
image.
1. Select Disk Volume on the monitor or touchscreen. Draw the contour of the area to be
measured. This measurement is taken in the same way as ‘Trace’.
2. Measure the length of the long axis. This measurement is taken in the same way as
‘Distance’.
3. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.
XXD: The length of a straight line
XXArea: The area of a circle
XXVolume: Volume

Editing Curves
Tips!
Before specifying the end point by pressing the Set button, you can delete part of the curve
being traced by rotating the soft menu dial-button 5 counter-clockwise. To restore the
deleted curve, rotate it clockwise.

8-28
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurements by Application
Press the Calculator button on the control panel.

Things to Note

Before Starting Measurement

„„Register Patient
XXMake sure the currently registered patient information is correct. If the patient is not
registered, press the Patient button on the control panel to register the patient.
XXUse the Study Information tab to enter or change a patient’s information per diagnosis
item.
XXFor information on the Patient Information menu and how to enter the information,
refer to ‘Patient Information’ in ‘Chapter 6. Starting Modes of Operation’.

„„Check the Probe, Application, and Preset

XXCheck the name of the probe and the application displayed in Title area. To use a
different probe or application, press the Probe button on the control panel.
XXIn the Probe Selection screen, check the Preset settings.

„„Measurement Menu Settings

Set the related menus for convenient measurement. For menus related to measurement
and their settings, refer to the ‘Measurement Settings’ in ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’ of this
manual.

8-29
 User Manual

Measurement Operations
The following gives information on the common button operations for measurements:

„„Select Measurement Item

Select from the measurement item menu on the touchscreen.

„„Change Measurement Method

If the current measurement may be taken in more ways than one, the measurement
method may be changed. While taking a measurement, you may rotate the dial-button
below the Change Tool menu on the touchscreen to change the measurement method.

„„Delete Trace Line

XXWhile taking Trace Length or Trace measurements, rotating the touchscreen Undo/
Redo dial-button clockwise will delete the traced curve. To restore the deleted curve,
rotate it counter-clockwise.
XXMove the trackball in the opposite direction to delete the traced line. You can only
delete the line while you are manually tracing the Doppler Spectrum.

„„Deleting Measurement Results

Press the Clear button on the control panel.

NOTE: The measurement results are deleted from the screen, but still shown on the report
for the corresponding application.

„„Printing Measurement Results

Press the established button with the Store/Print button on the control panel.

8-30
 Chapter 8 Measurements

„„Exiting Measurement
After completing (or canceling) all in-process measurements, press the Exit button on the
control panel.

„„End Diagnosis
Press the End Exam button on the control panel. The study for the currently registered
patient will end, and all measurement results will be saved.

„„Fetus
Either click the Fetus button displayed at the top of the left menu, or rotate the dial-
button 1 to select the fetus to measure among A, B, C, and D.

„„Direction
Either click the Direction button displayed at the top of the left-hand menu or rotate the
dial-button 2 to select the direction of the object to measure between left and right. This
is only displayed in specific packages.

„„Location
Either click the Location button displayed at the top of the left-hand menu or rotate the
dial-button 3 to select the location of the object to measure from Prox, Mid, and Distal.

„„Trace Direction
Tap Trace Direction on the touchscreen to set the trace direction of the Doppler Spectrum.
This is activated only after Limited Trace has been performed in Spectral Doppler mode.
XXAbove: Only the + part of the Doppler waveform is traced.
XXBelow: Only the – part of the Doppler waveform is traced.
XXBoth: All parts of the Doppler waveform are traced.

8-31
 User Manual

„„Measured Frame
Save the measurement frame. Rotate dial-button 1 to go to the measurement frame.

„„Threshold
Adjust elimination of weak signals at measurement of trace in the Spectral Doppler mode.

„„HR Cycle
Settings may be configured for each application at Setup > Measurement > Applications. In
Heart Rate, the number of cycles for heart rate (HR) may be specified at Heart Rate Cycle.

„„Specifying Measurement Result Position

Place the pointer over the measurement and press the Set button. Use the trackball to
move the measurement to the desired location, and press the Set button to place the
movement at that location.

„„Deleting Recent Measurement Item

Tap Delete Latest on the touchscreen to cancel the last measurement taken.

„„Report
Press the Report button on the control panel to switch to the Report screen.

8-32
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Common Measurement Methods

This section provides information on the common measurement methods used for applications.

Measurements in Spectral Doppler mode

In general, if you trace a Doppler Spectrum, you obtain results for various measurement items
automatically. There are 3 ways to trace a Doppler Spectrum.
Also, HS50/HS60/XH50/XH60 can select a specific item under the measurement menu and
take measurements individually without tracing a Doppler Spectrum.

„„Auto Trace
Spectrum is traced automatically. This can be enabled in the measurement menu in
Spectral Doppler mode.
1. Press Auto Trace in the measurement menu.
2. The system traces the spectrum automatically.
3. When the Trace is complete, the measurement results are displayed on the screen.

„„Limited Trace
Specify a measurement range, and a spectrum will be traced automatically. This can be
enabled in the measurement menu in Spectral Doppler mode.
1. Select Limited Trace in the measurement menu. A bar will appear, with which you can
specify range.
2. Specify the measurement range.
Place the bar at a desired position with the trackball, and press the Set button.
3. The system traces spectrums within the specified range automatically.
4. When the Trace is complete, the measurement results are displayed on the screen.

8-33
 User Manual

„„Manual Trace
A spectrum is traced manually. This can be enabled in the measurement menu in Spectral
Doppler Mode.
1. Select Manual Trace in the measurement menu. The measurement cursor will appear
over the spectrum.
2. Trace the spectrum.
3. When the Trace is complete, the measurement results are displayed on the screen.

„„Measurement by Item
In the Measurement menu, select an individual item and take a measurement.
1. Press the Calculator button on the control panel after obtaining a desired image.
2. Select the item you want from the Measurement menu. The + cursor will appear over
the spectral waveform.
3. Position the “+” cursor and press the Set button.
4. The measurement results for the selected item are displayed on the screen.

Item Category Unit Formula

PSV (Peak Systolic Velocity) Velocity cm/s

ED (End Diastolic Velocity) Velocity cm/s

MD (Minimum Diastole Velocity) Velocity cm/s

PI (Pulsatility Index) Measurement Ratio (PS-ED)/TAMAX

RI (Resistivity Index) Measurement Ratio (PS-ED)/PS or (PS-MD)/PS

PS/ED (Ratio of PS to ED) Measurement Ratio PS/ED

ED/PS (Ratio of ED to PS) Measurement Ratio ED/PS

TAMAX (Time Average Max Velocity) Velocity cm/s

TAMEAN (Time Average Mean Velocity) Velocity cm/s

8-34
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Taking Measurements via AutoCalc.

Tips!
You can use Auto Calc to take measurements on predetermined item(s). Measurement
items are as follows. For information on setting measurement item(s), please refer to
‘Measurement’ in ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’.
XXPeak Systolic Velocity (PS)
XXEnd Diastolic Velocity (ED)
XXMin Diastole Velocity (MD)
XXTime Averaged Peak Velocity (TAMAX)
XXTime Averaged Mean Velocity (TAMEAN)
XXResistive Index (RI)
XXPulsatility Index (PI)
XXSystole/Diastole Ratio (PS/ED)
XXDiastole/Systole Ratio (ED/PS)
XXHeart Rate (HR)
XXMax Pressure Gradient (PGmax)
XXMean Pressure Gradient (PGmean)
XXVelocity Time Integral (VTI)
XXPeak A (Peak A)

Volume Flow Measurement

Select Volume Flow in the measurement menu.
Volume Flow can be calculated by measuring an area or distance. For information on
measuring distance or area, refer to ‘Basic Measurement’. TAMEAN (Time Avg. Mean Velocity)
value is measured automatically.

„„Vesl. Area (Vessel Area)

Measure the area of a blood vessel to calculate TAMEAN and Volume Flow.

XX

„„Vesl. Dist. (Vessel Distance)

Measure the width of a blood vessel to calculate TAMEAN and Volume Flow.

XX

8-35
 User Manual

Stenosis Measurement
You can measure the stenosis of each blood vessel system by measuring and calculating an
area or distance.

„„%Stenosis(A)
Measures the area of the inner wall and the outer wall of the blood vessel. %Stenosis(A)
stands for Stenosis Area.
1. Select the %Stenosis(A) menu and the first cursor will appear in 2D Mode.
2. Measure the area of the vessel’s outer wall using the Circ/Area measurement method.
3. When the second cursor appears, measure the area of the stenosed vessel’s inner wall.
%Stenosis(A) = (Outer Area – Inner Area) / Outer Area x 100

„„%Stenosis(D)
Measure the diameter of the blood vessel. Stenosis(D) stands for Stenosis Distance.
1. Select the %Stenosis(D) menu and the first cursor will appear in 2D Mode.
2. Measure the total diameter of a vessel using the Distance measurement method.
3. When the second cursor appears, measure the diameter of the vessel’s inner wall under
stenosis.
%Stenosis(D) = (Outer Distance – Inner Distance) / Outer Distance x 100

Heart Rate Measurement

„„HR (Heart Rate)

You can calculate heart rates for a certain period of time.
1. Select HR from the Measurement menu. A bar will appear, with which you can specify
range.
2. Specify the measurement range.
Place the bar at a desired position with the trackball, and press the Set button.
3. The system will automatically measure the heart rate within the measurement range.
The measurement result is displayed on screen.

8-36
 Chapter 8 Measurements

OB Measurements
NOTE:
XXDuctus Venosus and Fetal HR can only be measured in Doppler Mode.
XXFor information on basic measurement methods, refer to ‘Basic Measurements’ and
‘Common Measurement Methods' in this chapter.
XXFor references on measurement items, see 'Reference Manual Part 1'.

Before Taking OB Measurements

„„OB Basic Information

Enter the information required for OB diagnosis in the Patient Information screen.
The basic OB information includes LMP (Last Menstrual Period) and Number of Fetuses.
Once LMP is entered, EDD (Estimated Delivery Date) and GA (Gestational Age) are
calculated automatically. LMP is required for the calculation of values such as EDD and SD
in obstetrics measurement.
XXEDD (LMP) = LMP + 280 days
XXGA (LMP) = Current System Date – LMP
XXLMP = Ovul. Date –14
The physician may choose to override the LMP and manually enter the EDD into ‘EDD
(LMP)'.
Once the expected delivery date is entered, GA (Gestational Age) is automatically
calculated and displayed. EDD (LMP) is renamed to EDD, while GA (LMP) is renamed to GA
(EDD).
Once DOC is entered, EDD (Estimated Delivery Date) and GA (Gestational Age) are
calculated automatically. EDD (LMP) is renamed to EDD (DOC), while GA (LMP) is renamed
to GA (DOC).
Once GA is entered, EDD (Estimated Delivery Date) is entered automatically. EDD (LMP) is
renamed to EDD (GA), while GA (LMP) is renamed to GA (Clin).
A maximum of four fetuses can be entered as Number of Fetuses. The default value is ‘1’. In
the case of twins, enter ‘2’.
For further information about patient information menus and how to input patient
information, refer to ‘Patient Information’ of ‘Chapter 6. Starting Modes of Operation’.

8-37
 User Manual

„„OB Measurement Menu Settings

Set up the GA Equation, GA Table, and OB measurement menus that are used in obstetrics
measurements. The user can manually write, back up or restore GA Tables. For more
information on the GA Equation and Table, refer to the Reference Manual Part 1.

NOTE: For twins, distinguish fetuses by specifying them as Fetus A and Fetus B in the
Measurement menu. Either click the Fetus button displayed at the top of the left-hand menu
or rotate the dial-button 1 to select the fetus to measure among A, B, C, and D.

For menus related to measurement and their settings, refer to the ‘Measurement Settings’
in ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’ of this manual.

1 Trim. Measurement Menu

When the measurements for the selected items are complete, the measurements and
gestational age are displayed on the screen. The measurement method for each item is the
same as for basic measurement. Measured items are automatically entered into the report.

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

GS All Distance measurement cm

YS All Distance measurement cm

CRL All Distance measurement cm

Fetal Biometry
BPD All Distance measurement cm

FL All Distance measurement cm

AC All Circumference measurement cm

NT All Distance measurement mm

Fetal Cranuim IT All Distance measurement mm

NB All Distance measurement cm

8-38
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

S Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

D Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

A Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

Ductus Venosus PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s

ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s

MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s

PI PW Velocity measurement –

RI PW Velocity measurement –

S/D PW Continuous measurement –

Fetal HR PW Heart Rate bpm

Automatic Calculation
Some items in the measurement menu are automatically calculated based on measurements
of other items.

NOTE: For reference, the Osaka University/Tokyo University methods are mainly used in Asia,
the Merz method in Europe, and the Shepard/ Hadlock methods on the American continent.

8-39
 User Manual

2-3 Trim. Measurement Menu

When the measurements for the selected items are complete, the measurements and
gestational age are displayed on the screen. The measurement method for each item is the
same as for basic measurement. Measured items are automatically entered into the report.

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

GS All Distance measurement cm

CRL All Distance measurement cm

YS All Distance measurement cm

BPD, OFD All Continuous measurement

BPD All Distance measurement cm

OFD All Distance measurement cm

HC All Circumference measurement cm

APAD, TAD All Continuous measurement

APAD All Distance measurement cm

Fetal Biometry TAD All Distance measurement cm

AC All Circumference measurement cm

FTA All Area measurement cm2

FL All Distance measurement cm

SL All Distance measurement cm

APTD, TTD All Continuous measurement

APTD All Distance measurement cm

TTD All Distance measurement cm

ThC All Circumference measurement cm

EFW All – –

8-40
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

HL All Distance measurement cm

ULNA All Distance measurement cm

TIB All Distance measurement cm

Fetal Long Bones RAD All Distance measurement cm

FIB All Distance measurement cm

CLAV All Distance measurement cm

LV All Distance measurement cm

NT All Distance measurement mm

IT All Distance measurement mm

NB All Distance measurement cm

NF All Distance measurement cm

CEREB All Distance measurement cm

Fetal Cranium CM All Distance measurement cm

Lat Vent All Distance measurement cm

OOD All Distance measurement cm

IOD All Distance measurement cm

HW All Distance measurement cm

FMF angle All Angle calculation degree

Foot All Distance measurement cm

Ear All Distance measurement cm

Lt. Fetal Others MP All Distance measurement cm

Rt. Fetal Others Renal L All Distance measurement cm

Renal AP All Distance measurement cm

Pelvis All Distance measurement cm

8-41
 User Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Q1 All Distance measurement cm

Q2 All Distance measurement cm

AFI Q3 All Distance measurement cm

Q4 All Distance measurement cm

MVP All Distance measurement cm

ThD ap All Distance measurement cm

ThD trans All Distance measurement cm

HrtD ap All Distance measurement cm

CTAR
HrtD trans All Distance measurement cm

ThA All Area measurement cm2

HrtA All Area measurement cm2

Cervix L All Distance measurement cm

Maternal Others
Placenta Thick All Distance measurement cm

S Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

PLI D Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

A Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

8-42
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Calculation after distance

%StD All %
measurement

Calculation after area

%StA All %
measurement
Umbilical A Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Lt. Mid Cereb A Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Rt. Mid Cereb A
Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Lt. Uterine A
Rt. Uterine A PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Placenta A ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Lt. Fetal Carotids MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Fetal Carotids
PI PW Velocity measurement –
Fetal Aorta
Lt. Renal A RI PW Velocity measurement –

Rt. Renal A S/D PW Continuous measurement

Calculate after measuring

VF(D) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Dist.

Calculate after measuring

VF(A) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Area

Fetal HR Fetal HR M, PW Heart Rate bpm

S Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

D Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

A Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace

Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace

Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace

Ductus Venosus
PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s

ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s

MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s

PI PW Velocity measurement –

RI PW Velocity measurement –

S/D PW Continuous measurement –

8-43
 User Manual

AFI (Amniotic Fluid Index)

Measure the amniotic fluid index. Measurements are performed by dividing the pregnant
woman’s abdomen into four parts. The distance between the fetus and the farthest point of
each area is measured. To obtain a specific image from each quadrant plane, press the Freeze
button to go to the Operation mode. After obtaining the image, press the Freeze button again
to return to the measurement mode.

Calculating Estimated Fetal Weight (EFW)

When measurements for the following items are complete, the system uses the results to
calculate the estimated fetal weight automatically. For an equation for calculating fetal
weight, please refer to ‘Estimated Fetal Weight Formula’ in the Reference Manual Part 1.
XXBPD and AC XXAC and FL
XXBPD, FL, and FTA XXBPD, AC, and FL
XXBPD, APTD, TTD, and FL XXHC, AC, and FL
XXBPD, APTD, TTD, and SL XXBPD, HC, AC, and FL
XXBPD and TTD XXAC

Continuous Measurement/Review for EFW Calculation

You can measure a series of OB items to calculate the EFW.

Before starting measurement

Tips!
XXMake sure that the User Key has been set for EFW continuous measurements. You
can configure the User Key for EFW continuous measurements at Setup > Customize >
Buttons > User Key > EFW Measure. For more information, refer to 'Peripheral Device
Settings' in ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’.
XXCheck EFW Reference. If it is not set, or if you want to change it, select it at Setup >
Measurement > Author > Estimated Fetal Weight.

NOTE: This function is not available in 3D mode.

8-44
 Chapter 8 Measurements

„„Measurement Method
1. Press User Key 1 (or User Key 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) on the control panel. The OB Measurement
menu will be displayed on screen.
2. Measure the items for EFW calculation by using the trackball and the Set button.
3. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel again to start the
measurement of the following items.
4. Once all measurements have been taken, the EFW is displayed on screen.
The EFW measurements taken and the order in which they are measured are as follows:

Reference Measure Item (by Order)

Campbell AC

Hadlock AC→BPD

Hadlock1 AC→FL

Hadlock2 BPD→AC→FL

Hadlock3 HC→AC→FL

Hadlock4 BPD, HC→AC→FL

Hansmann BPD→TTD

Merz BPD→AC

Osaka BPD→FL→FTA

Persson BPD→FL→APAD→TAD

Schild HC→AC→FL

Shepard AC→BPD

Shinozuka1 BPD→FL→AC

Shinozuka2 BP→APTD, TTD→SL

Shinozuka3 BPD→APTD, TTD→FL

Tokyo BPD→APTD, TTD→FL

„„Review the Result of EFW Calculation

1. Press User Key 1 (or User Key 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) on the control panel. The measured items
taken for calculating EFW will be displayed on screen together with the result.
2. To remove the results from the screen, press the Clear button on the control panel.

8-45
 User Manual

Fetal Heart Measurements

The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. In addition,
measurement items are similar to those of cardiology measurements (Cardiac Measurements).
Measured items are automatically entered into the report.

NOTE:
XXFor information on basic measurement methods, refer to ‘Basic Measurements’ and
‘Common Measurement Methods’ in this chapter.
XXFor references on measurement items, see ‘Reference Manual Part 1’.

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

LVEDV A2C All Dist 20 ml

LVESV A2C All Dist 20 ml

LV Vol. (Simpson)
LVEDV A4C All Dist 20 ml

LVESV A4C All Dist 20 ml

Asc Ao All Distance measurement cm

MPA Diam All Distance measurement cm

Duct Art All Distance measurement cm

LA Diam All Distance measurement cm

RA Diam All Distance measurement cm

RVDd All Distance measurement cm

2D Echo
IVS All Distance measurement cm

LVIDd All Distance measurement cm

LVIDs All Distance measurement cm

LVPW All Distance measurement cm

HrtC All Circumference measurement cm

ThC All Circumference measurement cm

8-46
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

ThD ap All Distance measurement cm

ThD trans All Distance measurement cm

HrtD ap All Distance measurement cm

CTAR
HrtD trans All Distance measurement cm

ThA All Area measurement cm2

HrtA All Area measurement cm2

Fetal HR Fetal HR M, PW Heart Rate bpm

IVSd M Distance measurement cm

LVIDd M Distance measurement cm

LVIDs M Distance measurement cm

M Echo LVPWd M Distance measurement cm

IVSs M Distance measurement cm

LVPWs M Distance measurement cm

RVDd M Distance measurement cm

Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace

Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace

Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace

MPA
Duct Arteriosus PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s

IVC ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Asc Aorta MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Dsc Aorta
PI PW Velocity measurement –

RI PW Velocity measurement –

S/D PW Continuous measurement

S Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Duct Venosus D Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

A Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

8-47
 User Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

E PW Velocity measurement cm/s

MV
A PW Velocity measurement cm/s
TV
Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

S Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

PLI D Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

A Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

TST PW Time measurement ms

TEI
ET PW Time measurement ms

„„CTAR (Cardio-Thorax Area Ratio)

This measurement compares the size of the fetus’ heart in relation to the size of its thorax.
ThD ap, ThD trans, HrtD ap, and HrtD trans values are acquired to obtain the comparative
value.

XX

8-48
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Gynecology Measurements
NOTE:
XXFor information on basic measurement methods, refer to ‘Basic Measurements’ and
‘Common Measurement Methods’ in this chapter.
XXFor references on measurement items, refer to the Reference Manual Part 2.

Before Taking GYN Measurements

Enter the information required for GYN diagnosis in the Patient Information screen. Basic
information for gynecology includes Gravida, Para, Aborta, and Ectopic.

Measurement Menu
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured
items are automatically entered into the report.

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Length All Distance measurement cm

Width All Distance measurement cm

Uterus
Height All Distance measurement cm

Endo.Thick All Distance measurement cm

Cervix Length All Distance measurement cm

Lt. Cyst
Rt. Cyst Width All Distance measurement cm
Lt. Ovary
Rt. Ovary Height All Distance measurement cm

8-49
 User Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Follicle #1 All Volume measurement ml

Follicle #2 All Volume measurement ml

Follicle #3 All Volume measurement ml

Follicle #4 All Volume measurement ml

Follicle #5 All Volume measurement ml

Lt. Follicle Follicle #6 All Volume measurement ml

Rt. Follicle Follicle #7 All Volume measurement ml

Follicle #8 All Volume measurement ml

Follicle #9 All Volume measurement ml

Follicle #10 All Volume measurement ml

Follicle #11 All Volume measurement ml

Follicle #12 All Volume measurement ml

Calculation after distance

%StD All %
measurement

Calculation after area

%StA All %
measurement

Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace

Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace

Lt. Ovarian A Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace

Rt. Ovarian A PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Lt. Uterine A
ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Uterine A
Pericystic MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Endometrial PI PW Velocity measurement –

RI PW Velocity measurement –

Calculate after measuring

Vol. Flow(D) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Dist.

Calculate after measuring

Vol. Flow(A) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Area

S/D PW Continuous measurement –

8-50
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Length All Distance measurement cm

Width All Distance measurement cm

Mass1
Height All Distance measurement cm
Mass2
Mass3 Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Endo. Polyp Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Lt. Ovarian Mass
Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Rt. Ovarian Mass
PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Uterine Fibroid1
Uterine Fibroid2 ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Uterine Fibroid3 MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Cervical Fibroid
PI PW Velocity measurement –
Ectopic
RI PW Velocity measurement –

S/D PW Continuous measurement –

Most of the gynecology measurements are distance measurements and volume

measurements based on the distance measurement results. If mulle images, such as long
axis images and transverse axis images are needed, press the Freeze button to switch to Scan
Mode and obtain images from another perspective.

8-51
 User Manual

Cardiac Measurements

NOTE: Cardiac measurement is an optional item.

The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured items
are automatically entered into the report.

NOTE:
XXFor information on basic measurement methods, refer to ‘Basic Measurements’ and
‘Common Measurement Methods’ in this chapter.
XX‘For references on measurement items, refer to the Reference Manual Part 2.

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

All LV (2D) All Continuous measurement

All LVd (2D) All Continuous measurement

IVSd All Distance measurement cm

LVIDd All Distance measurement cm

LVPWd All Distance measurement cm

LV (2D)
All LVs (2D) All Continuous measurement

IVSs All Distance measurement cm

LVIDs All Distance measurement cm

LVPWs All Distance measurement cm

LV(2D) HR All Heart Rate bpm

RVAWd All Distance measurement cm

RVIDd All Distance measurement cm

RVAd All Area measurement cm2

RVAWs All Distance measurement cm

RV (2D)
RVIDs All Distance measurement cm

RVAs All Area measurement cm2

RV Major All Distance measurement cm

RV Minor All Distance measurement cm

8-52
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

All LV/RV (M) M Continuous measurement

All LV (M) M Continuous measurement

LV EF(M) M Continuous measurement

IVSd M Distance measurement cm

LVIDd M Distance measurement cm

LVPWd M Distance measurement cm

IVSs M Distance measurement cm

LV (M)
LVIDs M Distance measurement cm

LVPWs M Distance measurement cm

LVET M Time measurement ms

LVPEP M Time measurement ms

LV(M) HR M Heart Rate bpm

Time Septal to PW M Time measurement ms

MAPSE M Distance measurement cm

All RV (M) M Continuous measurement

RVAWd M Distance measurement cm

RVIDd M Distance measurement cm

RVAWs M Distance measurement cm

RV (M)
RVIDs M Distance measurement cm

RVPEP M Time measurement ms

RVET M Time measurement ms

TAPSE M Distance measurement cm

LVEDV A2C All Dist 20 ml

LVESV A2C All Dist 20 ml

LV Vol. (Simpson) LVEDV A4C All Dist 20 ml

LVESV A4C All Dist 20 ml

BP HR All Heart Rate bpm

8-53
 User Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

LVEDV A2C AL All Dist 20 ml

LVESV A2C AL All Dist 20 ml

HR A2C All Heart Rate bpm

LV Vol. (A/L)
LVEDV A4C AL All Dist 20 ml

LVESV A4C AL All Dist 20 ml

HR A4C All Heart Rate bpm

LVAd SAX MV All Area measurement cm2

LVAs SAX MV All Area measurement cm2

LV Vol. (Bullet) LVLd Apical All Distance measurement cm

LVLs Apical All Distance measurement cm

HR Bullet All Heart Rate bpm

All LV Mass All Continuous measurement -

LVAd SAX PM Epi All Area measurement cm2

LVAd SAX PM All Area measurement cm2

LV Mass
LVLd apical All Distance measurement cm

LV TE a All Distance measurement cm

LV TE d All Distance measurement cm

Ao Diam (2D) All Distance measurement cm

Ao Diam(M) M Distance measurement cm

Asc Ao Diam All Distance measurement cm

Desc Ao Diam All Distance measurement cm

Aorta
Ao Arch Diam All Distance measurement cm

Ao Isth Diam All Distance measurement cm

Ao ST Junct Diam All Distance measurement cm

Ao Sinus Diam All Distance measurement cm

8-54
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

All LA Vol. All Continuous measurement

LA/Ao (2D) All Distance measurement cm

LA Diam (2D) All Distance measurement cm

LA/Ao(M) M Distance measurement cm

LA/Diam(M) M Distance measurement cm

LA LA Major All Distance measurement cm

LA Minor All Distance measurement cm

LAAd A2C All Area measurement cm2

LAAs A2C All Area measurement cm2

LAAd A4C All Area measurement cm2

LAAs A4C All Area measurement cm2

LAEDV A2C All Dist 20 ml

LAESV A2C All Dist 20 ml

LA Vol. (Simpson)
LAEDV A4C All Dist 20 ml

LAESV A4C All Dist 20 ml

RA Diam (2D) All Distance measurement cm

RA Major All Distance measurement cm

RA Minor All Distance measurement cm

RA RAAd All Area measurement cm2

RAAs All Area measurement cm2

RAEDV All Dist 20 ml

RAESV All Dist 20 ml

8-55
 User Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

LVOT LVOT Diam All Distance measurement cm

LVOT Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

LVOT VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm

LOVT HR PW Heart Rate bpm

RAEDV A2C All Dist 20 ml

RAESV A2C All Dist 20 ml

RA Vol. (Simpson)
RAEDV A4C All Dist 20 ml

RAESV A4C All Dist 20 ml

Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

RVOT RVOT Diam All Distance measurement cm

RVOT Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

RVOT VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm

RVOT HR PW Heart Rate bpm

8-56
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

AV Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

AV Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

AV Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

AV Cusp All Distance measurement cm

AV Cusp(M) M Distance measurement cm

AV Diam All Distance measurement cm

AVA Planimetry All Area measurement cm2

Q to AV Open M Time measurement ms

R-R Int M, PW Heart Rate bpm

AV AV Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

AV PHT PW Time measurement ms

AV VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm

AV AccT PW Time measurement ms

AV ET PW Time measurement ms

AV AccT/ET PW Continuous measurement

AV DecT PW Time measurement ms

Desc. Ao Vel. PW Velocity measurement cm/s

AR Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

AR Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

8-57
 User Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

AR Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

AR VCW All Distance measurement cm

AR Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

AR ed Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

AR PHT PW Time measurement ms

AR VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm

AV AR AccT PW Time measurement ms

AR DecT PW Time measurement ms

AR PISA Rad C PISA-Radius cm

AVO PW Time measurement ms

AVC PW Time measurement ms

AR Jet Diam All Distance measurement cm

AR Jet Area All Area measurement cm2

All MV(M) M Continuous measurement -

MV D-E Excursion M Distance measurement cm

MV E-F Slope M Velocity measurement cm/s

MV A-C Interval M Time measurement ms

MV EPSS M Distance measurement cm

MV Vp M Velocity measurement cm/s

MV MV Ann Diam All Distance measurement cm

MV Diam1 All Distance measurement cm

MV Diam2 All Distance measurement cm

MVA Planimetry All Area measurement cm2

MV Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

MV Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

MV Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

8-58
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

MV E-DT-A PW Continuous measurement

MV E/A PW Continuous measurement -

MV Peak E PW Velocity measurement cm/s

MV Peak A PW Velocity measurement cm/s

MV VTI PW Distance measurement cm

MV Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

MV PHT PW Time measurement ms

MV AccT PW Time measurement ms

MV DecT PW Time measurement ms

MV A Dur PW Time measurement ms

MV ET PW Time measurement ms

MV R-R Int M, PW Heart Rate bpm

MR Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

MR Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

MR Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

MR VCW All Distance measurement cm

MR Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

MR VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm

MR dp/dt PW Continuous measurement mmHg/s

MV IVRT PW Time measurement ms

MR PISA Rad C PISA-Radius cm

MV HR PW Heart Rate bpm

E/E’ PW Continuous measurement

8-59
 User Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

TV D-E Excursion M Distance measurement cm

TV E-F Slope M Velocity measurement cm/s

TV A-C Interval M Time measurement ms

TV Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

TV Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

TV Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

TV Ann Diam All Distance measurement cm, mm

TV Diam1 All Distance measurement cm

TV Diam2 All Distance measurement cm

TVA Planimetry All Area measurement cm

Q to TV Open M Time measurement ms

TV Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

TV VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm

TV
TV E/A PW Continuous measurement -

TV Peak E PW Velocity measurement cm/s

TV Peak A PW Velocity measurement cm/s

TV PHT PW Time measurement ms

TV AccT PW Time measurement ms

TV DecT PW Time measurement ms

TV A Dur PW Time measurement ms

R-R Int M, PW Heart Rate bpm

TR Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

TR Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

TR Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

TR VCW All Distance measurement cm

TR Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

8-60
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

TR VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm

Calculation after time

TR dp/dt PW mmHg/s
measurement
TV
TR PISA Rad C PISA-Radius cm

RAP M, PW RAP mmHg

TV HR PW Heart Rate bpm

PV Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

PV Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

PV Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

PV Ann Diam All Distance measurement cm

PVA Planimetry All Area measurement cm2

PV Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s, m/s

PV PHT PW Velocity measurement cm/s

PV VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm

PV AccT/ET PW Continuous measurement

PV AccT PW Time measurement ms

PV PV ET PW Time measurement ms

PV DecT PW Time measurement ms

R-R Int M, PW Heart Rate bpm

Q to PV Open M Time measurement ms

Q to PV Close M Time measurement ms

PR Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

PR Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

PR Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

MPA Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

PR VCW All Distance measurement cm

PR Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

8-61
 User Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

PR PHT PW Time measurement ms

PR VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm

PR AccT PW Time measurement ms

PV
PR DecT PW Time measurement ms

PR End Vel. PW Velocity measurement cm/s

PR PISA Rad C PISA-Radius cm

All LV Tei Index PW Continuous measurement

LV TST PW Time measurement ms

MV ET PW Time measurement ms

LV IVCT PW Time measurement ms

LV IVRT PW Time measurement ms

Tei Index
All RV Tei Index PW Continuous measurement

RV TST PW Time measurement ms

RV ET PW Time measurement ms

RV IVCT PW Time measurement ms

RV IVRT PW Time measurement ms

P Vein S/D PW Continuous measurement

P Vein S Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Pulm. Veins P Vein D Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

P Vein A Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

P Vein A Dur PW Time measurement ms

H Vein S/D PW Continuous measurement

H Vein S Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Hepatic Veins H Vein D Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

H Vein A Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

H Vein A Dur PW Time measurement ms

8-62
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

LV E’-A’-S’ PW Continuous measurement

LV Peak E’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s

LV Peak A’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s

LV Peak S’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s

LV AccT PW Time measurement ms

LV DecT PW Time measurement ms

RV E’-A’-S’ PW Continuous measurement

RV Peak E’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s

RV Peak A’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Tissue Doppler
RV Peak S’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s

RV AccT PW Time measurement ms

RV DecT PW Time measurement ms

LV Lat E’-A’-S’ PW Continuous measurement

LV Lat Peak E’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s

LV Lat Peak A’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s

LV Lat Peak S’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s

LV Lat AccT PW Time measurement ms

LV Lat DecT PW Time measurement ms

Systemic VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm

Systemic HR PW Heart Rate bpm

Qp/Qs
Pulmonic VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm

Pulmonic HR PW Heart Rate bpm

8-63
 User Manual

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

MPA Diam All Distance measurement cm

LPA Diam All Distance measurement cm

RPA Diam All Distance measurement cm

SVC Diam, Exp All Distance measurement cm

SVC Diam, Insp All Distance measurement cm

SVC S/D PW Continuous measurement

SVC S Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

SVC D Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Shunts SVC A Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

SVC A Dur PW Time measurement ms

IVC S/D PW Continuous measurement

IVC S Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

IVC D Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

IVC A Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s

IVC A Dur PW Time measurement ms

PEd All Distance measurement cm

PEs All Distance measurement cm

IVC Diam, Exp All Distance measurement cm

IVC Diam, Insp All Distance measurement cm

IVC
IVC Diam, Exp(M) M Distance measurement cm

IVC Diam, Insp(M) M Distance measurement cm

8-64
 Chapter 8 Measurements

„„Dist 20
Trace the circumference of the heart and then draw the axis of the heart. The system
automatically draws 20 lines perpendicular to the axis to calculate the volume.

NOTE:
XXMR dp/dt can be measured only at 1-3 m/s.
XXIn Dual 2D Mode, two images can be viewed simultaneously.
XXFor RVAWd, RVIDd, RVAWs, and RVIDs, see the LV measurement method.
XXMPA Diam, RPA Diam, and LPA Diam are measured under Aortic Valve Level in
Parasternal Short Axis.
XXC Mode is mainly used for measuring reverse cardiac blood flow.
XXSince velocity data is required for measuring PISA-Radius or PISA-Alias Vel., set color
display to Velocity or Vel + Var in C mode. For relevant settings, please refer to ‘Color
Doppler Mode’ in ‘Chapter 7. Modes of Operation’.
XXTissue Doppler can be measured in TDI Mode.

8-65
 User Manual

Abdomen Measurements
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured items
are automatically entered into the report.

NOTE:
XXIt is convenient to calculate each measurement value on the Spectral Doppler image.
XXFor information on basic measurement methods, refer to ‘Basic Measurements’ and
‘Common Measurement Methods’ in this chapter.

Abdomen Measurement Menu

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

CBD All Distance measurement cm

GB Wall All Distance measurement cm

Gallbladder Length All Distance measurement cm

Width All Distance measurement cm

Height All Distance measurement cm

Head All Distance measurement cm

Body All Distance measurement cm

Pancreas
Tail All Distance measurement cm

Duct All Distance measurement cm

Stomach Wall All Distance measurement cm

Bowel Small Bowel Wall All Distance measurement cm

Large Bowel Wall All Distance measurement cm

Lt. Kidney Vol. Length All Distance measurement cm

Rt. Kidney Vol. Height All Distance measurement cm
Liver
Spleen Width All Distance measurement cm

8-66
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Calculation after distance

%StD All %
measurement

Calculation after area

%StA All %
Aorta measurement
Lt. RA
Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Rt. RA
Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Lt. Seg.A
Rt. Seg A Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Lt. Arc.A PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Arc A
ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Celiac A
Splenic A MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s

C Hepatic A PI PW Velocity measurement –

R Hepatic A
RI PW Velocity measurement –
L Hepatic A
S/D PW Continuous measurement
SMA
IMA Calculate after measuring
Vol. Folw(D) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Dist.

Calculate after measuring

Vol. Flow(A) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Area

IVC
VMax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Renal V
R Potal V
M Potal V
Dur T PW Time measurement ms
L Potal V
R Hepatic V
M Hepatic V Vesl. Dist. PW Distance measurement cm
L Hepatic V
SMV
IMV Vesl. Area PW Area measurement cm2
Splenic V

8-67
 User Manual

Pediatric Hips Measurements

Measurement Menu
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured
items are automatically entered into the report.

NOTE: For information on basic measurement methods, refer to ‘Basic Measurements’ and
‘Common Measurement Methods’ in this chapter.

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Calculation of angle after

Hip Angle Type ALL degree
measurement of three straight lines

8-68
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Methods
1. Specify the first straight line by using the trackball and the Set button.
Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and then press the Set button.

Repositioning a Point
Tips!
Before pressing the Set button to confirm the position, you can press the Change button to
reset the position of the point.

2. Repeat the above process to specify two other straight lines.

3. The angle between them will be calculated automatically.
XXα: The angle between the first and the second straight lines
XXβ: The angle between the first and the third straight lines
4. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.
See the table below for Hip Joint Type information:

Type α β

1a 60 ≤ α < 90 0 < β < 55

1b 60 ≤ α < 90 55 ≤ β < 90

2a/b 50 ≤ α < 60 0 < β < 90

2c 43 ≤ α < 50 77 ≤ β < 90

d 43 ≤ α < 50 0 < β < 77

3/4 0 < α < 43

[Table 8.2 Hip Joint Type]

8-69
 User Manual

Urology Measurements

Before Taking Urology Measurements

Set the related menus for convenient measurement.
Refer to the ‘Setting Measurements’ section in ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’ for additional information.

Measurement Menu
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured
items are automatically entered into the report.

NOTE:
XXFor information on basic measurement methods, refer to ‘Basic Measurements’ and
‘Common Measurement Methods' in this chapter.
XXFor references on measurement items, refer to the Reference Manual Part 2.

„„3 Distance
Calculate a volume by measuring three distances.

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

WG Prostate Length All Distance measurement cm

T-Zone
Bladder Height All Distance measurement cm
Pre Residual
Post Residual Width All Distance measurement cm

Length All Distance measurement cm

Lt. Renal Height All Distance measurement cm

Rt. Renal Width All Distance measurement cm

Renal Pelvis All Distance measurement cm

8-70
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Small Parts Measurements

The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured items
are automatically entered into the report.

NOTE:
XXIt is convenient to calculate each measurement value on the Spectral Doppler image.
XXFor information on basic measurement methods, refer to ‘Basic Measurements’ and
‘Common Measurement Methods’ in this chapter..

Thyroid Measurement Menu

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit
Length All Distance measurement cm
Lt. Thyroid Vol.
Height All Distance measurement cm
Rt. Thyroid Vol.
Width All Distance measurement cm
Calculation after distance
%StD All %
measurement
%StA All Calculation after area measurement %
Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Lt. Thyroid Flow ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Thyroid Flow MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
PI PW Velocity measurement –
RI PW Velocity measurement –
S/D PW Continuous measurement –
Calculate after measuring TAmean,
Vol. Flow(D) PW ml/min
Vesl., and Dist.
Calculate after measuring TAmean,
Vol. Flow(A) PW ml/min
Vesl., and Area
Length All Distance measurement cm
Lt. Mass 1–5
Height All Distance measurement cm
Rt. Mass 1–5
Width All Distance measurement cm

8-71
 User Manual

Breast Measurement Menu

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Length All Distance measurement cm

Lt. Mass 1–10
Height All Distance measurement cm
Rt. Mass 1–10
Width All Distance measurement cm

Calculation after distance

%StD All %
measurement

Calculation after area

%StA All %
measurement

Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Lt. Breast Flow
ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Breast Flow
MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s

PI PW Velocity measurement –

RI PW Velocity measurement –

S/D PW Continuous measurement –

Calculate after measuring

Vol. Flow(D) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Dist.

Calculate after measuring

Vol. Flow(A) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Area

8-72
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Testis Measurements
Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Length All Distance measurement cm

Lt. Testis Vol.
Height All Distance measurement cm
Rt. Testis Vol.
Width All Distance measurement cm

D1 All Distance measurement cm

Epididymis
D2 All Distance measurement cm

Calculation after distance

%StD All %
measurement

Calculation after area

%StA All %
measurement

Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Lt. Testis Flow
ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Testis Flow
MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s

PI PW Velocity measurement –

RI PW Velocity measurement –

S/D PW Continuous measurement –

Calculate after measuring

Vol. Flow(D) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Dist.

Calculate after measuring

Vol. Flow(A) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Area

Length All Distance measurement cm

Lt. Mass 1–5
Height All Distance measurement cm
Rt. Mass 1–5
Width All Distance measurement cm

8-73
 User Manual

Superficial Measurements
Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Length All Distance measurement cm

Lt. Superficial Vol.
Height All Distance measurement cm
Rt. Superficial Vol.
Width All Distance measurement cm

Calculation after distance

%StD All %
measurement

Calculation after area

%StA All %
measurement

Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s

ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Lt. Superficial Flow
MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Superficial Flow
PI PW Velocity measurement –

RI PW Velocity measurement –

S/D PW Continuous measurement –

Calculate after measuring

Vol. Flow(D) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Dist.

Calculate after measuring

Vol. Flow(A) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Area

Vel A PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Vel B PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Length All Distance measurement cm

Lt. Mass 1–5
Height All Distance measurement cm
Rt. Mass 1–5
Width All Distance measurement cm

8-74
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Musculoskeletal Measurements

Measurement Menu
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured
items are automatically entered into the report.

NOTE: For information on basic measurement methods, refer to ‘Basic Measurements’ and
‘Common Measurement Methods’ in this chapter.

Measurement Menu Item Method Unit

Lt. Shoulder
#1 – #10 Distance measurement cm
Rt. Shoulder

Lt. Wrist
#1 – #10 Distance measurement cm
Rt. Wrist

Lt. Knee
#1 – #10 Distance measurement cm
Rt. Knee

Lt. Ankle
#1 – #10 Distance measurement cm
Rt. Ankle

8-75
 User Manual

Vascular Measurements
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured items
are automatically entered into the report.

NOTE:
XXFor information on basic measurement methods, refer to ‘Basic Measurements’ and
‘Common Measurement Methods’ in this chapter.
XXFor references on measurement items, see ‘Reference Manual Part 1’.

Carotid Measurement Menu

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Calculation after distance

%StD All %
measurement

Calculation after area

%StA All %
measurement

IMT All Distance measurement mm

Average calculation after

IMT Mean All mm
distance measurement

Lt. CCA Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

Rt. CCA
Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Lt. Bulb
Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Rt. Bulb
Lt. ICA PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. ICA ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Lt. ECA
MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. ECA
PI PW Velocity measurement –

RI PW Velocity measurement –

S/D PW Continuous measurement

Calculate after measuring

Vol. Flow(D) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Dist.

Calculate after measuring

Vol. Flow(A) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Area

8-76
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Calculation after distance

%StD All %
measurement

Calculation after area

%StA All %
measurement

Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace

Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace

Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace

Lt. Subclavian A PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Subclavian A
ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Lt. Vertebral A
Rt. Vertebral A MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s

PI PW Velocity measurement –

RI PW Velocity measurement –

S/D PW Continuous measurement

Calculation after measurement

Vol. Flow(D) PW ml/min
of TAmean, Vesl. Dist

Calculation after measurement

Vol. Flow(A) PW ml/min
of TAmean, Vesl. Area

8-77
 User Manual

Auto IMT+
This function allows you to take IMT measurements easily and quickly.

NOTE:
XXAuto IMT+ is an optional feature of this product.
XXAuto IMT+ is available only under the following conditions:
–– Probe: Linear Probe
–– Application: Vascular
–– Operation mode: 2D Freeze Mode

Auto IMT+ Screen

[Figure 8.2 Auto IMT+]

„„Auto IMT+ Measurement

1. After checking the probe and the application, start a carotid scan.
2. Press Freeze to obtain the desired image. Use the trackball to select the image you
want to measure the IMT on.
3. Tap Auto IMT+ on the touchscreen. The Auto IMT+ screen will appear.

8-78
 Chapter 8 Measurements

4. Use the trackball and the Set button to set a location for IMT measurement.
XXMeasure the length of a specific section. Press and hold the Set button at the
starting point and use the trackball to specify the end point.
XXYou can change the Near and Far positions of the measured area by using the
Change button on the control panel.
5. Once the measurement finishes, measurement values will be listed in a table.
6. Use the touchscreen, or the dial-button to select the measurement label, the location
of the blood vessel, and the direction of blood flow.

„„Setting Up Measurement Items

On the touchscreen menu, you may set up the measurement item, the location of the
blood vessel, and the direction of blood flow.
XXMeasurement item: Select measurement items among CCA, Bulb, ICA, and ECA. Use
the touchscreen button.
XXDirection: Select the blood flow direction either left or right. Use dial-button 2.
XXLocation: Select Prox(Proximal), Mid(Middle), or Dist(Distal) as the location of the blood
vessel to measure. Use dial-button 3.

NOTE: Exit Auto IMT+ using following functions:

XXChange Image Mode and Zoom
XXAnnotation, BodyMarker, Patient, SonoView, Report, Setup, Help

„„Measurement Result
XXMax: The maximum thickness of the Intima/Adventitia pair.
XXMean: The average thickness of the Intima/Adventitia pair.
XXSD: Standard Deviation
XXQI: The distance ratio of the measured point in a distance for Quality Index
measurement.

NOTE: Location of measurement result window cannot be changed and it is displayed in the
position established before Auto IMT+ measurement.

8-79
 User Manual

„„Applying to the Report

Auto IMT+ measurement results are automatically applied to the report. Report/Auto IMT+
measurement results can be checked.

„„Auto IMT+ Measurement Analysis

1. Tapping the Analysis on the touchscreen opens Analysis screen.
2. Select the desired analysis from Framingham/CHD, Risk Factor, Normal IMT, or User
Graph by using the trackball and the Set button.
The bar that corresponds to the measurement will be displayed on each graph.
However, if the measurement is smaller than Framingham/CHD, or Risk Factor, no bar
will be displayed.

User Graph
Tips!
You can use User Graph to adjust the graph and analyze the measurement results as you
want.

3. To finish analyzing, tap the Exit button on the touchscreen.

4. The following materials were referred to when analyzing the measurements of
Auto IMT+.

„„Framingham/CHD
Correlation between the Framingham Risk Score and Intima Media Thickness: the Paroi
Arterielle et Risque Cardio-vasculair (PARC) Study.
Pierre-Jean Touboul, EricVicaut, Julien Labreuche, Jean-Pierre Belliard, Serge Cohen,
Serge Kownator, Jean-Jacques Portal, Isabelle Pithois-Merli, Pierre Amarenco. On behalf
of PARC Study participating physicians.

„„Risk Factor
Mannheim Carotid Intima-Media Thickness Consensus (2004–2006)
P.J. Touboul, M.G. Hennerici, S.Meairs, H.Adams, P.Amarenco, N.Borstein, L.Csiba,
M.Desvarieux, S.Ebrahim, M.Fatar, R.Hermandez Hernandez, M.Jaff, S.Kownator, P.Prati,
T.Rundek, M.Sitzer, U.Schiminke, J.C. Tardif, A.Taylor, E.Vicaut, K.S.Woo, F.Zannad, M.Zureik

„„Normal IMT
Simon A, Gariepy J, Chironi G, Megnien JL, Levenson J: Intima-media thickness: a new tool
for diagnosis and treatment of cardiovascular risk. Journal of Hypertension 20:159-169, 2002

8-80
 Chapter 8 Measurements

UE Artery Measurement Menu

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Calculation after distance

%StD All %
measurement

Calculation after area

%StA All %
measurement
Lt. Subclavian A
Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Rt. Subclavian A
Lt. Axillary A Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Rt. Axillary A Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Lt. Brachial A PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Brachial A
ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Lt. Radial A
Rt. Radial A MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Lt. Ulnar A PI PW Velocity measurement –

Rt. Ulnar A RI PW Velocity measurement –
Lt. SPA
S/D PW Continuous measurement
Rt. SPA
Calculate after measuring
Vol. Flow(D) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Dist.

Calculate after measuring

Vol. Flow(A) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Area

8-81
 User Manual

UE Vein Measurement Menu

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Lt. Internal Jugular V

Rt. Internal Jugular V
Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Lt. Innominate V
Rt. Innominate V
Lt. Subclavian V
Rt. Subclavian V
Lt. Axillary V Dur T PW Time measurement ms
Rt. Axillary V
Lt. Brachial V
Rt. Brachial V
Lt. Cephalic V
Vesl. Dist PW Distance measurement cm
Rt. Cephalic V
Lt. Basilic V
Rt. Basilic V
Lt. Radial V
Rt. Radial V Vesl. Area PW Volume measurement cm2
Lt. Ulnar V
Rt. Ulnar V

8-82
 Chapter 8 Measurements

LE Artery Measurement Menu

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Lt. CIA, Rt. CIA Calculation after distance

%StD All %
Lt. IIA, Rt. IIA measurement

Lt. EIA, Rt. EIA Calculation after area

%StA All %
Lt. CFA, Rt. CFA measurement
Lt. SFA, Rt. SFA Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Lt. DF, Rt. DF Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Lt. Popliteal A
Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Rt. Popliteal A
Lt. ATA, Rt. ATA PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Lt. PTA, Rt. PTA ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Lt. Peroneal A MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Peroneal A
PI PW Velocity measurement –
Lt. DPA, Rt. DPA
Lt. MPA, Rt. MPA RI PW Velocity measurement –

Lt. LPA, Rt. LPA S/D PW Continuous measurement

Lt. Metatarsal A Calculate after measuring
Vol. Flow(D) PW ml/min
Rt. Metatarsal A TAmean, Vesl., and Dist.
Lt. DigitalA Calculate after measuring
Vol. Flow(A) PW ml/min
Rt. Digital A TAmean, Vesl., and Area

8-83
 User Manual

LE Vein Measurement Menu

Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit

Lt. CIV, Rt. CIV

Lt. IIV, Rt. IIV
Lt. EIV, Rt. EIV Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Lt. CFV, Rt. CFV
Lt. PFV, Rt. PFV
Lt. SFV, Rt. SFV
Lt. GSV, Rt. GSV
Lt. Popliteal V Dur T PW Time measurement ms
Rt. Popliteal V
Lt. LSV, Rt. LSV
Lt. ATV, Rt. ATV
Lt. PTV, Rt. PTV
Lt. Peroneal V Vesl. Dist PW Distance measurement cm
Rt. Peroneal V
Lt. MPV, Rt. MPV
LT. LPV, Rt. LPV
Lt. Metatarsal V
Rt. Metatarsal V Vesl. Area PW Volume measurement cm2
Lt. Digital V
Rt. Digital V

8-84
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Reports
The measurement results are summarized by application, and shown on the screen in a report
format.

Viewing Reports
Press the Report button on the control panel to switch to the Ultrasound Measure Report screen.
The measurement results are summarized by application, and shown on the screen in a report
format.

NOTE: Reports are displayed only for the applications that have measurement results.

„„Page
Pages are divided into Worksheet, Description, Comment, and image for each application;
opening a report will show the Preview screen by default. You can go to each section from
the Left Menu or Touch; if a section contains large amount of data to display, it will be
divided into mulle pages, which you may navigate pages using Touch or dial-button.

8-85
 User Manual

Report Preview
It provides report preview before print-out.

Property

„„Print
Set the type of Printer, Application, Print color, and Page.

„„Settings
You can set Header & Footer, Logo, Title, Patient Info, and Table Form of a report.

[Figure 8.3 Report Preview]

„„Printer
Select a USB Printer connected to the equipment.

„„Range
Set a page to save the print-out or images. Current Page selects the currently active page
and All Applications selects all pages.

8-86
 Chapter 8 Measurements

„„Application
Set application to save the Preview screen, printout, or images. Current Application will
select applications established in the worksheet, while All Application will select all
applications.

„„Color (Print)
Set the color of report in printout.

„„Color (Store)
Set the color of image to save images.

„„Page
Set pages to save the Preview screen, printout, or images. Echo Page will select a
landscape-formed report.

„„Header & Footer

Set the header and footer. Checking Show Date in Footer will display date in the bottom of
the right-hand side.

[Figure 8.4 Header & Footer]

8-87
 User Manual

„„Logo
Set a logo on the top of the report. It can be changed once it is connected to a USB.

„„Title
Set the title. User-selected title or a title set in the Patient will be shown.

„„Patient Info.
Set Patient information shown on the page. Only 1st Page shows the Patient information
only on the first page.

„„Table Form
Set the report form. Selection of Brief will show the results only, while selection of
2 Columns will show measure items in the two columns.

[Figure 8.5 Columns]

8-88
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Editing Report (Worksheet)

When you move the focus to a value that can be edited on a Worksheet, the borders of the edit
window will be marked in blue, and Edit mode will start by clicking.

[Figure 8.6 Worksheet]

[Figure 8.7 Worksheet – Touchscreen]

8-89
 User Manual

Modify Measurements
After you have edited a value and moved the focus away from the value or press Enter in the
keyboard, the edited value will be applied. Edited values will be indicated with '*' in front
of them. To delete a value, click the value that you wish to delete; the Delete button will be
activated on the touchscreen. Press this button to delete the value immediately.

„„Default Author
Reverts to the author of Setup settings.

„„Delete Cell
Select and delete a measurement value.

„„Delete Line
Delete all values with the same label as the selected value.

NOTE: If you change the Author in a Worksheet, the GA value will be changed. The Author you
change in a Report is only valid within the Report; the Author of the Setup will be used for
calculating the GA when you are taking measurements in Measurement mode.

„„AV.US
If Composite GA is Average, you may select or exclude GA values from each Label Av.US
that have been used for calculation.

8-90
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Measurement Display Method

The product allows you to measure one measurement item mulle times. However, only the
first three measurement results are saved in a report.
When taking measurements for the same item more than once, measurements can be
displayed in four ways. On the Edit Report screen, you can specify or change the measurement
display method.
Go to Setup > Measurement > Application > Doppler > Display Absolute Value and select ‘On’
to display absolute values in the report.

„„Average
Obtain the average of the measurements and display it on the screen.

„„Last
Display the last measurement on the screen.

„„Max
Display the largest value of the measurements on the screen.

„„Min
Display the smallest value of the measurements on the screen.

8-91
 User Manual

Adding Comments
Tap Comment on the touchscreen or click Comment in the left-hand menu on the Ultrasound
Report screen. A screen in which you can enter opinions will appear.
Tap the bottom of the entry window or the Comment button on the touchscreen and a window
will open to let you select a comment you have previously entered in Setup. Select Comment in
the window and the selected text will be entered at the location of the cursor in the comment
entry window.

NOTE: Comments may be added at Setup > Report > Comment. For more information, refer to
‘Report’ in ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’.

8-92
 Chapter 8 Measurements

[Figure 8.8 Comment]

[Figure 8.9 Comment – Touchscreen]

8-93
 User Manual

Print Reports
In the Preview screen, tap the Print button on the touchscreen or press Print in the left-hand
menu on Report screen. The measurement report for the selected application will be printed on a
connected printer.

NOTE: You can change the printer settings for printing measurement reports at Report >
Preview > Property > Print. For more information, refer to ‘Peripheral Device Settings’ in
‘Chapter 3. Utilities’.

Saving Reports
In the Preview screen, tap Export on the touchscreen. Or press Export in the left-hand side of
Report screen. Export button is activated only when it is connected to a USB. Export window will
appear and save the report in the external storage media.
Export window will appear and specify the directory, drive, file name, and file format. Click OK on
the screen to save the report. Tap Cancel to cancel.

[Figure 8.10 Export]

8-94
 Chapter 8 Measurements

Store SR
Tap Store SR on the touchscreen or the Left Menu to save the Measure SR Information.

Images
Select this if you want to attach images to the report. Tap the Image button on the touchscreen
or press Image in the Left Menu on the Ultrasound Report screen to open a window where you
can select images.

[Figure 8.11 Image]

8-95
 User Manual

[Figure 8.12 Image – Touchscreen]

1. Select images from the thumbnail on the right.

2. When images are selected, the Add button becomes active on the touchscreen. Tap the Add
button to attach the selected images to the report. Alternatively, double-click selected
images among the thumbnails to attach the associated images.
3. If you select images attached to a report, the Delete button becomes active so that you may
delete attached images. Press the Delete All button to delete all attached images.
4. You may select 1x1, 2x2, 3x3, or 4x4 for layout.

8-96
 Chapter 8 Measurements

OB Graph
After taking OB measurements, press Report on the touchscreen or control panel. Tapping OB
Graph on the touchscreen displays the Graph screen.
Click/tap the Single or Quad button on the screen/touchscreen. Select the layout on the graph
screen. You can review the graph and trends. To return to the Report screen, tap Preview on the
touchscreen or the Left Menu.

NOTE: The graph function can only be used with OB reports.

The list of measured items appears on the right side of the screen. If you select an item, a graph
for the selected item will appear on the screen.

NOTE:
XXTo execute the graph function, at least one Label containing a Growth Table must be
measured, and only a Label that has been measured may display graphs.
XXA graph is created based on the patient ID, LMP and measurement date.

[Figure 8.13 OB Graph]

8-97
 User Manual

[Figure 8.14 OB Graph – Touchscreen]

„„Select a Graph
Use the Trackball and the Set button to select an item from the list.

„„Single
A graph representing one obstetrics measurement will be displayed.

„„Quad
A graph representing four obstetrics measurements will be displayed.

„„Hide Grid
Erase the grids on a graph.

8-98
 Chapter 8 Measurements

„„All Fetus
Display graphs for all measured fetuses.

„„Current Fetus
Display graphs for the fetus currently being measured.

„„Trend
Tap Trend on the touchscreen. The past and present measurement values for a fetus are
displayed in the order of study date. It is shown on the graph with different markers for
different study dates.

„„Current
Tap Current on the touchscreen. The current measurements for a fetus are displayed by
study date.

„„User History
The past and present measurement values for the fetus are displayed in a table format.

„„Manual Trend
Display the measurement values-manually entered by the user-which are to be displayed
on the OB Growth Curve in Trend. Enter manually in Patient window.

„„Prev
Return to the previous page.

„„Next
Move on to the next page.

8-99
 User Manual

Standard Deviation & Percentile

Tips!
Among the OB information, the Growth table and the typical fetal distribution, for the same
number of weeks, are used to determine the following information:
XXThe normal distribution curve.
XXThe measurements for an actual fetus or a position in EFW distribution.
XXWhether or not a distribution point is within the normal range.
The number of weeks referenced for the Growth table can be set to LMP, Estab., DD, or
Average US GA, under Pctl. Criteria; the typical setting is LMP.
When the LMP is not known or uncertain, or when the difference between the LMP and the
Average US GA is substantial, care must be taken, as selecting different Pctl. Criteria can
result in a significant difference.
The distribution of the number of weeks in the Growth table for the selected reference is a
normal distribution. It is laterally symmetrical around 50% (the average) and it shows the
distance from the average as a deviation. The deviation can be represented by Standard
Deviation (SD) or Percentile terms.

68.3%

68.3%

95.5%

99.7%

[Figure 8.15 Distribution of Growth Table for the Selected Week

(m: mean, σ: standard deviation)]

8-100
 Chapter 8 Measurements

When represented by SD, a point near to the average indicates a value closer to ±0 SD and
Tips! a point further away from the average indicates a value closer to the maximum or minimum
value. The greater part of the range falls within ±3 SD, with ±1 SD representing 68.3% of the
entire range. Thus it can be seen that most fetal measurements are tightly clustered around
the average value.
The Percentile represents a point in distribution from 0 to 100 inclusive. Therefore, the
average point is represented as 50 Percentile.
As shown in the figure, the average point corresponds to 0 SD (that is, the 50th Percentile).
If a point is in the range from -1 SD to +1 SD, it falls within 68.3% of the entire range. This
means that the point falls within the range from 16 to 84.
Further, if a point is in the range from -2 SD to +2 SD, it falls within 95.5% of the entire range.
Thus, the point falls in the range from 3 to 97.
The SD and Percentile are interchangeable. Percentile can be used when a fetal
measurement ranking is desired while SD can be used when the distance between actual
fetal measurements and the average measurement is sought.
While the range of Growth table references that are primarily used with OB measurement
data varies depending on the user, the typical range accepted by most users is as below:
XXWhen references are created based on SD:
–– -2.0 SD – +2.0 SD (when converted to Percentile: 2.28 Percentile – 97.72 Percentile)
–– -1.5 SD – +1.5 SD (when converted to Percentile: 6.68 Percentile – 93.32 Percentile)
–– -1.0 SD – +1.0 SD (when converted to Percentile: 15.87 Percentile – 84.13 Percentile)
XXWhen references are created based on Percentile:
–– 2.5 Percentile – 97.5 Percentile (when converted to SD: -1.96 SD – 1.96 SD)
–– 5.0 Percentile – 95.0 Percentile (when converted to SD: -1.645SD – 1.645 SD)
–– 10.0 Percentile – 90.0 Percentile (when converted to SD: -1.288 SD – 1.288 SD)

8-101
 User Manual

Description
Tap Description on the touchscreen. OB and Gyn applications have their own preset items; for
other applications, only user-added items are available.

„„General OB
This item only becomes active when OB measurement is available. Tap the General OB
button on the touchscreen and you can select a description for the selected item.

„„Early OB
This item only becomes active when OB measurement is available. Tap the Early OB button
on the touchscreen and you can select a description for the selected item.

„„Biophysical Profiles
5 items of Breathing, Movement, Tone, AFV, and NST may be left blank or set as 0, 1, or 2;
the sum of each item will be displayed as Total.

NOTE: Biophysicial Profile is activated only when OB measurement values exist.

„„Default
This value has been preset in advance by the user.

„„Save as Default
Save the values currently set on the screen as default values.

„„Clear
Delete all items.

8-102
 Chapter 8 Measurements

„„Fetus Compare
In the OB Study Information screen, select the Number of Fetuses to enable measurement
for each fetus when taking OB measurement. Tap the Fetus Compare button on the
touchscreen and measurement for each fetus is displayed.

[Figure 8.16 Description]

[Figure 8.17 Description – Touchscreen]

8-103
 User Manual

Closing Reports
Tap Exit on the touchscreen or in the Left Menu. Alternatively, press the Report button on the
control panel.

8-104
Chapter 9 Image
Managements

‹‹Cine/Loop................................................. 9-3

‹‹Annotating Images.................................. 9-5

Annotation ............................................................... 9-5
BodyMarker ........................................................... 9-10

‹‹Saving, Playing and

Transferring Images...............................9-12
Saving Images.........................................................9-12
Playing Images...................................................... 9-13
Transferring Images.............................................. 9-14

‹‹Printing Images......................................9-15
Printing Images..................................................... 9-15

‹‹SonoView Mode......................................9-16
Exam List.................................................................9-17
Review – Exam Mode............................................ 9-19
Review – Compare Mode.....................................9-23
DICOM Q/R.............................................................9-29
 Chapter 9 Image Managements

Cine/Loop
Images are automatically saved in the memory during scanning. The saved images are useful for
patient diagnosis and review.
The saved images can be in Cine or Loop, depending on the Operation modes.
XX2D Cine: These are images temporarily saved in all Operation modes except M Mode and
Spectral Mode.
XXTrace Cine: Images that are saved in M Mode and Spectral Mode.

[Figure 9.1 Cine]

Starting and Finishing Image Review

During scanning, press the Freeze button on the control panel. The scanning is stopped and
the system switches to the image review mode screen.
Press the Freeze button again to return to the scan mode.

How to Review Images

Move the cursor to the Cine or Bar in the user information area to review an image. You can
search through saved images by moving the cursor with the trackball. The total number of
saved images and the number of the image currently being reviewed are shown next to the
bar.

9-3
 User Manual

„„Selecting Loop
Select an image to play by pressing the Change button in the control panel.
The touchscreen menu is changed when images are reviewed.

[Figure 9.2 Reviewing Images – Touchscreen]

„„Cine Play
Tap Cine Play on the touchscreen. You can stop or resume playback of an image by tapping
the button.

„„Cine Speed
Use the Cine Speed button on the touchscreen to adjust the automatic playback speed of
2D Cine or Trace Cine. Speed may be adjusted from 6 to 300%.

NOTE: For an explanation of the other items on the touchscreen, refer to Basic Mode in
‘Chapter 7. Modes of Operation’.

Reviewing Image in Multi-image Mode

Only the images in an active area can be reviewed. To review images in another area, change
the active area by using the Dual or Quad button on the control panel.

9-4
 Chapter 9 Image Managements

Annotating Images

Annotation
Enter or display text, Arrow, or BodyMarker on an image. This function is useful for differentiating
or marking a diagnosis area.

Starting Annotation Mode

Press the Text or Arrow button on the control panel.

[Figure 9.3 Annotation Mode]

Typing Text
Press the Text button in the control panel and enter text directly with the keyboard, or select
predefined text on the touchscreen.
You can move the cursor by using the trackball.

9-5
 User Manual

Text Mode in Soft Menu

[Figure 9.4 Screen Keyboard]

„„Change App.
Tap the touchscreen or use the dial-button to change application. The text list will change
depending on the selected application.

„„Keyboard
Tapping the button on the touchscreen opens the on screen keyboard.

„„Arrow
You can enter an arrow in a place you want over an image.

„„Delete Last Word

Erase the last entered text. Alternatively, use the Annotation key on the keyboard.

9-6
 Chapter 9 Image Managements

„„Delete All Words

All of the entered text has been erased. Alternatively, use the Delete All key on the
keyboard.

NOTE: Selecting Setup > Annotation > Library allows you to edit the entire page. For a more
detailed description, refer to ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’.

„„Set as Home Position

You can set the initial cursor position when Annotation Mode starts. Place the cursor on
any position of the screen and press Set as Home Position on the touchscreen.

„„Home Position
Pressing the Home button on the touchscreen moves you to the cursor position specified
by using the Home Position button.

„„Layer
Set Layer A and B.

„„Font Size
Select the font size to use. Select a value from 8 to 72 by using the dial-button on the
touchscreen.

Deleting Text
Press the Clear button on the control panel. All the text entered on the screen will be deleted.

Exiting Text Mode

Press the Exit button on the control panel or tap the Exit button on the touchscreen.

9-7
 User Manual

Arrow Mode
You can enter an arrow over an image. This function is useful for differentiating or marking a
diagnosis area.

[Figure 9.5 Arrow Mode]

Entering Arrow
1. When pressing the Arrow button on the control panel, it is converted to the entry mode.
Or press the Arrow button in the keyboard.
2. Use the dial-button’s Arrow Type to select the type of arrow you want.
3. Move the arrow to the desired position by using the trackball.
4. To adjust the size of the arrow, use the dial-button’s Arrow Size.
5. To adjust the rotation angle of the arrow, use the dial-button’s Rotate Arrow.
6. Press the Set button to finish. Press Exit to cancel.

Arrow and Pointer Button

Tips!
Pointer function is available in Annotation mode.

9-8
 Chapter 9 Image Managements

Deleting Arrows
Press the Clear and Delete All Arrows button on the control panel to delete all arrows
displayed on the screen. To delete the last arrow entered, tap Delete Last Arrow on the
touchscreen.

Exiting Arrow Mode

Press the Exit button on the touchscreen or control panel.

9-9
 User Manual

BodyMarker
Enter a BodyMarker over an image. This function is useful for differentiating or marking a
diagnosis area.

Entering BodyMarker Mode

When pressing Marker/Ref Knob on the control, it is converted to BodyMarker entry mode
and the touchscreen shows BodyMarker.

[Figure 9.6 BodyMarker Mode]

Inserting BodyMarker
1. BodyMarkers will appear on the touchscreen.
XXThe types of BodyMarker shown on the touchscreen vary depending on the selected
application.
XXUp to 19 BodyMarkers can be listed on the screen at one time.
When more BodyMarkers are provided, use > button on the touchscreen to navigate the
pages
2. Tap the touchscreen button or dial button for the BodyMarker you want; the BodyMarker
will then be displayed on the image.

9-10
 Chapter 9 Image Managements

3. When pressing Change Lib, it can be immediately changed to a desirable application.

4. Select a desirable probe shape by using Probe Type dial-button.
5. Adjust cursor angle by using the Rotate Probe dial-button or the Angle button on the
control panel.
6. Adjust the cursor size by using Size dial-button.
7. Set the initial cursor position when BodyMarker starts. Place the cursor on the screen and
tap Store Probe Position on the touchscreen.
8. To finish entering BodyMarkers, press the Set or Exit button on the control panel. To
cancel it, press Clear on the touchscreen or tap the Delete button on the touchscreen.

Changing BodyMarker Position

1. Press the Change button on the control panel.
2. Move the BodyMarker to a desired position by using the Trackball.
3. Press the Set button on the control panel again to confirm the new position.

Deleting a BodyMarker
Press Clear on the touchscreen or tap the Delete button on the touchscreen.

Exiting BodyMarker Mode

Tap the Exit button on the control panel or touchscreen.

NOTE: Go to Setup > BodyMarker > Library to set the library of BodyMarker. For a more
detailed description, refer to ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’.

9-11
 User Manual

Saving, Playing and Transferring

Images

Saving Images
The saved images are displayed in the thumbnail area.

WARNING: You must always enter the patient ID, because all images are saved according
to patient ID. Failure to enter a patient ID may result in a loss of and/or critical errors in
previously saved images.

Saving Images
If no patient information has been entered, a Temp ID will be created and saved. The saved
images can then be edited and managed in SonoView mode.

Saving (Still Image/Multi Frame Image)

Use the Store Clip function of U1–6 button to save it. For a detailed description for Store/
Send/Print settings, refer to ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’.
XXWhen frozen, specify the range of the image you want to save by using the trackball or
the Trim Start and Trim End buttons on the touchscreen, then tap the configured U1–6
buttons to save the Cine image.
XXLive Mode works as shown below according to settings. For information about the settings,
please refer to ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’.
If patient information does not exist, saving Cine in Freeze Mode will create a Temp ID for
saving.
If all frames are saved in Live Mode, the saving process is automatically finished according to
a predefined time.
The saved images are added to the thumbnail list on the right side of the screen.

9-12
 Chapter 9 Image Managements

Playing Images
You can play the saved images in SonoView and Operation modes.

Playing Images in SonoView

NOTE: Refer to ‘SonoView’ in this chapter.

Viewing Images in Operation Modes

Use the Pointer button on the control panel. Note that this function is available only when
there are images saved in the thumbnail list. Press the Pointer button and the cursor will
appear on the screen.

9-13
 User Manual

Transferring Images
You can transfer images to a PACS system that supports DICOM. You can transfer all saved
images automatically, or select a desired image and transfer it manually. For information on the
DICOM server settings and DICOM operations, please refer to ‘Connectivity Settings' in ‘Chapter 3.
Utilities’.

Transferring Images in Operation Modes

You can transfer images automatically. Images are transferred by using the storage server
transmission method in Setup > Connectivity > DICOM. Please refer to ‘‘Connectivity Settings'
in ’Chapter 3. Utilities’ of this manual.

Transferring Images in SonoView

You can transfer images manually. The following two methods are available:

„„Sending Exam
Send all images for an exam.
1. Select an exam from the Exam List.
2. Click the Send button on the left side of the screen. All images for the selected exam
will be sent.

„„Sending Selected Images

Select a desired image from among the images for an exam and send it out.
1. Select the image in the SonoView screen.
2. Click the Send button on the left side of the screen. The selected images will be sent.

9-14
 Chapter 9 Image Managements

Printing Images
NOTE:
XXUse it after establishing functions in Setup > Peripherals > Printer.
XXConfigure the Store/Send/Print functions in Setup > Customize > Buttons before use.

Printing Images
Press the U1–6 buttons on the control panel. Images are printed via an echo printer. For
information on how to set up a printer, please refer to ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’.

9-15
 User Manual

SonoView Mode
This is the HS50/HS60/XH50/XH60’s integrated image management program. It provides image
saving/filing, preview, delete, and other PC-compatible export features.
The image file types used in this product follow the international standard DICOM (Digital
Imaging and Communication in Medicine). As a result, the PACS (Picture Archiving
Communication System) can be implemented without any additional costs, and it’s easy to
exchange image files with other hospitals or equipment.
This product supports the Bitmap file format (.bmp), which is commonly used on standard PCs,
ensuring easier exchange of image data.

Launching SonoView Mode

Press the SonoView button on the control panel. This will launch the SonoView screen.
If there are saved images available for the current exam, the information and saved images
for the exam will appear when SonoView Mode starts.

WARNING:
XXBefore saving images or using SonoView Mode, you must register the patient information.
XXAll diagnosis information in the product is saved and managed for each patient ID. As a
result, saving images without entering a patient ID may result in a loss of and/or critical
errors in previously saved images.

9-16
 Chapter 9 Image Managements

Exam List
Appears when the SonoView button is pressed. Or tap Exam List in Review Mode to see the exam
list.

[Figure 9.7 Exam List]

Enter search criteria at the top of the Exam List screen, and press Search. Search results will be
listed on the screen.
You can select an exam from the list and examine, delete, or send it.
Refer also to ‘Printing Images’ and ‘Transferring Images via DICOM’ later in the document.
You can select the data storage location. HDD, Media, and Q/R are provided.

Hide Search
Hides the Exam list.

Show Search
Shows hidden Exam list.

9-17
 User Manual

Backup Exam
Gets activated when selecting an exam in HDD. Continue to back up the selected exam. Select
a drive to back up to and press Yes to continue the backup process.
XXIf you select the Delete Patient Information checkbox, then the patient information will be
deleted after backup.

Restore Exam
Gets activated when selecting an exam from USB storage or CD/DVD. Load the selected exam
to HDD.

Review
When one or more exams are selected, the button is activated. The review screen for the
selected exams will open. For a more detailed description, refer to ‘Review Exam Mode’.

Continue
Is activated when an exam from the last 24 hours is selected. This allows you to modify the
exam.

9-18
 Chapter 9 Image Managements

Review – Exam Mode

Press Exam in the upper left corner of the screen.
In the Exam Mode, you can review the current or saved exam.
The image that is selected on the screen will be highlighted with a white border.

Exam Mode Screen

Exams for each patient ID are displayed by date in a tree structure on the left-hand side of the
screen. The number represents the number of saved images. To show or hide exams, use the
trackball and the Set button to select a desired ID.

[Figure 9.8 Exam Mode]

9-19
 User Manual

[Figure 9.9 Exam Mode – Touchscreen]

Exam Select
Use the trackball and the Set button to select a desired exam from the list on the left-hand
side of the screen. The selected exam will be marked on the list in blue. The saved image will
also be displayed on screen.

„„Reviewing the Current Exam

Click Current Exam. The current exam and its images are displayed on the screen. This
button is only enabled when the patient ID is registered. Exams brought from the ExamList
can be closed by using Close or Close All button.

„„Reviewing Exams Performed Within the Last 24 Hours

Double-click an image. The exams that were performed within the last 24 hours and their
images, are displayed. The first performance date of the exam appears in the feedback area.
You can place measurements, annotations, and BodyMarkers on the loaded exam screen.
In addition, you can update the exam with new image scans.

„„Reviewing Exams Performed Prior to the Last 24 Hours

Double-click an image. The exams that were performed prior to the last 24 hours and their
images, are displayed. The first performance date of the exam appears in the feedback area.
You can place measurements, annotations, and BodyMarkers on the loaded exam screen.
However, you cannot update the exam with new image scans.

9-20
 Chapter 9 Image Managements

Exam Scroll
The image of the previous or next page is displayed on the screen. Access by rotating the Page
dial-button on the touchscreen. Rotating the dial-button to the left displays the previous
page image, while rotating it to the right displays the next page image.
However, this button may not be used when the number of exams saved is less than the
number of images that appear on a page under the current layout.

Closing Exam Review

Tap Close on the touchscreen. To close all exams in the list, click the Close All button.

Pan
You can use the Set button to move the image or scan within the selected image layout.

Reset
Reset the selected image or scan to the initially saved screen.

Select All
All images in the current exam will be selected.

Unselect All
All images in the selected exam will be deselected.

Favorite
After selecting an image in the Exam SonoView Mode, you'll be able to use the Favorite
button on the touchscreen.
When you select a Favorite, it will be displayed as in the top right-hand corner of the
thumbnail image.

Delete
Delete the selected image.

9-21
 User Manual

Zoom
Use by rotating the Zoom dial-button on the touchscreen. You can adjust the selected images
from 3 to 200. This appears when an image is selected.

Page
Run by rotating the Page dial-button on the touchscreen. Move images of the selected exam.

Layouts
You can adjust the number of images displayed on the screen. Use the touchscreen button
that represents the layout. Up to 9 images (3×3) can be compared at the same time.
The numbers shown in the layout section indicate the column and row of where an image
will be displayed on the screen. You can change the numbers shown in the layout section to
customize the layout.

Displaying in Full Screen

Place the cursor on the image and double click the Set button to display the thumbnail
loading screen in Scan Mode.

Reviewing 3D Images
If the saved image is 3D, the 3D indicator will appear at the bottom of the image. Double
clicking the screen will start 3D View for image review.

Cine play
Tap the Cine Play button on the touchscreen if the saved image is Cine. You can use Play,
Pause, and Stop to navigate the image forwards and backwards.

9-22
 Chapter 9 Image Managements

Review – Compare Mode

Press Compare in the upper left corner of the screen. In Compare Mode, you can select the
images related to an exam to compare and review them. The image that is selected on the screen
will be highlighted with a blue border.

Compare Mode Screen

As in Exam Mode, exams for each ID appear on the screen. In addition, images for the selected
exam are displayed in thumbnail format.

[Figure 9.10 Compare Mode]

9-23
 User Manual

[Figure 9.11 Compare Mode – Touchscreen]

* All functions except the Page and the details below are the same as those in Exam Mode.

Select an Image
Use the trackball and the Set button to select an image from the thumbnail list. The selected
image is highlighted in blue in the list. Select a location on the screen where the image will
be displayed and then the selected image will appear.

NOTE: Only scanned data can be loaded into the image area.

Thumbnail Scroll
Images of the previous or next pages are displayed in the thumbnail list. Select the desired
image by scrolling with the trackball or using the Thumbnail Scroll dial-button on the
touchscreen. Rotating the dial-button to the left displays the previous page's images in the
thumbnail list. Rotating it to the right displays the next page’s images in the thumbnail list.

Image Scroll
The image of the previous or next page is displayed on the screen. Select the desired image by
using the trackball or using the Image Scroll dial-button on the touchscreen.

9-24
 Chapter 9 Image Managements

Mobile Export

4 5 6

[Figure 9.12 Exam Mode – Mobile Export]

1 Selected Files: It shows types of selected images.

When selecting SR checkbox, it will only be transferred when the file to be transferred
contains an SR.
2 Connection Status: The phone number of the connected smartphone (if connected via
Wi‑Fi) will be displayed.
3 Stand by: Displays data conversion and transfer status.
4 QR Code: Use the smartphone’s QR code scanner to download the Mobile Export
application.
5 Send: Send the selected images to the smartphone.
6 Close: Close Mobile Export.

NOTE:
XXMobile Export is an optional feature of this product.
XXImages that can be transferred through the Mobile Export are available only for acquired
still image or recorded video.
XXEnter the clinic name in the system setting. The clinic’s name will be displayed at the
bottom of the application screen when you run the Mobile Export application.

9-25
 User Manual

Preparation
Tips!
XXTo use Mobile Export, the system and your smartphone need to be connected over Wi-Fi.
XXYou can use the USB Wi-Fi Dongle Key to set up Wi-Fi on the system.

Printing Images
1. Press the Print button. The Print window will be displayed.
2. Select the type, printing direction, and options for the printer.
3. Click the Print button to print the image. Click Close to cancel.

Canceling a Print Job in Progress

Tips!
To cancel a print job in progress, use Setup > Peripherals > Peripherals > Printer > Printer
Setting. Select the printer with the print job you want to cancel, and press the Clear Print
Setting button. For more information, refer to ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’ in this manual.

NOTE: If Thermal Printer is selected, Include Header and Include Page Numbers will be
inactive, and headers and page numbers will not be printed on the pages.

[Figure 9.13 Image Print]

9-26
 Chapter 9 Image Managements

Transferring Images via DICOM

Transfer the selected image and measurement data via DICOM. The icon is enabled only when
an image is selected. The icon is disabled in a system where DICOM is not enabled.
1. Select an image and click the Send button on the screen. The DICOM Storage window will
appear.
2. Press the Send button to transfer the selected image to the DICOM server. Click Close to
cancel.

[Figure 9.14 DICOM Storage]

9-27
 User Manual

Saving Images
1. Press the Export button. Export window will open.
2. Specify the various parameters, such as directory, drive, filename and file format.
XXSelect the Create Patient Folder(s) checkbox to automatically create folders using
patient information.
XXIf the Hide Patient Information checkbox has been selected, patient information is not
displayed.
XXYou can select Low, Mid, or High for Image Quality.
3. Click the Export button to start saving. Click the Close button to cancel.

[Figure 9.15 Image Export]

Exiting SonoView
Click the Exit button on the screen. Alternatively, you can press the SonoView button or the
Exit button on the control panel to exit SonoView Mode.

9-28
 Chapter 9 Image Managements

DICOM Q/R
At least one server should be registered in the DICOM Q/R settings.

NOTE: Before using this feature, make sure that DICOM Q/R is properly configured. To
configure DICOM Q/R, please refer to ‘Chapter 3. Utilities’ and configure Setup > Connectivity
> DICOM functions before use. There is no limit on the number of DICOM Q/R servers you can
register.

Run DICOM Q/R

Retrieve an image from the selected server by following this process:
1. After entering the ID in the Patient window, register or start an exam.
In the SonoView mode, enter an Exam List and select the combobox to Q/R.
2. Enter the Patient ID, Accession Number, or Last Name as a search term.
XXAlternatively, search by selecting the modality you wish to find. You may select MR, CT,
Mammo, US, DR, or PET for the modality.
XXYou may search by designating a period. Select Period. Select either Today, Last Week,
Last Month, or Manual in the combo box. If Manual is selected, you do not have to
select date separately.
3. Press the Search button to search.
4. Patient ID, Patient Name, Modality, Exam Date, Accession Number, Description, and Series
Count will appear on the Study List search result.
5. Up to three studies can be selected from the Study List of the same Patient ID.
6. Select a study on the Study List to search within a series. Modality, Exam Date, Description,
Series No., Image Count, and Status will appear on the Series List search result.

9-29
 User Manual

7. After searching for Series, select the Series you wish to retrieve. You may select or deselect
up to 10 series by using the Select All checkbox. Click Retrieve. If 10 series are selected, no
additional series can be selected.

[Figure 9.16 DICOM Q/R]

9-30
 Chapter 9 Image Managements

Retrieval Data Manager

1. Press Retrieval Data Manager to display the Retrieved Data Manager window.
2. In the Retrieved Data Manager window, select the series by using the checkbox.

NOTE: If you have not started the diagnosis, select the series in the Data Manager window by
using the checkbox and press Delete to delete. Locked exams cannot be deleted by using the
checkbox.

3. Press the SonoView button to view the selected exam image in the SonoView window.
4. This function can be used to compare data by pressing Compare.
5. Checking Show Only Selected will show the selected exams only.
6. Tap Close on the screen.

[Figure 9.17 Retrieval Data Manager]

9-31